By the same author

LORDS OF THE STORM
A Fulminators novella

BORN OF THE STORM
A Fulminators short story

LAST FLIGHT
An Aeronautica Imperialis short story

GREEN AND GREY
An Astra Militarum short story

Further tales of the Space Marines

CARCHARODONS: RED TITHE
A novel by Robbie MacNiven

CARCHARODONS: OUTER DARK
A novel by Robbie MacNiven

INDOMITUS
A novel by Gav Thorpe

• DAWN OF FIRE •
Book 1: AVENGING SON
by Guy Haley

Book 2: THE GATE OF BONES
(Coming soon)
by Andy Clark

THE DEVASTATION OF BAAL
A Blood Angels novel by Guy Haley

ASHES OF PROSPERO
A Space Wolves novel by Gav Thorpe

WAR OF SECRETS
A Dark Angels novel by Phil Kelly

OF HONOUR AND IRON
An Ultramarines novel by Ian St. Martin

APOCALYPSE
An Imperial Fists, White Scars and Raven Guard novel by Josh Reynolds

FIST OF THE IMPERIUM
An Imperial Fists novel by Andy Clark

Contents

Cover

Backlist

Title Page

Warhammer 40,000

Prologue

Part 1

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Part 2

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Part 3

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Epilogue

About the Author

An Extract from ‘Dawn of Fire: Avenging Son’

A Black Library Publication

eBook license

For more than a hundred centuries the Emperor has sat immobile on the Golden Throne of Earth. He is the Master of Mankind. By the might of His inexhaustible armies a million worlds stand against the dark.

Yet, He is a rotting carcass, the Carrion Lord of the Imperium held in life by marvels from the Dark Age of Technology and the thousand souls sacrificed each day so that His may continue to burn.

To be a man in such times is to be one amongst untold billions. It is to live in the cruellest and most bloody regime imaginable. It is to suffer an eternity of carnage and slaughter. It is to have cries of anguish and sorrow drowned by the thirsting laughter of dark gods.

This is a dark and terrible era where you will find little comfort or hope. Forget the power of technology and science. Forget the promise of progress and advancement. Forget any notion of common humanity or compassion.

There is no peace amongst the stars, for in the grim darkness of the far future, there is only war.

Prologue

1

‘There are monsters out there.’

The gunner gestured along the barrel of the heavy stubber.

The loader squinted out over the sea, that endless, bloody sea. All he could see were slowly moving waves.

‘Where?’

‘In the deeps.’

The loader shook his head and turned back to tending his lho-stick, shielding it from the wind. Even with them hunkered down in the emplacement the wind sent zephyrs that alternately set the lho-stick flaring or, when the wind was leavened with salt spray, threatened to extinguish it entirely.

‘So you reckon these “monsters” are why they’ve got us here, pointing our guns at nothing. Never knew you were so in with the… with the…’ The loader’s words stuttered away into silence. The gunner glanced whitely at him, the fear showing in the swift peripheral movement: a look, and then away.

They learned, they all learned, not to mention those whose names carried on the air. Those who did not learn, who failed to take the hint from turned-away faces and shuttered eyes, disappeared in the night or, worse, walked out in the bright light of day.

Better to forget your own name than to call on one who might answer.

The gunner – he had put away his name as he had put away his humanity – stared out over the sea, squinting at the light scattering among the waves. The world was ocean, studded with a bare handful of coral uprisings, extrusions from the depths. Back in the forgotten past, when he had been a boy and had a name, people had lived on the ocean, making their living by fishing for the debris of the wrecks that littered the shallow seas around the coral atolls. But beyond the atolls, on the horizon where the sea swallowed the sky, the waters fell away to the deeps. That which plunged into the ocean there went down into the abyss.

The world had been called Sagaraya then. Occasional memories surfaced in the gunner’s mind of when he had sailed with his father and his uncles on light outriggers launched from the mother ship – a city of floating vessels, ships tied together, rising and falling over the endless waves. Sometimes, in the depths of the night watch, when he hovered between sleep and waking, the gunner lingered among those memories, feeling the warmth of the sun on his back and the shock of the water as the boy he was plunged in, diving fish-quick into the depths to retrieve some precious item from a wreck.

For wrecks there were aplenty: they fell in fiery ruin from the sky, the wash from their falling rocking the mother ship as it anchored among the atolls. The tales his people had once told said that Sagaraya was an ocean amid the sea of stars, set athwart the currents of space in such a way that many a vessel, voyaging between suns and caught by a rip tide, was carried along, helpless, until the current sent it plunging down into Sagaraya: the world of ocean receiving castaways from the world of stars.

Sometimes the gunner even remembered the stories his people had told of their coming to this world of water, of how they too had fallen from the sky. But the waters of Sagaraya had extinguished the fire of their falling and washed away the memory of the world from which they had come. The sea washed everything away.

The gunner, in the few dreams that pierced the waking dream of his life, sometimes felt himself in the sea’s womb, swimming, the light playing over his flanks and the sea bottom below him, as free and weightless as the fish. But in those dreams, a glance ahead showed always the same thing – the sea falling away into the deep: dark, without end.

They called that the Fall.

Where the shallow seas plunged into the abyss.

Some of the younger divers hunted around the edges of the Fall, pulling down below the thermocline, where the warm waters of the shallow sea ended and the cold ocean began. There, sometimes, the deep currents pushed upwards wrecks that had been a thousand years adrift in the depths. Strange creatures stalked those wrecks, and stranger treasures waited those brave and strong enough to venture in for them.

It was one of those wrecks, drifting from the deep, that had brought the gods from the sky. Whispers of it ran among the divers, the young men eager to earn glory and girls from their exploits. Tales told that it held, deep in its belly, a treasure that would unlock the stars, carrying whoever possessed it beyond the sky. The wreck the gunner had glimpsed himself. He had still been too young to be allowed to venture it. His father had laughed at his desperate pleas.

‘There will be others, when you are old enough and big enough,’ his father had said.

His father had been wrong. There were no more wrecks to dive after that. No more swimming beneath the sun on the shifting waves. There was an end to their names.

The gunner had been there when the divers returned, triumphant, bearing the treasure from the deep. In the mother ship, they had unveiled it, holding it up for all who were tall enough to see. The gunner had sat upon his father’s shoulders that he might see over the crush.

There had been many items retrieved from that old, deep wreck that had drifted in the currents of the ocean. The divers – the gunner remembered them, their faces still young, vibrant, alive – had wielded their prizes, raising them above their heads, as the Fisher King summoned them each to display their finds before the crowd of whispering, gasping, cheering onlookers.

Then, last of all, there was the glass. It was black.

Strange glass, indeed, that allowed no light to pass through it.

To the eye, it was little more than a fused lump, melted in part as if by a fire beyond imagining. Even in brightest day, the sun of Sagaraya had no power to warm it: the glass was cold, cold as the deep, dark ocean of the Fall.

Stranger still, to the eyes of those watching fishermen and divers, was its condition: it was pristine. Neither algae nor barnacle obscured its surface; not even coral, endlessly seeking a solid home in the shifting sea, had adhered to its night dark.

The diver who had found the glass held it high, turning it that all the fisherfolk might see it.

‘Throw it back!’

The screech was high and cutting, slicing through the silent awe.

The gunner remembered his young self turning with the crowd to see who spoke such words, and the murmured repetitions of the name, spreading through the crowd like the waves: Mother, Mother, Mother, Mother, Mother…

Mother, small, her back hunched into a shell shape by the weight of the years she carried, crabbed towards the Fisher King and the assembled divers.

‘Why do you counsel this, Mother?’ asked the Fisher King. ‘It has ever been the custom of our people to take the gifts of the great deep and offer them to the gods in return for their favour. Why would you have us do different with this?’

Mother stopped, her way barred by two young men, friends and followers of the divers who stood clustered on the Fisher King’s harbour.

‘Cast it away,’ Mother repeated, her voice growing shriller, higher, thinner, in the panic of her urgency.

The Fisher King glanced doubtfully at the divers who surrounded him. These were the young men with knives and spears who rode the waves: from among them would come his successor when he was no longer able to pass the challenge and swim below the mother ship, from one side to the other. But, as yet, none of them had seen fit to contest the throne. A glance at the lowering expression on the young man who had found the black glass told him that casting the treasure back into the deep would see him challenged when next the red moon rose.

But it was Mother who spoke. Oldest. Wisest.

‘Let us think on this, Mother. Allow me to summon the Port. Then we shall hear your words and your warning. Until then, I ask you, wait.’

Mother looked up at the Fisher King, sat on his throne of shell, her eyes near as black as the glass. For the first time he could remember, he saw hesitation in her eyes.

‘Very well. Summon the Port. But, until the Port meets, keep that… that thing secret.’

‘I will send messengers to all our vessels upon the sea and summon the Port,’ said the Fisher King, ‘where you will speak and tell your fears so that all may hear and decide our course.’

So the Fisher King had promised.

But even as a boy, the gunner had seen the impatience and the irritation on the faces of the young men gathered around the Fisher King. He doubted that they would brook this delay before bringing what they had found to the market.

He was right.

Even while the vessels returned to port, some of the wares recovered from the wreck were taken to the market. There, on the atoll reserved for them, men – and some creatures that barely passed for men – descended from the sky to browse the items salvaged from the many wrecks of the ocean world.

Then the gods came. Descending in flame and wrath from the sky, drawn by tales of what the young men had found. Even as the Port met, and debated, and decided, fruitlessly, to cast the glass back into the deeps, the gods were taking as votaries the impatient young men, eager for glory, and sending them to do their bidding.

The men with bloodied hands.

That was the name they took when they put down the Fisher King, tearing him apart. That was the name they had when they came for Mother.

The boy had been there, an excited follower among the crowd, sensing the charge in the air, the iron-electric tang of blood about to be spilled. He had followed the men carrying Mother to their new master, manhandling her over the shifting boats of the mother ship towards the coral atoll where the new gods had installed themselves. He remembered the dry crack as they broke one of Mother’s fingers. Her hiss of pain. The splash as they held her face underwater. He had watched, half ashamed, half exulting in the overthrowing of all the powers of his world.

Then she had turned her face to him. Mother had looked through the crowd of gesticulating, jeering figures and her black eyes had locked on his. And she had spoken to him. Even amid the tumult, the madness of the crowd, he had heard what Mother said.

‘You will remember yourself before the end.’

They had dragged her away then, leaving the boy shocked and staring after them. Dragged her to the temple to the new gods, where the divers left their offerings of the riches of the ocean for the payment of the gods’ blessing, and there they offered Mother’s life in sacrifice.

But Mother had cheated them. Her ending was meant to be long and agonising, a threnody of pain offered in hope of slaking the thirst of thirsty gods.

But Mother had loosed her soul from its flesh before the rite had even begun. In their frustration, they flayed the insensate body, but Mother was gone. What was left was only meat and they no more than butchers.

After Mother’s death, his people put aside their names. There was only service to the gods, the capricious, demanding, insatiable gods. Some among his people ascended so far in their service that they were given new names. But the gunner was not one of these. He served. He endured. He tried to forget his name. The dream memories plagued his sleeping but then he would wake into the dream of his life and shut those memories away.

Now he was assigned to this lonely gun emplacement. The loader was an off-worlder. The gunner had not asked his name, nor had he ever offered it.

The loader, after their brief, aborted conversation, went back to tending his lho-stick. He had an apparently inexhaustible supply of the cheapest varieties; the smoke stink clung to the gunner’s hair and skin for all of his off-watch.

The gunner followed the barrel of the heavy stubber with his eyes, noting the rust spots and algal growths already stippling the metal. The sea transformed metal into itself, turning something smooth and engineered into a profusion of budding, sprawling life.

Going past the stubber, the gunner looked out to sea. His eyes narrowed. The horizon had disappeared into an obscurity of grey. A sea fog, a haar, was rising over the cold, deep waters beyond the Fall, which lay nearer here than elsewhere in the shallow sea. The gunner tasted the air. It stung, with an electric vivid bite: charged, it was pulling the haar to itself. Soon, within half an hour he judged, the fog would roll in, and then everything would be reduced to a grey, closed world.

The haar, heavy with its electrical charge, blanked out all communication by vox, reducing every message to random blurts of noise. Even the voice was muzzled, for the haar swallowed sound. It was all but impossible to speak to a man you could not see, and since sight was reduced to mere feet, there were few people indeed you could speak to while the haar lay over the shallow sea.

The gunner scanned the waves. In advance of the oncoming fog, they had reduced to ripples. Tiny cousins to the great ocean rollers. A small, unwonted smile tugged at the gunner’s lips as he watched the setting sun playing light games with the waves.

It was beautiful.

Then the waves started to swirl in closing, whirlpool rings, about a hundred yards from shore where the sea began to shallow.

They were like the rings the withdrawing tide made when playing around a rock outcrop soon to be exposed.

But the tide was rising.

The gunner stared.

The ripples were approaching, coming closer to the beach. There were others too, flanked behind and beside the first.

The waves broke, and parted for a moment, over the first.

He saw grey. A shape pitted and scarred. Then the water covered it again.

The gunner scanned, looking left and right, searching for where it had gone. Was it some item of wreckage being washed in to shore?

Then it emerged.

It rose from the waves. Twin pits of black light burned in its depths, turned towards him in dreadful contemplation.

The gunner felt his grip tighten on the stubber’s stock. His finger tightened on the trigger.

It rose higher from the sea. It was striding towards him, the water glistening as it flowed in slick waves off its grey mass, revealing curved, intricate patterns, interlaced designs of black and grey: spears and teeth and suns and heads. And sharks. The great maw gaped blackly from the creature’s chest.

For now it waded waist-deep through water that would have covered the gunner to his neck. Its eyes were black: dark with the ocean void. And its eyes were turned on him.

The gunner slowly released the stubber’s trigger.

The giant stopped. It stood up to its knees in water, now. The waves broke about its legs, swirling brokenly into an eddy. Behind and beside it, other giants were still too. Waiting.

‘There are monsters out there…’

The loader looked up from tending his lho-stick and, seeing the gunner staring out to sea, glanced in the same direction.

‘By the powers…’ he swore, and looked at the gunner. ‘Why aren’t you firing? Shoot!’

But the gunner released the stock handles.

The loader glanced back towards the ocean, then pushed the gunner aside. ‘Get out of the way.’

‘…but none so monstrous…’

The loader reached for the trigger.

The gunner drew his autopistol from his waist holster and pressed it to the side of the loader’s head. Feeling the pressure, the loader turned.

‘What are–’

‘…as that which we have become.’

The loader’s head jerked back and he fell across the lip of the emplacement, staring up at the blue of the sky, a new eye in the centre of his forehead.

The gunner stood up slowly. He climbed out of the emplacement and began to walk down across the beach to the giant.

No. He was not walking to the giant. He was walking to pass the giant.

As the sand firmed beneath the gunner’s feet, he looked into the creature’s black, void eyes. And the void looked into him.

Then, as the gunner approached the water’s edge, the giant reached up and removed its helmet.

The face the gunner saw might have been a brother of his own: the same dark-coloured skin and broad brow, with the designs that covered the giant’s armour swirling over its cheeks and forehead too – as they did on the gunner’s own face.

The gunner stepped into the sea.

The water felt familiar. As if it had been waiting upon him.

The giants stood still and silent as he walked towards them, the water reaching to his knees and then his waist, so that he was forced to wade.

Approaching the leader, the gunner looked up at its face. Now close, he saw that despite the surface similarity in their appearance, there was an underlying pallor to the giant’s skin, as if he had been grasped by pale death and yet still lived. The initial similarity in the eyes was deceiving, too: the gunner’s own eyes were dark but the giant’s were black as the ocean deeps, beyond the reach of the sun. The giant that looked down upon him was old beyond his understanding.

The gunner, looking up at the giant, spoke a word, a name long suppressed, and the giant received the word in silence.

Then the gunner walked past the giant, turning his eyes out towards the sea. The water was deeper and he struck out, swimming, cutting a line through the gentle waves towards the point, not far from here, where the shallow sea fell away into the deep. Although the gunner did not look back, he felt the gaze of the giants following him as he swam out to the open ocean.

The haar was coming closer to land, following in the wake of the giants.

Coming to the Fall, the gunner took several quick, shallow breaths before filling his lungs.

The gunner knifed, diving downwards, swimming with all the pleasure of the boy he had once been and all the power of the man he was. He swam, pulling himself deeper against the buoyancy of his own body, pulling himself down and down and down. He could see the Fall, the cliffs plunging into the dark, but he had gone beyond their edge. He was passing into the deep ocean.

As the last light faded and the diver, lungs straining, came to where the endless void of the deep ocean began, he opened his mouth and with all his life’s breath called his name into the ocean void.

And the void received his name and carried the diver down into its depths, his hair flowing out around his head in a dark streaming halo.

‘Tangaroa.’

The giant spoke the name as he stood in the surf.

The haar was approaching.

He signalled the other waiting giants.

The haar rolled past them, swallowing the grey giants into its blankness.

Soon, the islands of the shallow sea would be covered in fog, and all would be reduced to voice and void.

The giant led the Carcharodons, the stalkers of the outer darkness, into that void.

2

The long service of the captain of the Named to the Ruinous Powers had brought him power, command and the promise of the unveiling of secrets as yet unrevealed. But, most personally, it had brought him a name.

Lonath Cerunnos.

The name had been given to him. Even now, a century and more after its giving, he preferred not to remember the circumstances of his naming – he had expected that the sentimentality attached to familial relationships would slough away under the new dispensation to which he had devoted his life – but he remained forever grateful for his name. Only those whose service was deemed worthy were given names: the vast majority remained nameless from their birth into this new life through to the consummation of their service to those who always thirsted.

But Captain Lonath Cerunnos had a name. As such, he was more than just fodder for the gods.

‘My lord?’

The cramped ranks of auspex monitors and vox-operators crammed into the narrow confines of the command bunker were all studiously looking at their screens, save for the weather auspex operator.

Captain Cerunnos grimaced. On this world of water, the weather auspex reports were the worst.

‘Yes?’

‘There is a sea fog approaching, my lord.’

‘Visibility?’

‘Under seven feet, my lord.’

Captain Cerunnos sighed. There were always accidents when the sea fog rolled over the defence posts that he had established on the atolls of Sagaraya: men mistaking comrades for enemies, others firing off randomly at shapes in the fog – not to mention the list of failed machinery and lost ordnance that always seemed to arrive on his desk after it finally rolled on.

‘Initiate the low visibility protocol,’ Captain Cerunnos ordered. ‘I’m going outside to take a look.’

As the weather auspex operator patched through the command on his vox – he could already hear it breaking up and hissing from the suppressant effects of the fog – Cerunnos opened the door and stepped out into the water glare of Sagaraya. His goggles flared, then darkened, cutting out the incipient light.

He was standing on the highest point on Sagaraya – which put him precisely ten feet above sea level – outside the sprawling compound that housed the command-and-control operations for his fief. Captain Cerunnos stood with his hands on his hips, surveying his domain: myriad upswellings of crushed coral, bleached white in the sun, pockmarking the waters of the shallow sea. This was where the previous inhabitants of Sagaraya had moored their mother ship. Cerunnos smiled thinly at the memory of how it had burned.

Swivelling slowly, Captain Cerunnos stopped when he turned east. There, there was no horizon. There, there was only grey, mixing sea and sky into a single formless, shifting mass. He sighed. It was going to be a thick one.

Cerunnos clicked his fingers. One of the hovering adjutants stepped forward, elbowing others out of the way.

‘Yes, my lord?’

‘Go and check the guard of the Hoard. Make sure they are ready to initiate the low visibility protocol.’

‘Yes, my lord.’ The nameless adjutant swivelled and scurried towards the harbour and its small fleet of fast boats.

Captain Cerunnos turned back to look again at the approaching bank of sea fog. He had seen battle on twenty worlds and three sectors; he had taken part in space boarding actions and slogged through trenches. But there was no form of warfare he liked less than fighting where he could not see the enemy.

Two hours later, Captain Lonath Cerunnos knew that this was exactly the sort of battle he was in.

‘Try the vox again,’ he shouted at the bank of vox-operators. ‘Raise someone. Anyone.’ He turned to the rapidly diminishing group of adjutants. ‘Are you telling me that none of the runners have returned? Not a single one?’

‘No, lord master. None.’

‘Right. I’m sending you all out. Go in pairs. Head to the nearest emplacements and sentry posts. Discover what is happening out there. Then report back here.’

The adjutants made their way to the door of the bunker, pairing up as they went, and disappeared into the grey.

Captain Cerunnos saw his scryer squatting in a corner, hood thrown over his head – a mad thing that had brought him luck over the years, but had done nothing to warn him of whatever this incoming threat was. Going up to the heap of limbs, he kicked it.

The heap squealed and shook. Two eyes appeared, blue and shocked.

‘You, get out there. Find out what is happening.’

‘Me, my lord?’ The scryer shook his head. ‘I-I am not fit for such service.’

Cerunnos bent down to him.

‘You will make up for your failure to see this, or you won’t need to spill anyone’s guts to reveal your future.’

‘Y-yes, my lord.’ The scryer shambled to his feet and made his way to the bunker door, where he paused.

The cerulean-blue eyes turned back to his master.

‘The sharks are circling, my lord.’

‘Very helpful. Get out there and do what I have ordered.’

The scryer blanched. ‘I-I cannot follow the threads of fate, my lord.’

‘You do not need to.’

Babbling and drooling, the scryer let himself out of the bunker.

Captain Cerunnos signalled a squad leader over. ‘Take three men and follow the scryer. He’s bait. See what he attracts. And kill it.’

‘My lord.’ The squad leader, knowing that successfully carrying out such a mission could lead to his naming, assembled his men and was out of the door within a minute.

With no messages getting through on the vox-channels, Captain Cerunnos decided to take a look outside the bunker for himself. He always preferred to look at a battlefield with his own eyes – and this was a battle, he had no doubt of that now.

Putting his hand on the release mechanism, he waited for the door to recognise him. As usual, it did not.

Sighing, Cerunnos picked up the severed hand dangling beside the door and pressed it to the release mechanism. The door duly swung open. Cerunnos let his hand brush over the twenty-inch-thick plasteel as he went out: there was more comfort than he liked to admit in having this to shelter behind when contact with all the outstations was down.

Cerunnos stood at the bunker entrance, straining his senses in an effort to pierce the blanketing sea fog. But all he heard was silence. The normal background noise on Sagaraya – the seething hiss of water flowing up and then falling back from the beaches – was completely absent, as was the interminable screeching of the birdlife.

The world was silent. Captain Cerunnos turned, slowly, all his senses tuned to their highest pitch. And by the very fact of the lack of return, he was sure that there was something out there, in the void.

If this was an assault, it was unlike anything he had known before. But what if something had come, under cover of the sea fog, to seek the treasures of the Hoard?

For a moment, Captain Cerunnos stood uncertain at the entrance to the bunker. He had sent the scryer out as bait. But what if his intuition was correct, and those who lurked in the sea fog were not hunters but treasure seekers? The report he would make to his masters – that he had lost the treasures they had come so far to claim – would be short and terminal.

Cerunnos had not advanced so far in the service of the Ruinous Powers through timidity and indecisiveness.

He went back into the bunker.

‘I want ten men to accompany me now.’

A minute later, Cerunnos, with his escort squad, was making his slow way across the hardpack towards the causeway that linked the command atoll to the Hoard. Cerunnos was mid-placed in the column, with each man in visual contact with those on either side, which meant in practice that they were in touching distance.

The fog moved alongside them as they went, swirling and receding then swallowing them once again. All he could hear was the crunch of boots on the hardpacked crushed coral and the tense breathing of men expecting something to appear out of the fog.

But they reached the causeway with no incident greater than a spooked shot into nothing.

‘There’s no one here, my lord.’

The message was relayed down the line to Captain Cerunnos from the man on point. He made his way up the column to see for himself.

Cerunnos had emplacements at both ends of every causeway, linking the islands. On the causeway connecting the command bunker with the Hoard there were two at each end and another halfway across. But both emplacements at this end of the causeway were empty.

Captain Cerunnos looked at the lascannon, its barrel drooping, speckled with condensate from the fog. He put his hand to it. The barrel was cold. It had not been fired. There was no disorder suggesting a struggle. No blood, or bolt gouges. It was as if the gunners had simply stood up and walked off into the fog.

It was the same in the other emplacement. A cold gun. The few personal effects of the soldiers who had manned it – a lucky finger cut from a not-so-lucky enemy, a votive figurine of a Chaos god so crude that Cerunnos could not tell whom it represented, an eight-pointed star drilled out from an old gun barrel – were still where they had left them. But of the guards themselves, there was no trace.

Crossing the causeway, the central emplacement was similarly forlorn and abandoned. But as Captain Cerunnos inspected it, one of his guard squad approached.

‘My lord. We are down a man.’

‘We can’t be. Roll call.’

There had been neither sound nor sign of any attack on his little column. They had kept discipline. Cerunnos would have heard if any man had been taken out.

But as the roll call came towards its end, Cerunnos realised that the squad was down two men, not just one. It seemed the two rearmost men had been lost, disappearing into the fog with no more trace than frost melting under a newly risen sun. Whatever had taken them, they had had no chance to give warning.

‘Tight formation,’ ordered Captain Cerunnos. He glanced back the way they had come. They were halfway. Better to abort and return to the bunker?

Captain Cerunnos was sick of being hunted by something he could not see. In war, establish what the enemy is trying to prevent you from doing and then do it.

‘Advance, double time.’ Setting himself in the centre of the tight formation, Cerunnos pushed the squad onwards.

The emplacements guarding the far end of the causeway were as empty and mute as those on the near end.

‘Roll call.’

Six men now. Another two lost, in silence and apparently from right in front of his face.

Captain Cerunnos looked round.

‘Anyone see anything? Hear anything?’

The men of his pared-down squad shook their heads. All eyes were turned outwards, to the shifting sea fog that harboured and concealed whatever was hunting them.

One man blazed off with his lasrifle, the rounds spitting through the charged fog, and others followed suit, shooting blind in roughly the same direction.

Captain Cerunnos heard, even through the sound blank of the fog, the cut-off hiss of superheated flesh cauterised by a las-round. They had hit something.

Then, out of the fog, a shape materialised, staggering towards them.

Lasrifles locked to it.

But…

‘Hold!’

The figure staggered closer, resolving smaller and becoming more familiar, until it emerged into the meagre circle of sight that was left to them.

It was one of their own, one of the four men who had gone missing. He approached, hands raised in pledge of his harmlessness, although he bore the burn marks of several flanking hits from las-rounds.

He pitched forwards onto his face.

‘Turn him over.’

Two of the remaining men bent to him and began to roll him over, but then recoiled.

‘Turn him.’

They rolled him over onto his back.

His face had been eaten. He was trying to speak through the ruin, but the attempted words were nothing but blood bubbles.

Captain Cerunnos stared at him.

‘Wh-what did this?’ asked one of the men.

But as his question hung in the air, the man disappeared backwards, as if the fog itself had grasped him and pulled him away.

The squad members, giving no thought to their comrade, opened fire after him, loosing off las-rounds and hard rounds in a sudden eruption.

Cerunnos tried to order them to cease but his commands were lost amid the noise. He grabbed the man next to him.

‘Cease firing.’ He turned to the man on the other side, pushing his arms up. ‘Cease firing.’

Silence slowly settled once more. Cerunnos turned his head, listening, trying to get some sense of where they were. But as he turned to listen, he saw a blank space beside him where there had been a man the moment before. He looked the other way. That man too had disappeared.

Captain Cerunnos realised that he was standing alone in the void. The men, all ten, were gone, dragged into the fog.

He drew his laspistol while shifting his rifle to a one-hand grip, and began to circle, looking for something, any mark in the shifting grey that might tell the enemy.

It was silent. Condensate ran from his hair and down his face. It pooled on his weapons and dripped to the ground.

A shape, dark and indistinct, emerged from the fog and thumped, wetly, on the ground in front of his feet.

The cerulean-blue eyes of the scryer looked up at him with all the unfeigned surprise of a professional augur whose death has come long before he had foreseen it.

Even as the scryer’s head landed and Cerunnos looked down, he felt his lasrifle and pistol stripped from his grasp, while he was simultaneously held, completely immobile, his head locked by a force that was near to crushing his skull outright.

Cerunnos tried to struggle but his arms and legs were pinned together as firmly as his head was held still; the bones in his skull ground together, on the point of collapsing under the pressure being exerted on them. His sight blooded over with the pain.

But at least his mouth had not been stopped.

‘Come out!’ he yelled. ‘Show yourselves. Stop hiding like cowards.’

It stepped from the fog.

A grey giant, with eyes black as the space between the stars. It looked down upon the little man in front of it with all the detached disinterest of a man seeing a column of ants going about their small business.

The giant reached out and touched the epaulettes, the gaudy mark of Cerunnos’ status, then looked behind him to whatever held the captain immobile. The giant made a sign and then, without speaking, turned and led the way into the fog.

Still being held as still as a swaddled child, Cerunnos was carried after the grey giant. He tried to listen for the movement, even the breathing, of whatever carried him, but it was completely silent.

Cerunnos suspected he knew where they were going. Soon, he saw that he was right.

They had come to the Hoard. It was unprepossessing: a plasteel door into a raised mound covered in crushed coral. But it was what was under that mound that counted: the salvage of thousands of ships, lost in the endless sea of Sagaraya.

Normally it would be guarded, but the emplacements guarding the Hoard were as empty and abandoned as the others.

‘What did you do with my men?’

The grey giant gave no sign that it had heard him. Instead, it went to the monitor that scanned for authorised personnel, and keyed the entrance request before standing aside.

Cerunnos was pushed up to the scan, his face held still as the red light ran up and down over his features.

The door to the vault whispered open.

One of the interior guards fell out.

His face was pierced with a thousand splinters, frozen into its death agony by the neurotoxins embedded in those splinters.

The grey giant, seeing this, drew the bolter that was holstered at his waist. He stepped forward, stopping at the entrance to the Hoard, and looked within.

‘Drukhari.’

The grey giant looked to where Cerunnos was being held immobile. The captain suddenly realised that the fog had drawn back. He could see, emerging from the void, other giants, grey and pitted and scarred.

‘Are we too late?’

‘Ascertain.’

One of the giants stepped forward and entered the Hoard. When it came out again, the giant shook its head.

‘It is not there.’

The grey giant who had been holding Cerunnos let him go. The captain found himself standing on the crushed coral, released and ignored. He was no longer relevant.

The giants stood in vivid silence. It seemed to the watching, wary captain that they spoke in the silence of their minds, such was the impression of communication he received from them.

Then, as one, they turned and started east, from whence they had come.

The fog was lifting as quickly as it had flowed in from the deep ocean.

Captain Cerunnos stood and watched them go. He watched them walk into the sea, the water rising up over their legs, their chests, until it covered them completely.

He was still alive.

He shook his head. Who would have believed it? He was still alive.

He howled his thanks to the Dark Gods. He swore his fealty to the Fateweaver and to the Prince of Pleasure, to the God of Blood and the Father of Plagues. He, Captain Cerunnos, had faced death and death had passed him by.

He howled again, a raw, throat-tearing cry of life unexpected and renewed; a promise to his own future that had reached into the present to embrace him with its possibilities.

Then he felt it. The land beneath his feet, the upswelling of coral from the bottom of the shallow sea, shivered. He stumbled and almost fell. Further shocks followed, lessening as if they came from further away: there must have been close to fifty separate tremors, all of them transmitted through the ground to his feet.

Something was shaking the earth.

Then he saw it.

The sea, the sea that moved in endless motion around its islands, was drawing back. This was no tide: the sea flowed relentlessly, back past the line of the lowest tide, back from the channels between the islands, back and back and back until the islands were islands no longer but a single land mass separated by valleys filled with isolated pools, drooping, glistening coral and clumps of surprised, flopping fish.

Then, he saw the sea return. It was rolling back from the east, from the direction in which it had withdrawn, a solid wave line from one end of the horizon to the other. The wave rose from out beyond the Fall, maybe three feet of water. But then, as the wave advanced and the seabed became shallower, the wave started to rise. It grew higher, and higher, and higher.

Captain Cerunnos looked at a wall of water stretching across the horizon, a moving onrush of blue flecked with the foam of its rising.

The lifetime of possibilities that had risen before him suddenly receded. He looked round, searching for somewhere, anywhere he might find sanctuary. High ground would be best, but he was standing on the highest ground to be found on Sagaraya.

The wave slammed into the island like the end of the world.

It was.

Captain Cerunnos, screaming, tried to hang on against the flow of water. He could not hold for long. His screams ended soon afterwards.

Part 1

Void

Chapter 1

GREAT SILENCE

Tangata Manu sat in stillness, allowing his thoughts to run without hindrance, as fleeting and ceaseless as the waves of the ocean. Fragments of memory. Snatches of conversation. Images of beauty and echoes of battle.

The detritus of a life, extended.

The thought came, and locked into his mind. He looked at it. He inspected it. He allowed it to be supplanted by another in the ceaseless churn of thinking. But the memory returned. Again, he allowed it to swirl away, only for it to return a third time. The memory was overlaid with an image of water spiralling down into the depths, and then the memory returned, sharper, focused.

The memory of the Loss and the memory of the Oath Taking. The memory of the Hunt.

Tangata Manu, Chaplain of the Carcharodons, sat in the belly of the beast as the great vessel, in silent running, returned to the Great Void that encompassed all life and all light: the Void that encompassed the warp, the great darkness from which all light came and to which all light returned.

Examen. The path to knowledge. The moral examination, the inspection of action in the light of conscience of his duty to the Void Father.

The spiritual exercises, the entry by imagination into the life and example of the Void Father and the imitation of the Forgotten One.

The door to the senses, the inspection of the roots of perception, internal and external.

Tangata Manu, Chaplain of the Carcharodons, the keeper of their history and the guardian of their souls, sat in silence in his cell and sought the Void within to understand the Void without. And in that Void, he sought answer to the question that disturbed his meditation and stopped his contemplation: the Void Glass.

Through all the years of the Hunt, he had never come closer to regaining the Void Glass than on Sagaraya. Although the Examen enjoined him to let vain regrets pass through his mind as the waves upon the sea, one thought returned. It rose again and again, flowing through the memory of his actions and decisions as a current moves beneath the ever-changing waves. The explosive charges, drilled into the cliffs of the Fall, had unleashed the subsurface slide and triggered the cleansing tsunami. But if instead of taking the time to install the charges he had led the Carcharodons in an immediate attack on where the enemy kept the Void Glass, might they not have arrived in time, before the drukhari, with their mastery of the portals in the webway, had found entry and taken the treasure?

Examen.

Tangata Manu examined the reasons for his decision to mine the Cliffs of Fall. He examined the tactical and strategic reasoning, and found it reasonable but, in light of the failure of the Hunt, not compelling.

It was the sea. The ocean that was Sagaraya.

That was why he had ordered the charges laid.

That world of water reminded him of the world that had given birth to him: a world of sea nomads, wanderers under the sky, navigating by the wind and the currents and the eternal, fixed stars.

But then a star had fallen, and landed in fire and steam upon the waters, and from it had come giants. Taken from a world of water to the ocean of the stars, the Chaplain still remembered, in the dreams of his waking, the movement of the waters on his home world.

Sagaraya was like a homecoming.

Examen.

He had ordered the mining of the Cliffs of Fall to cleanse a world of the Chaos filth because it had, at the deepest levels of his being, reminded him of his own lost home.

Tangata Manu accepted the truth of this statement. He was guilty of putting his own wishes before the completion of the mission with the consequence that the mission had failed.

Examen.

An image, but more than an image, began to form. Details. Memories.

The echoes of laughter and the perfume of a characteristic decay masked with roses and aloe. The sigil of a kabal: a thorn-pierced rose, carved in flesh upon those left to guard the Hoard. A cascade of words, formed into a verse in drukhari script, dripping red down the wall.

Palace on water

Playground for the rich and strong

I reap its harvest

Beneath the verse, a symbol sculpted from the scooped-out remains of the dead.

The eyes of Tangata Manu snapped open, snapped wide. The symbol was a name.

He closed his eyes again, going deep into memory. He sifted through the signs and symbols of centuries; the impressions and glimpses, the perceived and the apprehended, searching, searching. Searching…

Tangata Manu opened his eyes again, slowly this time, and in the great silence he spoke a name.

‘Utakk.’

‘Utakk.’

‘Please, Jona, please, I know it’s hard for you, but you must be quiet. Quiet. Please.’

For a moment, there was silence. Then the boy, squatting on his heels, started rocking again, back and forth, back and forth, kneading the heels of his hands into his eyes as if he would push them deeper into his own skull. The howl began again, a sound dragged out from the bowels.

‘Utaaaakkkkk.’

‘Please, please, Jona, you must be quiet, they’ll hear us, they’ll come, the Masters will hear us.’

Iraia grabbed his wrists and, exerting all her strength, tried to pull his hands away from his face. She feared that, in the extremity of his distress at the world pouring into his mind, Jona might gouge out the doors of the world’s entry and pull his eyes from their sockets. She had reason for her fear: returning to Jona once, she had found him so bruised about the eyes that he had remained blind for ten days. But though she still thought of him as her boy, he was grown now, he was bigger than she was and she could not pull his hands away from their frantic kneading.

‘Jona, please, stop. Door, Jona, door. Find a door, Jona. Door.’

He heard that. He stopped. But he was still covering his eyes.

‘Door.’ Iraia whispered the word, the only word Jona used of his own will, without fear. ‘Door. Find a door, Jona. We’ll go through it. We’ll be safe. Door, Jona. Find a door.’

Jona lowered his hands. His eyes, wide, were red rivered with the blood vessels burst by the frantic pressure he had been applying to them.

‘Door?’

‘Yes.’ Iraia nodded, holding his hands in hers, trying to make her face all that Jona could see. ‘Find a door, Jona. Find us a door.’

Jona nodded. The slightest of movements. Iraia, squatting in front of him in the dark service tunnel, looked carefully at her son and then leaned her weight backwards a little. Jona started turning his head, rocking it, so that he seemed to look everywhere. Then, suddenly, he began to scuttle along the tunnel. Iraia went after him, but she could not match Jona’s speed. He had lived his whole life in the tunnels; he moved through them with the ease and speed of a rat.

For her part, Iraia lived in the tunnels only part of the time. For the rest, she was a Chapter-serf, part of work team 11/T, tasked with the care and maintenance of the deep-level ducts, service shafts and cabling of the ship. It was her – and Jona’s – great good fortune that he was, for the most part, content to spend time on his own, making shapes with the oddments and breakages that Iraia scavenged from her work detail, creating little models of doors, round and square and every shape in between. Iraia had made for them a den, a refuge, in a forgotten section of the tunnels that appeared on no service charts. Jona had found the door to it when he was still a child, and Iraia had despaired of raising him. For he was an unsanctioned pregnancy: the punishment for such a thing was dire. But sometimes, even the den, made snug and warm and womblike by the scavenged felts and wools and furs and rags that Iraia had found, was no sanctuary: those were the times when the nightmares came for Jona, leaving him crying a sound that brought him no comfort. Utakk. Then, the only release was to find and open a door. But there was never any telling where in the ship the door would open to. So Iraia only gave Jona leave to open a door when the need was desperate and his cries such that they would reach even past the baffles and dampers she had made around their den.

This attack was as bad as any Iraia could remember. Now, Jona was scuttling through the tunnels as if he were being pursued by the Masters themselves.

‘Jona, Jona, wait.’

But, of course, he did not hear. When Jona was looking for a door he did not hear or see anything else.

Iraia splashed after him, the cold water that trickled along the tunnel numbing her bare feet, her back and neck aching from their hunched position. The service tunnels were dark, illuminated with pools of light where gratings let stray beams into the shafts. She was following Jona by sound, mainly, pausing at each junction to listen to which way he had gone, listening for the footfall of flesh on plasteel.

‘Door, door, door.’

The chant was low and continuous: Iraia had at least managed to impress on Jona the need to be quiet when he found a door. He was whispering the refrain in a sing-song burst of joy: there was nothing her boy enjoyed more than finding and opening doors. But he was a good boy. He would wait for her before opening it.

Reaching Jona, Iraia put her hand on his shoulder. He was staring, fixedly, at a section of the service tunnel that looked to Iraia no different from any other part: cast plasteel, grey gleam in the glow from the distant grating that provided light enough for her to see the rapt expression on Jona’s face.

‘Door, door, door,’ he was singing to himself.

‘Open the door, Jona.’

He reached out and opened the door.

Sound.

Cut off, then rising again.

The cry came again, distant but clear.

Tangata Manu breathed out and felt the motion of his expelled breath disturb the air.

The cry carried a name, the same name that he had seen in the charnel house of the Hoard, the name made from the dead.

The Void gave him gifts. It gave him knowledge. It gave him peace.

It gave him ending.

He looked down and saw the tale of his victories embedded in his skin, a carapace of teeth taken from the creatures he had killed in the name of the Void Father. Tangata Manu stood, his legs pushing him up from the floor where he had been sitting, cross-legged, with the smooth inevitability of a coco tree springing up from its beach-stranded shell. He was naked save for a loincloth. His skin rippled as he stood, the muscle motion sending waves through the overlying layer of teeth. The teeth settled.

Tangata Manu stood, silent, listening.

About him, his cell, austere and bare, was empty save for his weapons and the stone upon which he had once rested his head when he slept. It had worn down in the centre. But it had been many years since last he slept. Now, in the long watches, he sat in silence and heard the echo of the silence within his soul.

The cry came again, a rising sound that cut off on the final, hard syllable of the accursed name.

The Chaplain put on the robe that, apart from his weapons and armour, was the only personal item in the cell to go with the now unused sleep stone, and put his hand flat on the door. His hand fit snugly into the imprint in the plasteel. It would; it was the hand that had eroded the plasteel.

The door slid open. The Chaplain’s face tightened a fraction. If there had been anyone there to see him, they would have detected no trace of this tightening. But the Chaplain, exquisitely aware of the processes of his body and mind, knew it. The grimace had come from the realisation that he kept track of the toll of time by how deeply his hand had worn away the plasteel of his cell door and eroded the granite of his sleep stone.

He was old.

Tangata Manu made no count of the years of his life but the span of time hung heavy upon him. He walked with a weight of memories that few others had to bear.

The Oath Taking had claimed more than lives. It had taken futures.

The cry came again, quiet but clear along the corridor.

Even without the augmentation offered by his battle armour, Tangata Manu knew at once the range, location and disposition of that which made the cry. Mental practices that had allowed him to dismantle the preconscious processing of his mind meant that he knew, precisely, the workings of his senses and their relative reliability according to the situation.

He knew everything about the origin of the cry, save who was making it. Now, alongside the cry, he heard other, quieter, more identifiable sounds. Shushing sounds, enjoining quiet.

The cry continued, unappeased. Now, beneath it, he could hear a rhythm, regular as the pulse, as if something was rocking back and forth.

The cell doors that lined the long corridor of the ambulatory remained shut. The brethren had returned to the Great Silence: they sat within their cells, deep in the abyssal Void within, their physical functions reduced to the silent stillness of the Void without. A medicae, searching for pulse or respiration, would need to wait long for either. The younger brethren remained in the deep with the aid of implanted ampoules. The elders slipped easily into the Void, for it was their home and their resting place.

Tangata Manu started walking down the corridor towards the sounds. For a moment, he thought on whether he should return to his cell and fetch his weapons, but he dismissed the idea. The cry carried no evil.

The Chaplain looked down. The centre of the corridor had been worn into a channel by the feet of centuries. The brethren, when they returned to their cells and when they made their way along the decks and passages of the Mako, walked barefoot that the sound of their passing did not disturb the Great Silence. The sconces that lit the ambulatory burned with the same unwavering light that they had for centuries. Tangata Manu remembered when the Mako was brought into the service of the brethren. He remembered the brother who had first commanded the ship as it swam unceasingly through the Great Deep beyond the stars, hunting. He remembered the names of all those who had stood beside him: Te Pito; Te Henua; Te Rangi; Ki Mata; Tikaroa; Atamu Iko; Kahukahu. All gone now.

Tangata Manu put his hand to his heart, the prayer of wordless giving, that the Void Father might receive those whose memories the Chaplain kept in his heart. Tangata Manu felt that burden upon him, and that charge to live, live on, that the memory of those brothers would not be lost. Other men, even other Space Marines, would have crumpled beneath its weight. But Tangata Manu had borne the burden of memory for time beyond the remembering of any of his brothers. Even the vessels of war from which the Carcharodons pursued the Long Hunt were young in his eyes, ships taken in battle or in tithe through the centuries and repurposed for the deep beyond the stars.

The sound came again. The passage that he walked now was lined with the doors to cells, but the cells were empty. The Chapter was losing brothers faster than it could find and train replacements. Once, the Mako might have housed four squads of Void Brothers; now it was home to only the Hunt, Tangata Manu and four of the brethren.

He reached the doors that allowed ingress to the ambulatory. They had grown encrusted with the passage of the centuries, covered with moss and aorist lichens.

The Chaplain stopped, listening. The cry came from neither within nor without.

But he heard it. The cry was muffled now. Only his senses, enhanced through the work of the Void Father and the Forgotten One, and sharpened by ages of contemplation of their working, allowed him to hear the cry.

It was coming from below. Tangata Manu looked down.

Through the grille of the hatchway, the Carcharodon saw the dark of the crawl ways that snaked through the Mako, the channels of oxygen and heating, the conduits for the electric nerves that connected the bridge to its limbs and its muscles – its engines, its shields and its weapons.

And in the dark of the crawl way, Tangata Manu saw eyes, staring up at him.

Eyes that opened wide when they saw the Carcharodon looking down at them, and then as rapidly were hidden by something pulling the head to which they belonged down.

Tangata Manu reached and pulled the hatchway open. The sound of its opening, the screech of metal left in place for a century or more, cut through the ambulatory like a saw.

She looked up. Her head was bald, her eyes raw with tears, her simple shift the clothing of a Chapter-serf.

‘Please,’ she said. And she drew back so that the Chaplain could see that which was in her arms.

At first sight, Tangata Manu thought it was a boy, a child. But then he saw that the boy was bigger than his mother. No boy, but a young man. He was rocking backwards and forwards on his heels, his motion the steady rhythm that had underlain the name cried out. He continued to rock, the heels of his hands kneading into his eye sockets, even with the Chaplain standing over them.

His cry had trailed away into a continuing mumble, drawing down towards a silence never reached. ‘Utakk, Utakk, Utakk, Utakk, Utakk…’

The Chaplain stared at the young man. The woman put her arms around him and, doing so, the sleeve of her shift fell back, showing the wrist of her right hand and the brand of the Chapter, the sigil of the sea predator, and the number of her work team.

The Chaplain gestured for them to climb up.

The mother, staring up at him, must have seen the Void in the black eyes looking down at her, for her head dropped. There was nothing she could do. The young man whom she had been holding continued to rock backwards and forwards, the cry that had attracted the Chaplain’s attention now just a mumble of noise. It was a sound torn from the deeps of his soul. Desolate.

The woman looked up to Tangata Manu, her eyes pleading and desperate.

‘His name is Jona.’

At the name, the young man’s rocking slowed and then stopped. He was still mumbling the name, quietly, but the overlay of terror that had first carried the sound to Tangata Manu’s ears had settled. It was now the sound of a nightmare, receding into waking.

The Chaplain glanced again at the woman. Her accent, as she spoke her son’s name, was surprisingly cultured. Tangata Manu recalled that the last Tithing had taken its tribute from a world that had been, until only a century or so ago, an important hub world in the Caligari Sector, all but forgotten by the Imperium, but a vast border region of the Segmentum Tempestus. The Carcharodons knew the warp surges and shoals that plagued the sector well, and as the Hunters of the Void they were better equipped than any other order to stalk the enemies of the Imperium there, so far from the light of the Astronomican. They had followed the trail of a monster through the sector, tracking its spoor until it took refuge amid the debased population of that once proud world. Some among its aristocrats still clung to their ancient finery and older learning, but most had slipped back into a state of savagery. The order had found the monster and destroyed it, cleansing the world of its filth. In payment, as was their due, they took the Red Tithe from the survivors of the city in which the monster had made its final stand. By the sound of the woman, she must have come from the surviving nobility of that planet. Tangata Manu tried to recall its name, but it was lost, stored in deep recall; he could retrieve it, but he would need to engage in various mental disciplines that, although useful, were time consuming. It could wait.

‘Jona.’

Tangata Manu spoke the young man’s name. At the word, and the command Tangata Manu imparted to it, Jona looked up. He began rocking again, back and forth, back and forth, but he looked to the one who called on him.

‘You spoke a name.’

Jona’s eyes slid away from the figure standing over them as if he did not really see him.

‘M-master,’ said the mother. ‘Jona cannot speak.’

Tangata Manu looked to the woman.

‘I heard his voice.’

‘No, I mean, he knows only one word. “Door.” That’s all he says. Except when he has nightmares. That’s when he says the other word, the one you heard.’

Tangata Manu looked down at the woman.

‘Get up here.’

‘Master, I would, Master. But Jona does not understand.’

‘Make him understand.’

‘Yes, Master.’ The mother began whispering to her son, speaking into his ear, softly. But Tangata Manu could hear all that she said.

‘Jona, Jona, dear, please, you’ve got to get up. If you do, I will let you open a door.’

At that syllable, Jona stopped rocking. Although he did not look to his mother, he spoke.

‘Door?’

‘Yes, Jona. Door. Now, please, stand up.’

Jona stood.

Tangata Manu, standing above him, looked down into the young man’s face and saw an absence there that, for a moment, he could not place. Then, Jona’s eyes swept past the Chaplain as if he were of no more matter than the coral-crusted corridors of the Mako. And in that motion, Tangata Manu realised what was missing from Jona’s face: fear.

Unlike any Chapter-serf, unlike ordinary humans, or xenos, or heretics, or witches, the young man did not fear him. Indeed, Jona barely seemed to notice him: the regard he paid the Carcharodon was merely to dismiss him as unimportant.

This was not a reaction he was accustomed to.

The mother stood up next to her son, putting an arm round him.

Tangata Manu saw the way Jona’s body made no accommodation to the arm, neither drawing closer nor pulling away from her: it was as if he simply did not acknowledge her presence.

‘Master.’ She looked up at the Chaplain, her eyes red raw.

Tangata Manu pointed for her to come up out of the crawl way in which he had found them. She pulled herself up and then reached down to Jona. Again, the young man made no move to help her as she tried to haul him up, struggling against his weight.

Then, suddenly, the weight dropped to nothing. Tangata Manu had taken hold of the back of the boy’s shift and pulled him up, out of the service tunnel, and put him down in the ambulatory.

Jona looked to his mother. ‘Door?’

The woman glanced up into the face of the Carcharodon. Her shoulders slumped and her head fell. ‘Later, Jona.’

‘Door,’ said Jona, more firmly.

‘Later.’

Tangata Manu looked down at the young man standing in front of him, but Jona appeared utterly oblivious to the Chaplain. And, for the first time in centuries, Tangata Manu found himself unsure. He did not know how to address the young man.

‘Jona,’ he began. But the word tailed away before Jona’s complete lack of response.

‘Jona, you were calling out a name…’ Again, the words trailed away. Tangata Manu realised that the unfamiliar sensation rising within him was helplessness. Finally, he looked to Jona’s mother, his eyes asking the question of her.

‘Jona is not as others are,’ she said. ‘He does not see people, he sees doors.’

‘Why was he shouting that name?’

‘Utakk?’

‘Yes.’

‘He has sleep terrors, where he wakes but still sees the nightmare. The name of the nightmare is Utakk.’ The woman dropped her face beneath the weight of Tangata Manu’s gaze. ‘I know nothing else, Master.’

‘Utakk.’

The Carcharodon and the Chapter-serf both looked at Jona. He was staring down, at the floor of the ambulatory, where water had dripped from the encrustations on the wall to form a dark pool. In the middle of the pool floated a piece of dead, dry, broken-off coral, like a tortured ship in a miniature sea.

‘Utakk,’ Jona repeated, still staring at the floating piece of coral. He reached out. At first, Tangata Manu thought he was pointing but then he realised that Jona was not including anyone else: the reaching out was to touch the coral. But as his hand stretched forth, the frayed white of his shift moved up his arms.

The woman, seeing the motion, made to lean forward to stop Jona, but Tangata Manu shook his head and she slumped back, head dropping in despair.

The Chaplain stared at the young man’s forearms. They were bare. No mark or brand was upon them, neither the Chapter sigil nor the number of his work gang. Jona was a free birth.

That was what the Chapter-serfs called them, in the language of clicks and signs that they thought their own. It was forbidden for them to have unsanctioned, unproductive children. To ensure that did not happen, men and women were strictly segregated. Any male Chapter-serf found associating with a female was emasculated, if he was not executed.

Tangata Manu understood well the cold reasoning behind this, for he had been among the Convocation that had decreed it as part of the Chapter’s Rule: hunting in the Void, far from any friendly world, the fleet often stood balanced on the finest of edges between starvation and energy exhaustion. So far from any possible replenishment of supplies, they could not afford to have any unexpected extra mouths to feed.

The Void beyond the stars forgave no weakness and allowed no errors. Tangata Manu knew what he had to do. He had helped write the Rule. There were no exceptions, no extenuating circumstances.

The boy must die.

Jona would not quail before the death that must come for him: the young man was clearly insensible to the fears that unmanned other men. At least he could make it quick for them.

But as the Chaplain began to reach to the woman, cowering before him, the ship’s lights started to flash – the silent call requesting one of the brethren come to the bridge.

He alone was not engaged in meditation in his cell. Tangata Manu would have to answer the call.

The woman looked at the hand, uncomprehending, then up to the face behind it. There was no hope. She took the hand of her son.

‘Come,’ said Tangata Manu. ‘Do not fear. It will be swift.’

Chapter 2

CONVOCATION

The bulkhead doors of the Mako, originally a Gladius-class frigate before the Carcharodons had transformed it into the streamlined predator that now slid through the Void, opened. The bridge was silent.

Tangata Manu reached up and rang the Sanctus bell. The bell, tuned to a series of ascending overtones that resonated within the plasteel shell of the bridge, filled the space with bright, bronze tones. The sounding of the Sanctus bell allowed for the cessation of the discipline of silence should the brother pose a question or issue an order.

Immediately, two serfs, shaven-headed and white-robed, made their way to him. They bowed then processed onto the bridge, leading the Chaplain towards the command throne. Here they bowed again and then stepped aside to let the Carcharodon pass between them.

The command throne itself was empty. Only one of the brethren might take his place there. But in front of the command throne was a stool upon which sat the pilot of the Mako. Seeing Tangata Manu, the pilot rose from the stool, then prostrated himself before the Chaplain.

Tangata Manu left him lying on the plasteel floor for a moment while he looked to the screens, taking in the auspex readings that told the ship’s location and immediate environment. It was at once clear why he had been summoned.

Every detection system was flashing red. The Mako was held in multiple target locks: more than enough plasma batteries and macro cannons were trained on the Mako to overwhelm the ship’s void shields after the first broadside. The second broadside would peel the Mako’s hull open and eviscerate her.

The Nicor and its attendant fleet of six frigates floated in the Void, weapons targeted and locked on the Mako.

It was the usual welcome home.

The Rule demanded those returning to the Void fleet demonstrate that they had not been corrupted by that which they had faced.

But the fact that it was the Nicor itself that had come to meet them told Tangata Manu that there were many aboard the venerable Tyrant-class vessel who wished to know the result of their mission; the Hunt had been long, and Tangata Manu had left for Sagaraya with more hope than ever before of recovering the Void Glass.

The Chaplain looked down at the pilot still lying prostrate on the floor. He stepped over him and took his place on the command throne. The throne itself, activated by his presence, keyed onto him, its neural feeds plugging into the base of his neck, allowing the Chaplain to both feel the ship’s state as part of his own sensory array and to communicate directly with the ships waiting.

As Tangata Manu connected to the ship’s command systems, the pilot slowly got up from the floor and, moving as unobtrusively as possible, went to stand beside the command throne.

The Chaplain hailed the Nicor.

The screens on the bridge brightened, and as they brightened, Tangata Manu saw a familiar face looking upon him, the eyes black and unreadable, the skin pale as star dust.

‘Hail, Te Kahurangi. It is an honour that the Pale Nomad should come to greet us on our return.’

The Librarian made no answer. His eyes were as the Void, as black as the Chaplain’s own, but though Te Kahurangi did not open his mouth, Tangata Manu could feel the old familiar presence in his mind, searching for any hint of Chaos taint. The Chaplain made no effort to shield his thoughts or the memories of the ill-fated expedition from the Librarian although they both knew there were many techniques that he might have employed to slow down or block the examination. Instead, Tangata Manu opened his mind, and if he proffered the recollections of the events of the expedition it was not to draw the attention of the Pale Nomad from his short-term memory at all, but merely a courtesy to make the Examen easier.

The Pale Nomad nodded.

Tangata Manu bowed. He was clear of taint.

‘You are summoned to appear before the brethren in Convocation,’ the Pale Nomad said. The screen went blank.

Tangata Manu stared at it. Around him, the bridge was silent with the quiet of apprehension; some at least of the Chapter-serfs present had an idea of what the summoning meant.

The Chaplain was being called before the assembly of the highest officers of the Chapter, to justify his actions and to answer the charges being brought against him. The penalty for failing to answer the charges to the satisfaction of the Convocation was straightforward, and the only penalty a nomadic Chapter operating beyond the edges of the galaxy could apply: death.

Although the Pale Nomad had summoned Tangata Manu’s entire squad of Carcharodons, the Chaplain knew that the reckoning was with him. The Hunt’s failure was his responsibility. Now he had to justify its continuation or pay for its failure.

Tangata Manu turned and left the bridge.

The honour guard waiting at the docking platform of the Nicor was in full battle dress, wearing the Tactical Dreadnought armour of Terminators. As the shuttle from the Mako docked, they presented their arms in acknowledgement of the Chaplain of the Carcharodons coming on board. Tangata Manu, also clad in full battle armour, was followed by the rest of the Hunt. He handed his bolter to the ship warden standing by the shuttle and the Hunt, Brother Folau, Brother Hehu, Brother Ihu and Brother Matu, followed. The ship warden looked to the crozius still in Tangata Manu’s hand. Tangata Manu looked to it too, then back to the ship warden before slowly shaking his head. The crozius was the mark of his office. He would not give it up. The ship warden, Brother Aito, hesitated, the pause invisible to all save the enhanced senses of a Space Marine, and then stepped back, giving Tangata Manu leave to come aboard the Nicor as he was. That they would even consider taking his crozius from him was a sign of the depth of the suspicion in which his brethren now held him.

Most of the Chapter-serfs who had accompanied the Hunt in the shuttle waited beside the ship, save three, who took unobtrusive places at the rear of the column.

The honour guard turned, came to attention, and stopped. The only sound was the occasional drop of water.

The honour guard captain signed the column to begin.

To the irregular rhythm of water dropping was added the metronomic tramp of the Carcharodons marching in dress order. Tangata Manu knew full well that the Nicor, a vast and ancient ship, depended on an army of Chapter-serfs for its running, but he did not expect to see any on their passage into its heart, and nor did he. Any who heard their approach made haste to move out of sight until the procession had passed.

The light. It had been so long but now, walking the labyrinth of the Nicor, Tangata Manu remembered the quality of its light. It shifted and moved, rippling on ceiling and wall. It reminded him of looking up and seeing the play of the sun on the surface of the sea above him. The walls themselves were more living creature than plasteel, jagged and growing, glistening wet in the flowing light.

As the column marched deeper inside the Nicor another sound began to overlay the drumbeat of their feet: the splash of water. Liquid sat, first in solitary puddles, then in short streams, then in silver sheets over the bottom of the passageway. Tangata Manu noted that their course was not taking them to the bridge of the Nicor, but to its deep heart, for the avenue they were marching down was broad and high: a main internal artery of the great vessel, leading to the basilica with its reliquary, ambulatory and the Chapter house. Below the basilica, in the cold depths, was the crypt that housed the living tombs of the Greats, the Wandering Ancestors, embalmed forever in the casing of Contemptor Dreadnoughts.

In times past, when Tangata Manu had served on the Nicor, he had gone down into the crypt to seek the silence that hung heavy and unmoving around the Wandering Ancestors, set immobile atop basalt outcrops rising from a cold sea, and looked upon the Three, seeking some sense of their continuing spirit. Most of the time there was none, simply ceramite armour, rimed with frost and dripping water. But then, there might be a pattern to the dripping of the water, a quiet, barely discernible breeze of presence in the deeps of his meditation, a crack, as of ice breaking.

The Ancestors had wandered far but they were not entirely lost.

The passageway broadened, then opened into the great central hall of the Nicor. The honour guard stopped, parted and presented arms. Tangata Manu and the Hunt marched on, past their brethren holding their holy bolters in parade readiness, and came to a halt, in line abreast, in front of the basilica.

At the heart of the Nicor was the Basilica of the Void Father. Carved from coral and basalt, its spires ascending to the covered stars, the basilica was spirals and furuncles, gargoyles and reliefs, lattices and openings, ascending towers and descending bolsters: a building that grew up and out of the coral depths of the ship as something half living and still growing.

Standing to attention in front of the basilica, Tangata Manu stared at it in something approaching wonder. It had been many years since last he had stood here. Unless the memory he held had been corrupted by the passage of time, then the basilica had grown, adding spires and statuary, while in other places covering over what had been there before. His memory was confirmed by the sight of the face of an ancient Shade Lord, half peering through an opening in the outcrop of twisted basalt that now covered him. When last he had visited the basilica, the statue of the Shade Lord stood, relief carved, above the tympanum. Now he was all but invisible, swallowed by the growth of rock and coral.

Tangata Manu and the Hunt waited, with the honour guard of Carcharodons standing to rigid attention on either side of them.

Then, movement. Not from the great door to the basilica, which remained firmly closed, but from the ambulatory that ran beside the basilica, connecting it to the Chapter house. From there, a figure emerged.

Te Kahurangi, Librarian to the Carcharodons, walked towards them, alone, carrying his force staff. The head of the staff, carved from bone, grasped in its maw a green glow of sea stone. The Carcharodons waited in silent stillness for the Pale Nomad.

Te Kahurangi stopped when still ten yards from the silent watchers. He placed the shaft of his force staff down on the ground next to him, holding it vertical. The green stone of its head flared brighter, then subsided to a dull verdigris.

Tangata Manu saluted the venerable Librarian, striking his fist to his heart before returning to attention. The other members of the Hunt followed suit, the sound of their salutes a staccato rhythm in the silence.

The Pale Nomad turned his black-eyed gaze on each of the men in turn before finally resting upon Tangata Manu.

‘You are summoned to stand in the Chapter house and testify to the brethren of your actions and the reasons for them, in the sight of the Void Father and under the spirit of the Forgotten One. What is the penalty if your testimony, heard by your brethren, be found unworthy?’

‘Death.’

The word came as one from the mouths of Tangata Manu and all the Hunt.

Te Kahurangi turned and, raising his force staff, started towards the Chapter house. Tangata Manu and the Hunt followed, with the honour guard that had escorted them from the shuttle marking the end of the column. Right at the end of the column, the Chapter-serf who had accompanied them from the shuttle followed, bare feet silent over the deck plates.

As they approached the double doors to the Chapter house, fashioned from the baleen of some great cetacean and hinged upon the tusks of narwhals, Tangata Manu looked again at the intricate relief carvings that covered the whale bone. Tableaux presented the Void Father as the brethren remembered Him in their tales, vivid and vividly alive, a titan and a living god; the Forgotten One on the Day of Exile, departing into the Void; the revenge of Waylan, artificer of the fleet in exile, upon Nidud King, the star merchant who kidnapped him to make devices for his court and his family – the whole expanse of the double doors was carved with the history of the brethren, accreting upon older layers as coral grew upon its foundations.

The door warden, standing outside the Chapter house, opened wide the doors at their approach. Te Kahurangi entered, the green stone on his force staff flaring bright as it passed within the time-hallowed walls.

At the threshold, Tangata Manu paused.

Examen.

Did he fear the scrutiny of his brethren? Were his actions justifiable and his reasons sound?

The Examen was swift, the answer delayed. It did not matter now what he thought; the brethren would decide.

Tangata Manu marched into the Chapter house, followed by the other members of the Hunt. They came to a halt in the centre of the great hall and, as one, made their salute.

Sitting in the great throne behind the high table of the Chapter house was Tyberos, the Red Wake, the Shade Lord of the Carcharodon Astra. On his hands, judgement and the Emperor’s mercy, the power gauntlets whose ancient talons, dulled with the viscera of countless enemies, still cut the light with their keenness. They were Hunger and Slake. The hunger was for the blood of the enemies of the Emperor, the slaking was in the spilling of it. The Red Wake wore his ancient power armour, ribbed with adamantium, riveted with inconel. At his waist hung the old, yellowed skull of the son of the Deceiver, its eye sockets as empty as the promises with which he had once tried to trick the sons of the Shade Lord. In front of Tyberos, upon the high table, was his boar-snouted helm, for the Red Wake sat in judgement and, in doing so, he would look with plain sight upon the men he was called to judge.

Tangata Manu, aged beyond the counting of the planets, knew the naked face of the Red Wake of old, but his fellow hunters did not. Although they maintained discipline, he heard their surprise in the suppressed hiss of indrawn breath.

He did not blame them.

The naked face of the Red Wake was death. A death that devoured prey with teeth sharp and jagged.

But the Red Wake, while he occupied the seat of judgement, did not preside over them alone. On his right side was the current Waylan, artificer to the Carcharodons. For alone among the Adeptus Astartes, the Carcharodon Astra numbered their chief artificer as one of the brethren, granting to him the same privileges as a Void Brother. For it was by his labours and his knowledge that the fleet endured its long exile, far from the forge worlds of mankind.

Waylan was standing, for as a mark of his position and in memory of the first artificer for whom all the successors were named, the holder of the office was lamed, the hamstring on his leg cut in the manner that Nidud King had cut the first Waylan to keep him at his side. Thus Waylan was standing, his hamstrung leg braced in an adamantium frame, the tools of his mastery set out upon the high table.

Te Kahurangi, the Pale Nomad, took his place on the Red Wake’s left. Ranged on either side of them were all the captains of the reserve companies not currently engaged in operations: Harvester Secundus Matamu, Ihorangi Hori, Fetu Henare. After them were the company Chaplains and Apothecaries and Librarians.

Ranged on either side of the hall, sitting on the long benches behind the tables, were the brethren of the assembled companies, each Void Brother wearing full armour but with his helmet set on the table in front of him.

While keeping his gaze fixed rigidly ahead on the high table, Tangata Manu’s peripheral vision told him that this was as near to a full conclave of the Carcharodon Astra as would ever be achieved, given the needs of the war they fought. They were gathered here for the most serious of purposes.

To render judgement upon his failure.

The black gaze of the Red Wake examined Tangata Manu and then each member of the Hunt in turn: Brother Folau, Brother Hehu, Brother Ihu and Brother Matu.

Tyberos raised his right hand. He lifted Hunger.

Te Kahurangi stood. He lifted his force staff, then brought it down upon the floor plates once, twice, thrice.

The sound reverberated through the arches flung high over the Chapter house.

‘Hear this, my brethren. All vows to silence are, for the duration of this Convocation, suspended. All may speak who wish to speak.’

The Librarian brought his staff down again.

‘In the name of the Void Father, by the authority of the Forgotten One, as the voice of Tyberos, Shade Lord, Chapter Master of the Carcharodon Astra, I call this Convocation to examine the conduct of Chaplain Tangata Manu. If, on hearing his testimony and the testimony of his brethren, you find his actions justified, then he shall go hence with no word said against him. If, on hearing his testimony and the testimony of his brethren, you find his actions unjustified, then he shall go hence to a place of execution. Hear you well, my brethren?’

‘Yes.’

The answer, spoken by every voice in the Chapter house save only the Shade Lord, filled the space with its finality.

‘Then shall Tangata Manu tell the assembly the tale of the losing of the Void Glass, of the commissioning of the Hunt, of its long years of seeking, and of its failure when the prize was in its grasp.’ The Librarian turned to the Chaplain.

‘Speak.’

As the tale was told, the four members of the Hunt stood behind Tangata Manu, eyes locked front, listening to the story of their failure. For Brother Folau, the Void Brother who had joined Tangata Manu in the original Oathtaking, the telling was the tale of a promise unkept and words given in vain. They had sought the Void Glass for centuries, coming close sometimes, losing all track of it for decades, but always searching, searching.

During the Long Hunt, they had sought information in many quarters and from many people. It had been Brother Folau’s particular task to cultivate these contacts, to learn from them who had heard whisper of the relic, who had seen it, who had touched it, who had sold it on. And as the Chaplain told the long tale of the Hunt and the story of Sagaraya, Brother Folau considered one recent contact. A small diversion after their failure, while returning to the fleet, when he had taken leave of the Mako and, piloting one of the shuttles, docked at the cloud bazaar of Takushika Reach…

Emerging from the shuttle, Brother Folau saw the livid, swirling clouds of the Reach below, stretching to an impossibly distant horizon. The Carcharodon stopped for a moment; the sheer scale of the Reach never failed to impress him. Takushika Reach had the mass of a sun but rather than collapsing down under its own gravity, it formed a half-twisted toroid shape, looping back upon itself in an infinite ouroboros, the strangest of all the many strange phenomena among the drifting dust and gas of the wider Yamakech Tract. Stepping from the ramp, Brother Folau looked down through the grid mesh decking. There below, he saw the firefly trails of skimmer craft weaving over the tops of the clouds, interspersed with less frequent ripples as the diving bells, dropped on thousand-mile cables, dipped down into the banks of vapour.

They were all hunting for the irregular harvest of the Takushika Reach: archeotech, knowledge obscure, vital and trivial, treasures and armouries and libraries, but more often objects of baffling incomprehensibility. Even as Brother Folau watched, he saw a diving bell being hauled back up out of the clouds, festooned with a carpet of what appeared to be mathematical functions made into strangely insectoid life forms – prime-counting functions sticking out in columns above a swarm of hyperbolic functions. But even as he observed, the strain upon the cable became too great and it snapped, whipping wildly across the sky and striking through the wings of three cloud skimmers. The diving bell itself tumbled downwards, end over end as the functions fought, before disappearing from view.

On the cloud bazaar, they called that the Long Dive. There were tales of diving bells falling forever through the eternal loop of the Reach.

It wasn’t long before Brother Folau saw a worm wriggle forming below him, the clouds aligning into something approaching a sinuous shape, twisting below the surface. Of course, the names given to the impermanent structures that formed in the Reach no more described their function than wet described the ocean: they were labels, pinned to something fundamentally incomprehensible to make it in some way manageable.

Some of the usual gaggle of gangers that hung around the docks had approached Brother Folau’s craft, about to offer their caretaking services for his vessel, but when the Carcharodon appeared, his armour swirled and scored with the Chapter’s markings, his hand resting lightly upon his bolter, they stepped back, horror fighting with terror for mastery of their faces.

The Carcharodons had come to the Reach before. A tithe had been taken. There was not much left of the cloud colonies by the time they had left. Now, even though Brother Folau came alone, his tattoos and his armour told the tale of who he was.

The gangers scattered, running for their lives. They were young, quick and savage. Brother Folau caught one with the practised ease of the hunter he was.

Holding the ganger, dangling, in the air, Brother Folau looked into his face.

‘Tell Virenk Duva that I have come. Reach him before I do and you will live.’

Brother Folau dropped the ganger and watched as he scurried off, wailing the message of fear: the Hunters of the Dark had come again.

The Carcharodon followed in the ganger’s wake. The approaches to the cloud bazaar were thick with balloon huts and kite houses, the dwellings of the poorest of the bazaar folk. The rich merchants had their own dirigibles, free tethered above the market; Brother Folau looked up – yes, they still looked like grape clusters.

He strode past the gathered flotsam of the galaxy as he entered the bazaar, and the whispers of his approach rippled out before him: Shark. Some of the stallholders and shopkeepers shuttered their establishments, scuttling within, while others, on their knees, offered their meagre wares to the passing Carcharodon. But Brother Folau ignored the stalls and shops; he had come to the Reach for information, not archeotech.

The scent of cooked meat, a thick, sweet and cloying scent, told him that he had arrived. The sign swinging above the door confirmed it. A pair of ogryn guards lounged outside the Roasted Grox, picking their teeth with sharpened bones while throwing out random, surreal comments to the stream of people and creatures jostling past. But the stream parted as the Carcharodon approached, the whispers of his coming creating a wall of hurried, frightened glances. The ogryns, seeing him, stood up from their stools, struggling to understand the fear that had gripped their fellows.

‘No trouble, right?’ asked one.

Brother Folau gave no answer. He walked past them and into the smoked gloom of the Roasted Grox.

He was expected.

From a booth, Brother Folau saw a hand gesture in welcome. The Carcharodon stalked towards it, senses bristling at the scans sweeping over him.

‘Captain Folau! How considerate of you to come to see one as inconsequential as I.’ The voice, rich but oleaginous, emerged from the cowled figure in the booth. A performance barely maintained, for his hands shook, and fear was plain on his face. ‘Please, take a seat. What can I order for you? The roasted grox?’

‘I am not a captain. You will call me Brother Folau, and you will perform your function, no more.’

‘Information, then?’

Brother Folau inclined his head.

‘Usual terms?’

Brother Folau’s silence was his assent.

Scratch. Scratch. Scratch.

With a nail sharpened to a cutting edge, Virenk Duva cut a design into the pinwood tabletop. A rose, pierced by a thorn. He looked up. His eyes glowed momentarily in the shadows of the cowl, then were veiled.

Brother Folau signed his understanding.

Virenk Duva lay his other hand over the design. An augmetic. The smell of charring wood mingled not unpleasantly with the sweet perfume of roasting grox. When the slaver raised his metal hand, the design had been burned away, leaving only a hand-sized char mark on the table.

‘These visitors were asking for information on the item you seek. Paying well – slaves, though they did not reveal where they had taken them from.’

Brother Folau looked into the dark of the slaver’s hood.

‘O-of course, I told them nothing. I would never. Not much use getting ten per cent if I’m not alive to sell them, is it? Ha ha.’

Brother Folau waited. Virenk Duva was constitutionally incapable of coping with silence; he would fill it, even at the price of giving away information he intended to sell.

The slaver, face hidden in the shadows of his hood, looked up into the great silence of the Carcharodon and, faced with that silence, spoke.

‘Th-there’s more. The same, uh, party is enquiring after people from a planet that, I know to my profit, you have visited – Monterosso.’ Virenk Duva’s voice lowered to a theatrical whisper. ‘Apparently, there is a particular genetic signature they are looking for.’ The slaver held his hand over his mouth to further shield his words. ‘The aforementioned party is willing to pay big money for people with this genetic signature.’

Brother Folau looked at the slaver. He said nothing but silence was question enough for the voluble slaver.

‘Why? Of course, they would not tell me. I, uh, made what enquiries I could with the contacts I have – this is not the first time they have come looking. Once, before, they found a diver with the right genetic code. An off-worlder, come to make their fortune. They… they flayed him alive. They made it last. They mean to kill every man and woman of that bloodline.’

The Carcharodon remained silent.

‘What do you say? Not bad, huh? Good enough for a bonus?’

Brother Folau considered the information and its source. Virenk Duva relayed an excited mishmash of rumour and fact; it was his task to sort through it and present what he considered accurate to the Hunt for its evaluation. He would have dismissed it all, save for the sigils he had seen carved into the flesh of the dead upon Sagaraya.

The Pierced Rose. One of the oldest and most powerful of the kabals of the Dark City was stirring from its normal hunting grounds.

The information would be added to the Hunt’s evaluation.

Brother Folau turned to go.

‘Wait!’

The Carcharodon stopped.

‘There’s something more.’

Brother Folau looked round.

The slaver beckoned the Carcharodon back and, whispering, said, ‘I don’t know if this is of interest to you – a shard of black glass. N-not the full item you described before, but a piece, not unlike it.’

Brother Folau stared at the slaver.

‘Where is it?’

‘I wanted to get it for you but the merchant had already sold it. I only noticed it because he had forgotten to remove it from his inventory.’ Virenk Duva smirked in the darkness of his cowl. ‘He had not realised its value. He sold it as a trinket.’

‘To whom did he sell it?’

‘One of the, uh, party that visited. The xenos. Not its leader, but one of its soldiers.’

Brother Folau stared at the slaver but behind his black-eyed gaze the precise operations of his thought were running over the possibilities. When the Void Glass was lost, a few slivers of it had been broken off. The Hunt had recovered some of these, and followed others across the galaxy. Knowing what they sought, perhaps the soldier had thought to gain advantage by keeping it to themselves.

‘Why did the xenos want the item?’

‘Why xenos always want trinkets like that, to trade and to display.’ The slaver looked up into the face of the Carcharodon. ‘If I knew what the object of your search did…’

Brother Folau turned and started towards the door.

‘What about my payment?’

The Carcharodon dropped the blood note onto the floor and walked away. The information from Virenk Duva would be useful, but it was dearly bought. Many rejects from the latest Tithing would find themselves herded into Duva’s vessel for shipment to the galaxy’s slave markets.

The tale was long, and none there knew it in all its detail.

Te Kahurangi turned to the other members of the Hunt.

‘Brother Folau, Brother Hehu, Brother Ihu and Brother Matu, do you vouch for the testimony of Chaplain Tangata Manu, so far as you have knowledge of the truth or otherwise of what he says?’ The Librarian looked to each Void Brother in turn. ‘Step forward and speak.’

For a pressing moment, none of the Void Brothers moved for they were waiting for Brother Folau, the senior huntsman, to step forward first. But when he did not move, Brother Hehu, next in seniority, stepped forward.

‘I so vouch.’

After him, Brother Ihu spoke and then Brother Matu.

‘I so vouch.’

Brother Matu stepped back into line. That left only Brother Folau to speak.

He stepped forward.

Tangata Manu had said no word about his mission to the Takushika Reach and his meeting with Virenk Duva. But he had spoken truly of their failed mission to Sagaraya and the history of the Hunt before that.

‘I so vouch.’

Brother Folau stepped back among his Void Brothers.

The Librarian turned to the Chaplain. ‘Your brethren vouch for your words. Now it is time for the brethren to consider your actions.’ The Pale Nomad lifted his force staff and brought it, ringing, down upon the floor.

‘Who shall speak for Chaplain Tangata Manu?’

Tangata Manu knew well the response, although he had never thought that he would be required to speak it one day.

‘I shall speak for myself,’ he said.

‘Then let the trial commence.’

Te Kahurangi moved from where he was standing beside Tyberos, coming round the high table until he stood in front of the Red Wake and the senior commanders of the Carcharodon Astra. He stood sideways, so that he could see both Tangata Manu and the commanders of the Chapter, and had his force staff in hand.

‘Brother Tangata Manu, was the Void Glass given into the keeping of the Forgotten One by the Void Father?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, was the Forgotten One charged with keeping the Void Glass safe?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, were you entrusted with the Void Glass?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, do you bear responsibility for the loss of the Void Glass?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, did any of the brethren speak against your vow to recover the Void Glass, hinder you in your hunt or fail to render you the fullest aid?’

‘No.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, how long have you sought to recover the Void Glass?’

‘One thousand, four hundred and fifty-three years.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, during these one thousand, four hundred and fifty-three years, how many times have you located the precise position of the Void Glass?’

‘Once.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, where was this?’

‘Sagaraya.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, where on Sagaraya did you locate the Void Glass?’

‘A vault of the enemy.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, having located the exact position of the Void Glass, did you at once attack?’

‘No.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, what did you do?’

‘I planted explosives in the Cliffs of Fall that, when triggered, would produce an underwater landslip that would in turn produce a tsunami.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, why did you do this?’

‘In my judgement, this was the best way to ensure that, once we had acquired the Void Glass, we would be able to return to our exfiltration point without the enemy following us.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, were there any other reasons for delaying the attack?’

‘The auspex detected an incoming haar that would provide cover for our attack. I judged it wise to wait for that.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, when you arrived at the location of the Void Glass, did you ascertain that the Void Glass had indeed been there?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, what evidence led you to conclude that drukhari had taken the Void Glass?’

‘The injuries on the enemy’s cadres were consistent with drukhari weapons. The sigil of a drukhari kabal, the Pierced Rose, was present, as was a verse in drukhari script.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, was there any evidence for how recently the drukhari had taken the Void Glass?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, what was that evidence?’

‘The smell of ozone and the prickle of its ionised form.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, how long after the closing of a webway portal does that smell linger?’

‘It depends on the atmospheric conditions, but in an enclosed place such as the Hoard where the enemy was keeping the Void Glass, normally not longer than ten minutes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, if you had not waited to plant the explosives in the Cliffs of Fall, if you had not waited for the incoming haar, would you have arrived at the location before the drukhari and been able to rescue the Void Glass?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, do you still hold to the judgements you made during the course of this operation?’

‘No.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, do you admit that by your decisions, the enemy acquired the Void Glass?’

‘Yes.’

The admission opened like the Void through the Chapter house, swallowing everything.

Te Kahurangi held silence for a long minute, letting the word settle into the hearing and the understanding of the brethren.

‘Brother Tangata Manu, do you wish to continue the Hunt?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, do you still consider yourself able to lead the Hunt?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, do you still judge the Hunt a reasonable use of the Chapter’s resources?’

‘Yes.’

‘Brother Tangata Manu, do you hold that judgement still, despite the new dangers facing the Imperium of Man?’

‘Yes.’

The Pale Nomad lifted his force staff. Green flame flickered from its stone head.

In the great roof of the Chapter house, the dark of the Void appeared, the infinite space surrounding and encompassing the galaxy. Then, the orientation changed. The view swung back, towards the island of light that they had left, millennia before.

The galaxy.

The galaxy swam in the Void above their heads, its great spiral limbs stretching out like fingers into the night. But the Void was greater than the galaxy and the galaxy comprehended it not; the arms, flung out, circled back, hugging the light of the core. This was the galaxy as viewed from far above the galactic plane, where dark things crawled.

But now, it was a galaxy maimed. A dark, livid, purple weal ran across its span, cleaving it in half.

‘Brother Tangata Manu, that is what we face. The galaxy has been riven. The Archenemy is pouring out through the Rift. Ripples of the Great Tearing have gone through the Void, calling to the monsters. Like predators, smelling blood and death, they are swimming through the Void to feast on the carcass of the Imperium. That which has endured for ten thousand years is falling apart. The centre is breaking and the blood tide rises. And you, Brother Tangata Manu, you seek permission from the brethren to continue a Hunt to assuage the guilt of your own failure, taking from the Chapter the brethren and resources that we require to face this tide and turn it back.’

Te Kahurangi, the Pale Nomad, turned to face Tyberos, the Red Wake, and the Chapter commanders sitting behind the high table.

‘Shade Lord, Chapter commanders, you have heard the testimony of Chaplain Tangata Manu. Are there grounds for putting his conduct to the judgement of the Chapter?’

Slowly, one by one, the Chapter commanders raised their hands to acknowledge and agree, until only the Red Wake remained unmoved, staring in darkness at Tangata Manu.

The Chaplain received his dark regard, his own face unmoving under the scrutiny. Without the assent of the Chapter Master, the trial could not be put to the brethren.

Then Tyberos raised Hunger.

Lambent light played over the tines and cutting edges of the power claw: it thirsted.

Te Kahurangi bowed to the Shade Lord, then turned to the Chaplain.

‘Brother Tangata Manu, according to the ancient and venerable Rule of our Chapter, the assembled brethren will now pass judgement upon you. Will you accept their judgement?’

‘Yes.’

There was no other response. The trial was playing out according to its ineluctable logic.

‘Brethren of the Carcharodon Astra, I therefore ask you to pass judgement on Brother Tangata Manu. If you find him guilty, stand. If you find him without fault, remain seated.’

The Pale Nomad slowly circled so that his gaze passed over every one of the assembled, watching Carcharodons.

‘Brethren of the Carcharodon Astra, render judgement on Brother Tangata Manu.’

Tangata Manu stood, staring straight ahead, deliberately not engaging peripheral vision. But he could hear. He heard the long, slow shuffle as his Void Brothers sitting at the tables that ran the length of the Chapter house one after another got to their feet. Staring straight ahead, he saw the Chapter commanders and the Chaplains and the Apothecaries who sat at the high table stand too, until only Tyberos, the Red Wake, remained sitting.

The Shade Lord raised Slake.

Judgement was rendered.

For a moment, Tangata Manu closed his eyes. Death in battle, death before the enemies of the Void Father, was the destiny for every one of the Adeptus Astartes. They knew this, they expected this.

But not this. Not to be judged by the Chapter.

Not to be found wanting by his brothers.

Not to die at the behest of his brethren.

Tangata Manu, Chaplain to the Carcharodon Astra no more, opened his eyes and stared into the black gaze of fate.

Te Kahurangi, the Pale Nomad, turned to the high table.

‘Judgement is rendered, Shade Lord. Tangata Manu has been found wanting by his peers.’

The Librarian turned to the standing ranks of Carcharodon Astra and gestured them to sit before facing Tangata Manu again.

‘The Rule states that before the Chapter Master passes sentence, the guilty shall be given leave to speak. Tangata Manu, do you have anything to say?’

The question hung in the air, posed and poised, waiting in the silence of the consistory.

‘Yes.’ Tangata Manu gave answer.

As he answered, he saw the eyes of the Pale Nomad widen fractionally in surprise. When a Void Brother was unanimously condemned, it was tradition that he accept the verdict without demur. But there was no rule that he must.

‘Speak then,’ said Te Kahurangi.

Tangata Manu stared at the Red Wake, sitting in his void of silence.

‘The brethren have judged and found me wanting. There is only one penalty – death. But the Rule does not state when the penalty be exacted. I ask the Shade Lord to give me time to complete the Hunt before I pay the price demanded. I have acquired information telling me who it was among the drukhari that took the Void Glass. I know where to find members of this kabal. There is one last trail to follow. I ask the Shade Lord to permit me to take the Hunt that I may find this kabal and, finding them, take one or more prisoner, that we may learn what they have done with the Void Glass. If this mission fails, let my brothers of the Hunt pass the Chapter’s judgement upon me. But if it should succeed, then we would know where we might find the Void Glass. We would know who to punish for this insult to our Chapter. We would retrieve the Void Glass and visit vengeance upon the enemies of the Emperor.’

Tangata Manu saw no flicker of response in the watching black eyes of the Shade Lord.

‘I ask, master, that you allow me to make this last service to the Chapter and the Void Father. Allow me to die righting my wrong.’

Tyberos, the Red Wake, sat in terrible silence upon his judgement seat. All eyes were turned to him.

And then the Red Wake looked to Te Kahurangi.

The Librarian received his gaze and bowed his assent, before turning back to Tangata Manu.

‘Tangata Manu, what reason have you for believing that this mission to capture one or more drukhari will succeed where before you have failed?’

The brethren then saw something never seen before in a consistory called to render judgement upon one of the brethren. They saw the accused smile.

‘I have bait for a trap that the drukhari will be unable to resist.’

Chapter 3

LURE

Jona was quiet now, rocking quietly backwards and forwards, a slight smile on his face. He could see things that she could not. He was looking at them, finding comfort and fascination in details that escaped her notice.

She looked at him, drinking in his every feature: nose, wrinkling now in some private fancy; his mouth, working into a moue of concentration; the ear that she could see, curved into a perfect spiral, like some of the coral carvings and growths that spread over the Mako; his hair, dark and curly; and the eyes. They were grey, flecked with tiny flickers of gold and green. Iraia knew well that, most of the time, when they looked upon her, they conveyed no more interest than if Jona had been looking at a wall. But sometimes, just sometimes, they lit up when he looked at her, sparkle fires of joyful laughter. Then, Jona would laugh, his gurgling, gleeful laugh, and she would find herself joining in, helplessly, unable to stop, not wanting to stop, for these moments of contact with her son were dearer to her than anything else.

Iraia was trying to commit Jona’s every detail to memory. Now that the Masters had discovered him, she knew that she would have him for only a little time more. That she had been bidden to follow the Masters onto their shuttle was time with him beyond hope; when the Master had found them, she was sure that he was immediately going to exact the punishment that was due to any of the Chapter-serfs who produced a child without sanction.

But the Master had instructed them to wait in his cell – his cell! The cell of each Master was sacrosanct. For a serf to enter one was immediate death. But the Master had placed them there, telling her to keep Jona quiet, and she had, savouring every moment with him, for each was, like enough, to be her last.

Jona had enjoyed the silence of the cell. Without the constant, underlying rumble and hiss of the ship, he had settled down immediately, minutely exploring the names scratched into the walls, tracing them with his finger. Iraia did not think that Jona knew how to read – she had not been able to teach him – but by the way he followed the marks it seemed that he found sense, or at least meaning, in them.

Then the Master had come back, bidding them follow. He had ordered the Chapter-serfs who piloted the shuttle to find her and Jona berths. Strapped into the seat, holding Jona’s hand and whispering to him the whole way that he would be safe – words she knew she had no right to say – she nevertheless managed to see him through the journey without him attempting to tear off the harness. Then the shuttle had docked, coming to rest in the belly of the beast, and the Chapter-serfs, following their instructions, had freed them from the seat restraints and sent them, stumbling and uncertain, to follow the column of Masters marching into the depths of the Nicor.

That had been terrifying. Struggling to keep up, but not wanting to approach too close, and all the while trying to keep Jona quiet and following alongside her. For he would suddenly see something that grabbed his interest and attempt to go to it. Only by keeping tight hold of his hand had she managed to keep him with her.

But he had been so good. Thrust into circumstances and a place he did not know, Jona had not fallen into one of his fits, nor started rocking, but followed after her without a sound as she followed the marchers, her bare feet numb from the frigid water that sluiced along the deeper decks.

Then, coming to the great basilica, and the open space in front of it that they must pass, she had quailed, unable to go any further. She had hung back, too frightened to venture out of the passage into the pitiless open. All that she had learned in her seventeen years serving the Masters told her not to go into such a space, where they might be seen, and marked, and punished.

But a Chapter-serf, one of the higher ranks, had come to her and, using the tap speech that allowed the Chapter-serfs to communicate without sound, he had bidden them follow him. He had taken them across the great plaza to wait outside the doors of the Chapter house, where he stood alongside them, silent.

‘Door.’ The word, though not said loudly, was a stone in the silence. Iraia squeezed Jona’s hand. He was looking at the doors of the Chapter house.

The Chapter-serf tap-signed, ‘Silence.’

Iraia nodded but Jona’s eyes were fixed upon the Chapter house doors.

‘Door, door,’ said Jona.

‘Yes, darling Jona,’ she said, speaking softly but urgently, praying that he would hear her words. ‘We will go through those doors. Soon, very soon.’

‘Door?’

The Chapter-serf tap-signed to Iraia, ‘Can’t you control your son?’

Iraia did not try to explain.

The doors opened.

The great double doors of the Chapter house swung wide and, startled, she looked into the space within.

There she saw the Chapter assembled, all the Masters aboard the Nicor sitting in consistory, their dark, void eyes staring down the length of the great hall to the doors. To her.

They were all staring at her.

The Chapter-serf who had brought her here, seared by the concentrated regard, stepped away from her as if she radiated some fatal miasma. She thought her eyes would burn and her viscera melt, but she could not turn away from the watchers.

Then the Master, the one who had found her in her place of hiding and brought her forth, held out his hand in gesture and command.

Although the gesture was clear, and the command imperative, she could not move.

To obey meant walking the length of the Chapter house under the black eyes of the Masters.

A flicker of irritation passed over the face of the Master.

‘Come,’ he said.

Although her body was paralysed, her mind was working with a clarity and speed that she had not known before. The penalty for what she had done was immediate death, for her and Jona. But the Master had not done that: he had taken them to his cell, then brought them from the Mako to the Nicor and this fearful assembly.

The Master had some use for her, and for Jona, and that potential service was keeping them both alive. Fail to do this service, and their lives would be immediately forfeit.

Holding Jona’s hand, she took a step forward.

She took another step, entering the Chapter house.

Few human beings in all the long history of the species had ever done a deed so brave. The silence of it enveloped her, as stifling as the incense of an Ecclesiarchy cathedral devoted to perpetual prayers for the purification of the devoted dead.

She could not help it: she glanced to the sides, to the rows of Masters sitting behind the long tables, their teeth as sharp and biting as their scrutiny of her and Jona.

With Jona beside her, she reached the Master and stopped before him.

Jona, holding her hand, had walked the length of the Chapter house without hesitation. Now, as they stopped, Iraia felt him grasp her hand more tightly. She risked a glance at him. He was looking ahead, above where the truly terrifying Master sat.

‘Door.’

It was a whisper prayer.

Iraia could answer it only by squeezing Jona’s hand in hers.

The Master turned to his brethren. He looked to each of them present in the great hall.

‘You see?’ he said. ‘You hear?’

The Masters, watching, made no motion but she could sense their assent to his question. They understood what he was asking, although she did not.

‘These two are of a bloodline that the Kabal of the Pierced Rose are seeking. The kabal has struck many worlds in the sector, playing out their depraved art in the flesh of specific humans. Gene analysis of the dead confirms that they share a common ancestor with these serfs. In fact, these serfs could be among the last surviving from that bloodline.’

‘Utakk.’

Iraia flinched at Jona’s exclamation.

The Master, though, pointed at Jona, who gave no indication that he had even noticed him.

‘I do not know why the drukhari are seeking this bloodline. Their motives are obscure and their ends unknown to us. But look at this boy. Did you see the way he walked in among us, without fear? Without even noting among whom he walks? Yet he is not witless. Only one without stain on his soul could come among us in such a way. Perhaps that is why the drukhari seek him. But, desiring the pain and suffering of the innocent, the drukhari will be drawn to him as bloodflies cluster to a wound. The drukhari will drink the agony of a soul that has known no fear. How many such souls can there be in this galaxy? Desiring pain and suffering, the drukhari will want to kill the son, slowly, before his mother. They will not be able to resist. Thus they will be drawn into my trap.’

Even with her head turned towards Jona, Iraia could feel the silent murmur passing among the Masters in response to these words.

So that was what the Master wanted of them. To be the bait in a trap.

But a lure must live until it is required.

‘Door.’ Jona was smiling. Had ever someone smiled when surrounded by such an assemblage of predators?

‘Door.’ Jona was seeing something that no one else could see.

Iraia, feeling the ripple response among the watching Masters, tried to quieten him, squeezing his hands and shushing him. But Jona’s smile grew broader. The door was opening. He always smiled like that when he saw doors opening – even if no one else could see the door.

Then another of the Masters spoke and, hearing his words, Iraia looked at him despite her fear. Green fire flickered around his staff.

‘Tangata Manu, remind the brethren of the penalty for a Chapter-serf giving birth without leave.’

So that was the name of the Master who had summoned her. In her seventeen years of service on the Mako she had never learned that. As she watched, the Master’s lips pulled back; he was smiling. The teeth of that smile were sharp.

‘Librarian Te Kahurangi, I am sure our brothers are capable of remembering the Rule, but as you seem to be having difficulty recalling the penalty, I will remind you. The punishment is the exposure of the infant, its mother and, if found, its father.’

She looked back at the Librarian. He was staring at Tangata Manu. Between them, she could feel, almost see, the air crackle in confrontation.

‘Tangata Manu, why have you not followed the Rule of our order and exposed this woman and her son?’ The Librarian shifted slightly, speaking his words to the watching, silent order. ‘They are the Void’s due, the sacrifice necessary for our continued presence here, beyond the end of all things. By failing to make this sacrifice Tangata Manu endangers us all.’

She heard then the strangest sound she had heard in her years labouring for the Masters. A choking, coughing sound. Startled, she looked at the Chaplain.

He was laughing.

The sound, unknown in the Chapter house, merged with Jona’s low monosyllabic chant. She glanced fearfully at the Librarian and saw the anger on his face mirrored in the coruscations of his force staff.

Then, before she was even aware of it, Tangata Manu took Jona from her hand and pushed him forward. Jona, still watching the door only he could see, hardly seemed to notice the change.

‘Chief Librarian, you are telling me that this boy is someone to fear?’

She saw furious green fire flicker from the Librarian’s staff, sparking to his face and eyes.

‘You mock this gathering, Tangata Manu?’

‘My scorn is reserved for you, brother.’

She felt the air charge with suppressed violence, like a warp storm about to break through the immaterium. The Masters sat, inviolate and watchful. Green psychic fire wrapped around the Librarian’s staff. Then she saw the Librarian turn to the high table, to the judgement seat and the silent presence upon it.

‘Shade Lord, before you hear more from Tangata Manu, I have a request. Will you hear it?’

She saw the forbidding Master stare down at the Librarian with black eyes and, from her glance, she saw Tangata Manu shift, suddenly uneasy at what Te Kahurangi might ask.

The dread one, in silence, gave his assent.

‘Shade Lord, this I ask you. If it should be your mind to give Tangata Manu leave to carry out this mission then I ask that I be permitted to accompany him. Too much time and too many brothers have been lost on this futile endeavour.’

Beside her, she felt Tangata Manu stiffen at the words, but the Librarian continued.

‘Indeed, if it be your will, I will take command of this mission and ensure that there is no more wasted time or resources…’ Te Kahurangi’s words dropped away. ‘I see that is not your will, Shade Lord. Very well. But I would ask that I accompany the expedition in an independent capacity, as an observer.’ Iraia saw the Librarian glance back at Tangata Manu. ‘But with authority to carry out the sentence of this Convocation should Tangata Manu’s actions risk losing brethren we cannot afford to lose.’ The Librarian looked back to the Chapter Master, awaiting his response.

Tyberos, the Red Wake, gave answer – the silent assent.

‘Thank you, Shade Lord.’

Beside her, Iraia heard the hiss of Tangata Manu’s inbreath.

The Librarian turned to Tangata Manu. ‘Do you have anything else to say?’

Tangata Manu shifted, and Iraia saw that he was now looking to the high table, to the terrifying, silent presence sitting in the judgement chair.

‘Shade Lord, the galaxy has cracked apart and the Archenemy is spilling through. Our resources are thin and danger is everywhere. But the Void Glass must be a weapon of the most extraordinary power for the Void Father to have charged the Forgotten One with its keeping, beyond all things. To none did the Forgotten One give the knowledge of its application, adjuring us solely to keep it safe until the direst need. Shade Lord, that dire need is upon us. No less an authority than the Pale Nomad has told us so.’

‘I have a question.’

The voice came from the high table. She looked there and saw a Master standing to the right of the judgement chair, a Master who looked almost normal in comparison to the others, raising his hand as he spoke.

‘Brother Waylan.’ The Librarian turned to him. ‘You have leave to speak.’

The artificer bowed his gratefulness to the Shade Lord then turned to the Chaplain.

‘Tangata Manu, for this plan to work, you will need the youth’s mother. Have you thought on this? Have you asked her?’

The Chaplain did not even glance at the serf beside him.

‘Of course she will do it. She is a serf.’

But Brother Waylan shook his head. ‘As chief artificer, I have more contact with Chapter-serfs than you, Chaplain. The Rule was written to inculcate fear, that there be no possibility of rebellion among them, and in that it has succeeded. But I know of Chapter-serfs who have fought alongside us in the direst need. If she is willing to help, the task will be easier.’

The Chaplain looked at the artificer. ‘How can one know the mind of a serf?’ he asked.

Waylan shifted his gaze from the Chaplain. He looked straight at Iraia. ‘Ask her,’ he said.

Iraia felt it then. The weight of the cold-eyed regard of a company of predators searching her for weakness. She felt the Master beside her, Tangata Manu, felt his uncertainty at this demand, the uncertainty manifesting in an inhalation. He did not know how to answer.

She was sure that it was forbidden for one such as her to speak in the presence of so many Masters.

But then, the silent presence in the judgement chair raised his power claw and pointed it at her.

‘Speak.’

His – its – eyes were endless black and its teeth sharp. She had heard whispers among the Chapter-serfs of the Great Devourer. Was this the one of whom they whispered?

But Iraia knew, even as the silent one spoke, that she must answer. Her life – more importantly, Jona’s life – depended on what she was about to say.

But how could she speak, a serf amid the Masters?

An image, consubstantial with the thought, came to her mind. Once, she had found, fallen and forgotten in a duct that she was cleaning, a medallion, engraved with an image. Saint Miriam, clasping her newborn son to her breast with one hand while in the other she held the autopistol with which she had held off the enemy overrunning the hospital. Seeing the medallion, Iraia had hidden it in her shift and, taking it back to the dormitory, she had kept it, sewn into the lining of the rough mattress on which she slept. Sometimes, when it was quiet and all were sleeping, she would untie the knots and take the medallion from its hiding place and look at the saint, maternal and undaunted.

‘Saint Miriam, help me.’ The words came not from her mind but from her heart, a supplication that uttered her need as much as she spoke it.

‘Masters…’ Her voice broke and stuttered into helplessness.

She glanced to her right and saw Jona, staring in quiet contentment at the door only he could see.

‘Masters,’ Iraia began again. ‘This is Jona.’ And she pointed to him as he stood, head slightly back, mouthing his litany and staring over the heads of all those watching him. ‘He is my heart and my soul and I will do anything the Masters want or ask so he might live.’ She paused. The words were spilling through her and she did not know where they were coming from.

‘I ask you to remember this. I knew, when my time came, that I could make no sound, lest Jona be found. Then I held him, and Jona was so very small, so very small. But when you were born, you were no bigger than he. Each of you, every one of you, came forth from a mother. She held you, she fed you, she protected you, while you grew, until you were big enough to be taken into the service of the Void Father. I know you remember the face of your father. But do you remember the face of your mother?’ Iraia paused again. The silence in the Chapter house was utter. ‘For surely she remembers yours.’

The words, exhausted, died to silence. Iraia bowed her head. There was nothing more she could say or do.

Iraia heard movement. She looked up. The Shade Lord was standing. To either side of him, the Masters stood too. All around the Chapter house, they stood up and, in silence, processed out, leaving her alone with Jona and the Master beside her.

Only when all the Masters had left the Chapter house did the Master turn and look at Iraia.

He looked down at her. She looked up at him. His eyes were black but what seemed like a smile crinkled the skin around them.

‘What is your name?’ he asked.

‘Iraia,’ she answered.

The Master nodded. He glanced back up the hall to the now empty judgement chair. Then he turned and walked from the Chapter house.

Iraia followed, holding Jona’s hand.

Chapter 4

AT THE EMPEROR’S PLEASURE

Standing on the bridge of At the Emperor’s Pleasure, Captain Rangath Jayasuriya inspected the lines of his ship with all the bruised hope of a husband offering a present to a spoiled wife. The vessel was not so much a ship as a palace on water, complete with shimmering towers and pleasure gardens. They were the feature of At the Emperor’s Pleasure that made the first impression on those arriving to sample its delights, although there were many other satisfactions that the ship had to offer.

For Captain Jayasuriya, it was a relief that a ship like At the Emperor’s Pleasure could still exist in a galaxy of strife and terror and war, a sanctuary and a respite from all the grim news that bombarded everyone these days. Of course, sanctuary did not come cheap, particularly when it had to be coupled with sufficient security to ensure the peace of mind of the scions of the most noble houses of the sector. But Ouranos lay far from the most troubled areas, amid a calm group of local agri worlds. Ouranos, however, was no agri world, but the most discreet of paradise worlds, one whose delights could only be tasted by invitation, that invitation being sent out by the quiet oligarchy of noble families that ran this sector of the Imperium.

‘There is a lot to be said,’ Captain Jayasuriya reflected, ‘for being stationed in a quiet, almost forgotten part of the Emperor’s realm.’

He turned to his first officer. As befitted the captain of At the Emperor’s Pleasure, Jayasuriya occupied a command throne when on the bridge, a throne reserved for him alone – and any sufficiently eminent passengers who might want to experience what it was like to take charge of such a vessel. The owners of At the Emperor’s Pleasure had made it very clear to Jayasuriya that his primary concern was the gratification of his passengers, so if that meant allowing the fifth cousin of the cadet branch of the House of Vaubois to take the throne, then it was Captain Jayasuriya’s duty to step aside and let him play at commanding a vessel the size of an Imperial battle cruiser.

‘First Officer Hakupan, check with our escort that all is clear.’

The first officer, standing ready beside the command throne, saluted his answer and turned at once to the communication choirs on either side of the bridge. As the choirs sent their status checks off to the flotilla of frigates and destroyers that accompanied At the Emperor’s Pleasure on its journey over the wine-dark sea, Captain Jayasuriya took the chance to scan through the passenger list.

Impressive. There were members of three major houses on board, with their entourages of course, as well as seven minor houses and eleven trade guilds. The minor houses would already be speaking to the trade guilds, trying to position themselves to sweep up the scraps of business the major houses might let fall from their negotiations.

‘And Mr Hakupan, when you have received reports from our escorts, bring me the report from the weapons check.’

‘Yes, captain,’ said Hakupan. Being a supremely competent first officer, the order had no sooner been made than he was delivering into the captain’s hand the report, as compiled by the ship’s armourer.

Captain Jayasuriya leafed through the dataslate as the communication choirs sang off the all-clears from the accompanying frigates and destroyers, and the overflight of Thunderbolts. It was the usual catalogue of concealed weapons, from the obvious – did anyone really think a rapier could be made undetectable by fashioning it from sharpened salwood? – through to the commonplace (the ship’s weapon detection systems were more than capable of finding arms swallowed or secreted in orifices, natural or unnatural), to the ones that actually had a chance of evading detection: mostly archeotech of unknown function and abilities.

For the safety and security of the passengers aboard At the Emperor’s Pleasure, weapons were forbidden, even for the accompanying personal bodyguards and security details. The ship was strictly neutral. All the noble houses knew that. Naturally, they all expected that to apply to everyone apart from themselves.

Weapons were returned at the end of the cruise. To ensure the safety of passengers, the temporarily confiscated weapons were not even stored aboard the ship: they followed in a secure frigate whose task it was to accommodate any of the bodyguards whose weapons could not practicably be removed from their bodies; indeed, some of the bodyguards were little else than weapons themselves. The first and most important clause of the contract signed by the noble houses allowing them to travel on the vessel specifically said that the ship itself was a weapons-free zone.

The codex of confiscated weapons revealed nothing out of the ordinary. Captain Jayasuriya passed it to a petty officer to file and turned to his first officer.

‘Have the invitations to the captain’s table gone out, Mr Hakupan?’

‘Yes, captain.’

‘Then you have command, Mr Hakupan. Take us to the scheduled anchorage. Have the weather augurs confirmed the display for tonight?’

‘Yes, they have, captain.’

‘A good show?’

‘They predict a very good show.’

‘Excellent. I will go and prepare.’

Captain Jayasuriya rose from his command throne. On this, the first evening of the cruise, it was his duty – and his pleasure – to welcome the passengers aboard At the Emperor’s Pleasure, inviting the most eminent among them to dine with him at his table. It was a chance for him personally to cement his connections to the most powerful houses in the sector as well as assessing the desires and wishes of his most prestigious passengers. An important event, but one that he had carried out many times before with exquisitely discreet results.

It was going to be a good trip. He felt it in his bones.

The couplet was difficult. The rhythm was complex and its internal sprung rhythms made it more so. The kennings required further considerations of the interplay of meaning, music and composition.

He spun the words in his mind, tasting them through, appreciating the warp and weft of each, all of them a nexus bringing together, in the simple combination of sounds, powers that transcended the boundaries of the galaxy.

Words were the purest form of power. Had not She who was born of their dark pleasures come to climactic birth in the word?

Their souls were beyond redemption but survival was bought with the suffering of others.

There was power in words.

The play and the power and the poison, the sweet potent poison.

He smiled.

Around him, the phenomenal and the noumenal flickered and merged, separating, combining; playing with each other in their dance.

Utakk.

Yes. Utakk was his current name. Utakk the Scrivener.

He had had many others besides, and near as many lives as names.

For the moment, he was dracon to Ilu Limnu, archon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose.

For the moment, he waited in the webway for the paths between the worlds to align and for the door to open.

For the moment, he measured one word against another.

Around them, around the waiting, thirsting, ravenous raiders, the noumenal and the phenomenal worlds played the dance of opening and closing, the web of making and unmaking, the balance of chance and necessity. It was necessary that some creatures die, slowly and in exquisite agony, that his soul and the souls of the members of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose not be claimed by the Desirous One.

So, they waited, some pirouetting upon points of pain, others flensing their own flesh. Anything to feel the transmuting pain of becoming.

Becoming what?

Something else.

A thought, a wish, a desire. A poem.

Utakk would become a poem.

He was already becoming one. A creature of chiasmus and anaphorae, of elision and ekphrasis. A song of the flesh making songs from flesh.

But now he watched the weaving of worlds, waiting upon the confluence of sound and time and place and circumstance that would allow the opening of the portal and their entry into the world of flesh.

The warp and weft of that weaving. Ah, to catch the measure of the dance in words – that would be a triumph beyond measure. One to earn the approbation of… He had been about to say peers, but of course, at this he had no peers.

As he waited in the webway, he turned thought into song.

I flayed this evening evening’s ending, king-

dom of darkness’ dragoman, double-down done exegete…

The exegete in question was an emissary from a trading cartel that sought to buy archeotech from the collections of Commorragh in return for slave chattel for its pens. It had been an excellent offer, with the promise of the currency most valued in Commorragh, but there was something about the exegete that had irritated him beyond the agreed upon soul bounty. Then, as the negotiations were concluding, he had realised what it was. There was an annoying imperfection in his musculature that suggested a clumsy attempt to conceal a device in the exegete’s body cavity.

It was, in fact, a growth rather than a device. His transversus abdominis was distorted by a tumour in the normal thin sheet of muscle tissue. The tumour was slow-growing and benign; it would not have significantly shortened the exegete’s life. But his horror and shock at the abrogation of the normal trade discussion concord had added considerable interest to the business of carefully peeling away someone’s skin, and then their muscles and ultimately their souls. Such had been the pleasure of the task that he had been moved to immortalise the exegete in verse – given the exquisite form of the finished poem, it was an honour far greater than the dragoman could possibly have deserved.

Around Utakk, the raiders seemed to whirl into patterns of leaving and taking. The sound of the world weaving became more subtle, more pervasive, its atonal melodies shiver-sounding through the deep bones of his body.

His teeth rang with the resonance. The worlds were aligning.

Pleased beyond measure with his memorial to the dragoman who named himself exegete, Utakk summoned his wrack.

‘Stand still.’

Utakk, unwinding himself from the curled lotus waiting position, stood and inspected the creature. The wrack waited patiently, its weapon-sculpted musculature rippling under the repeated shocks set by the linking of the proprioceptors to its nociceptors, so that every movement sent waves of exquisite pain to its brain.

But Utakk looked at the creature’s dull eyes and shambling gait. What had once been an immortal creature of delight had become this: it was ever thus. The great dream of the flesh sculptors dissolved against the greater reality of ennui. Even the most exquisite and agonising of tortures became commonplace after centuries of experience.

How much better to inflict this pain on one who had never experienced it, and drink of its delight and its suffering, distilling all in the perfectly turned phrase. That was the triumph and métier of poetry over the fleshly pursuits of his peers.

‘Turn around.’

The wrack, its consciousness reduced to the following of direct orders, obediently circled, presenting its back to Utakk. There was a reason that Utakk was surnamed ‘Scrivener’. He raised his hand and with the needle embedded in his right index finger began to inscribe, in precise, tiny writing, this latest work on the flesh of the wrack.

The wrack was, of course, merely his jotting pad, the place where he kept his newest work until it could be transferred to a more permanent home. The Library of the Living Word, in which Utakk preserved his finest compositions, had as one of its many literary refinements the Hall of the Critics, where those whose opinion of Utakk’s poems had not coincided with that of the poet were gradually brought to a full appreciation of his genius.

The new poem tattooed upon the wrack’s flesh, Utakk stretched, reaching up on point and extending into a series of elaborate arabesques.

Around him – around them – the walls between the worlds were shifting, ratcheting slowly into alignment. Soon, the noumenal and the phenomenal worlds would come together and the portal would open. The reading of these temporary portals in the webway was, Utakk knew, the most valued of his many skills by his peers, not least Archon Ilu Limnu. It was a skill few had, for it required the soul of a poet, an appreciation for the rhythms and meanings of worlds and words and of how they fit and, just as importantly, did not fit together. So Utakk knew that this portal would open when the moon of Ouranos was waning, the sea was twilit and calm, the ship still and at peace, and the right word of opening was spoken.

Utakk, named the Scrivener, had other names too.

Utakk completed his exercises.

He assumed first position and placed the palms of his hands together. In some, this would be an attitude of prayer but Utakk gave worship to no gods other than himself.

Utakk bowed, and spoke the word of opening.

And the drukhari reiving party howled through onto the decks of the good ship At the Emperor’s Pleasure.

Chapter 5

DRIFTWOOD

The sea was warm, its temperature little lower than the powerful hands that gently scooped the water backwards. The calm was as complete as a world of water might know, the ocean rippling in twilit furrows. In the dusk light, the slim dark shadows of the escort vessels slipped past, their wakes churning the calm into briefly bioluminescent life.

Tangata Manu, naked save for a loincloth, lay on the floatboard which he paddled through the ring of escort vessels. As one of the ships – a corvette bristling with weaponry and auspex arrays – broke the patrol pattern and vectored towards him, Tangata Manu stopped paddling and lay still.

The ship, a shadow against the deepening shadows, cut through the water furrows, its path threatening to pass directly over the Carcharodon.

Behind him, a whisper: ‘Door.’

Tangata Manu craned round.

Iraia, towed behind his floatboard, mouthed an apology to him. Beside her, Jona was looking up at the corvette.

‘Door,’ he said again.

‘Shh, Jona.’ Iraia put her finger to her lips and, reaching over, squeezed her son’s hand.

‘Door?’

‘Yes, yes. Soon,’ whispered Iraia.

‘Door,’ said Jona, reassured, and fell silent.

Hands still in the water, Tangata Manu felt the reverberations as the screws thrashed the sea into the ship’s motion. Gauging its course, the Chaplain adjusted their position with the minimum of movement.

The ship brushed past, its wake pushing them on towards the distant prospect of their target. Tangata Manu waited for it to pass, allowing them to appear as driftwood upon the auspex traces.

Other pieces of driftwood, but driftwood that moved through the darkness with the same singular purpose as Tangata Manu, began to gather where the Carcharodon waited, drifting on the warm ocean.

The Hunt.

But this was the Hunt moving with sea stealth towards their prey, as invisible to the watchers, human, instrument or xenos, as the ocean predators that followed in their wake. Their bodies, temperatures comparable to the surrounding water, registered as nothing more than surface-skimming ocean life to even the most sensitive of thermal detection devices. By hugging the floatboards, they provided no profile to the auspexes whose machine-spirits ranged over the furrows of the sea. And by going unarmoured, there was no trace on any of the weapons’ detection systems that scoured the waters around At the Emperor’s Pleasure. Only eyes, human or xenos, might detect them. But the Carcharodons were born of the sea, of ocean without end, nomads who wandered into the ocean of stars and then beyond, to the encircling Void. Even the most acute of eyes would pass over them as they lay upon their floatboards, moving with the regular rhythm of the marine life that swam alongside them, predators that had been summoned by the Carcharodons’ call to partake of the feast to come.

The call itself was in part audible, in part psychic and in part simply olfactory: the rearmost of the Carcharodons trailed a spreading stream of blood and offal that announced the coming feast to all the predators within its scent range.

Tangata Manu signalled to the Hunt to begin the approach. They had successfully passed through the piquet line of sentry ships. But as the Carcharodons moved past, one of the floatboards approached more closely.

In the faint gleam of the bioluminescence, with the star glimmer refracting in his light-enhancing eyes, Tangata Manu was able to make out who it was that drifted closer towards him across the ocean roll.

The Librarian, Te Kahurangi, alone among the Hunt had brought a weapon with him – his force staff, strapped beneath his board. The water around him glowed the faintest green as the staff shed its light into the sea.

The two Carcharodons drifted beside each other.

The ocean was still now. The wake of the passing patrol vehicle had dispersed into a near-flat calm.

Tangata Manu glanced at the Librarian. Te Kahurangi was lying flat, his fingers trailing in the warm water as the sea moved with the gentleness only water knows. Feeling the glance, Te Kahurangi looked to Tangata Manu. The Librarian nodded, silently, at the moment of memory. They both recalled the touch of warm sea on trailing hands.

Then the Librarian indicated the sky. Tangata Manu looked up. Overhead, the stars were needle bright, save for the livid purple weal that cut through the centre of the galaxy.

But beyond the reach of the scar cutting through the galaxy, beyond and encompassing all galaxies, was the Void, and the Void was incorrupt.

The Chaplain signed his understanding. The Pale Nomad’s pointing was both warning and call. While they waited for the rest of the Hunt to take their positions, and for their prey to appear, it was mindful to think on the Void.

The sea itself, the liquid mirror of the Void, provided its gently rolling level for further contemplation.

With his fingers in the water, Tangata Manu could feel the stirring of currents as the predators gathered in the deep beneath them, waiting for the feast.

Floating, they allowed the slight surface currents to drift them towards the distant bulk of At the Emperor’s Pleasure. The great pleasure ship lay still in the ocean, tethered to a distant seabed by twin anchors running down into the depths from prow and stern. Alone on the night-dark sea it was lit: a gaudy fantasy it seemed to the eyes watching in the drift darkness.

But while the ship was lit as a palace, to ears that had listened to the silence of the Void for centuries, there came the first sounds of pain overlaying the promised pleasure. Distant screams. Shouts. Cries cut off before they could be answered.

But the watching, waiting Carcharodons made no move to paddle closer. Let the waves and the current carry them to their destination. That way, they would seem no more than driftwood, floating without purpose on the great sea.

Against the lights of the ship, as the cries and screams grew louder, spreading over the length and breadth of the vessel, they began to see flailing shapes hurling themselves into the water. Better the sea than what hunted them on the boat. The Carcharodons waited, making no effort to move closer and save those who floundered and slowly drowned around the ship. Some did not drown. For around the Hunt, dark shapes moved in the depths. There were other predators in this ocean, and they too were preparing for the feast to come.

Chapter 6

THE SWEET TIME

This was the sweetest time of the raid. The first thrill, the first kills, the first, largest herd of helpless, wailing captives already driven back through the webway portal. Now came the fastidious appreciation of the finer points of the venture. The singling out of a single prey to pursue. The discovery of the hidden and the hiding. The uncovering of mystery and the parsing of flesh.

Utakk paused, standing poised. Around him, the decks were fleshed with, well, flesh. The first flush, the first rush, had seen the raid lose itself into Bacchic frenzy. Utakk had let them off his many leashes as soon as he had ascertained that there would be minimal resistance and thus no need for him to maintain strict control of his forces; they – and he – could just indulge themselves. Nevertheless, Utakk felt a pang of disappointment at the lack of challenge.

They really had believed that this ship was a sanctuary.

The realisation by the rich and the powerful that their sanctuary was turning into a trap was ambrosia to the drukhari: he enjoyed tasting the horror. These mon-keigh were rich and powerful among their kind; they had never known fear, or want, or pain.

They knew them now, those that still could feel anything at all.

‘Is there no prey on this ship worth hunting?’

The dracon posed the question rhetorically, for naturally he knew the answer, but one of the more eager among the warriors stepped forward, eyes wide and dark with the ecstasy of the raid, and spoke when Utakk wished no counterpoint to the melody of agony that suffused the ship.

‘The bridge has not been taken yet, but we have isolated it, so that they cannot raise warning to the distant escort vessels.’ The kabalite warrior’s eyes gleamed wetly incarnadine. ‘The mon-keigh are caught in a bottle of their own making.’

Utakk smiled kindly at the eager, blood-strung warrior, before suddenly slashing with his blade and removing his throat. In that moment when the warrior realised he was dying, Utakk observed with rapt interest the play of emotions: the instantaneous ecstasy of the true release; the agony, at once exquisite and poignant; of ending and beginning; and the surprise that, yes, he was dying, and dying in this particular instant rather than in some long-delayed future.

The warrior collapsed to the plasteel deck, his limbs spasming in the body’s final dance, although the blank eyes told Utakk that his soul had already departed.

Utakk looked around at the squad who were his personal retinue for the duration of the raid.

‘He interrupted the music. My question was posed in counterpoint to a scream that reached high C, two octaves above middle C, a note that I have only heard uttered three times before by a mon-keigh throat and a note rendered to its fullest resonance by harmonising with my own sonorous – and carefully rhetorical – question. Then he,’ Utakk kicked the body of the dead warrior, feeling the ribs crack under his foot, ‘he interrupted.’ The dracon turned, pirouetting on point, and looked up at the overarching bridge.

Leaping upwards with the grace of a dancer and the athleticism of a tigon, the dracon grasped the plasteel supports to the bridge superstructure and vaulted onto the top of the needle-sharp auspex array that jutted up in front of it.

Then, rotating upon the point, he turned to look in at the bridge.

Staring out at him in wide-eyed horror was a line of faces, pale and tight-drawn with fear. Not the expressions of appreciation that his balletic prowess should have inspired.

Utakk, while maintaining the flowing lines of his pose, mentally shook his head in self-admonition. The problem with being a supremely talented artist was that his work far outstripped any audience.

Through the reinforced glass of the bridge, Utakk could see the frantic scrabbling of the mon-keigh as they sought to bring the few weapons they still had command of to bear upon him. He waited, a taut spring, until the instant of firing.

The spring, released, sent him curving up and over the incoming hail of stubber and auto rounds, somersaulting onto the roof of the bridge.

And as he did so, the kabalite warriors, who had taken advantage of the distraction provided by his performance, cut through the bulkhead door that had sealed off the bridge, their monofilament blades slicing into the foot of plasteel as if it were the last gentle breath of the dying.

Soon, it was. But the dying of the men on the bridge was not gentle.

Utakk somersaulted down into the bridge. His nostrils flared at the iron tang of blood spilled and the ozone charge of mon-keigh machines shorting out from liquid flowing through them.

The sound was disappointing though.

There was no pleading, no desperate bargaining or calling on gods or emperors or mothers for a deliverance that they had no power to send. Instead, there was grim fighting to the unequal end, and curses hurled with dying breaths.

But the warriors saved two of the men on the bridge for Utakk’s pleasure: the men whom, by the ostentation of their dress, had latterly commanded this vessel. The warriors brought them to Utakk and forced them to their knees in front of the dracon.

Utakk looked down at them. They were pathetic creatures.

To think that the galaxy had come under the sway of creatures such as these: lumpen, uncouth, uncultured, speaking a language with all the mellifluousness of gargled gravel.

But if he would speak with them, Utakk knew he would have to fill his mouth with stones. They were too stupid to even begin to understand the language of High Commorragh.

‘Mon-keigh.’

The syllables tasted like mud.

The one on the right, whose braid suggested was the master of the ship, looked up. His scalp was running red with three stripes of the cat, the blood leaving his hair in rats’ tails.

It made a clumsy creature, Utakk reflected, appear even uglier.

‘What… what do you want with us?’ the man gasped.

‘What do I want with you?’ Utakk laughed, enjoying the silvery harmonics of his mirth. ‘I want your eternal pain. I want the galaxy rid of your race of boors.’ Utakk chuckled again, creating new harmonies against the declining overtones of his previous laughter; the sound produced the aural effect of silver gilded on diamond. ‘But such desires are entirely beyond your wit, mon-keigh. From you, I want what is simple – your passenger manifest.’ The dracon put a finger under the mon-keigh’s chin and lifted the head so that he could look into the man’s face more clearly.

Error.

The ugliness, the uncouthness of those coarse features. Utakk pushed the head down again. At least he could feel the man trembling under his touch. That was some recompense for contact with such a creature.

‘Let me repeat – I want your passenger manifest. There is one among you whose blood I seek.’ Utakk smiled. ‘Let me explain the true nature of vengeance. There was once a soldier of your kind, a general of your army in a distant star system, that was blessed with a visit from – us! But this general inconvenienced us – he ordered the destruction of all the carefully selected souls we had assembled, ripe for performing the Ceremony of Innocence. He killed them all. The Ceremony of Innocence may be performed once in a thousand years. Its preparation is painstaking, precise. And he spoiled it all. So we killed him. But before we killed him, we told him, during his long dying, that we would find and kill every last one of his family and descendants throughout the galaxy until his seed was completely extirpated and his memory entirely lost. We are nearly there. His seed is all but extinct. Only one branch remains to be pruned, and it is upon this vessel. Then we may finally perform again the Ceremony of Innocence and his name will be forgotten.’

The dracon looked askance at the mon-keigh. The man was making a strange, uncouth croaking sound that, for a moment, he could not identify.

Then Utakk realised that the mon-keigh was laughing. Laughing at him.

The mon-keigh was dead before he even knew it, his head cut from his body, looking up with his mouth still wide and moving as if he was still trying to laugh although no air flowed past his vocal cords. Then the mon-keigh realised he was dead, and his eyes blanked into an unreachable peace.

Momentarily enraged, Utakk kicked the head through the now broken glass of the bridge viewports before turning to the other surviving mon-keigh.

‘Where is your passenger manifest, mon-keigh? Tell me, or your dying will last longer than your living.’

But as Utakk asked the question, one of the warriors loped over to Utakk.

‘Dracon, two of the raid have disappeared.’

Utakk, interrupted, spun on the ball of his foot. The warrior, who had removed his helmet to better enjoy these latter stages of the raid, stayed firm – which was as well for him. If he had quailed, the dracon would have pulled out his throat.

‘You bother me with this? This is the time of the blood feast – they will be pursuing their own revelries. Shouldn’t you be doing the same?’ Utakk paused. ‘Have the escort vehicles changed their stations or moved any closer?’

‘No, dracon. They remain on patrol, beyond the visual range of these mon-keigh.’

‘Then no alarm has been given. We have this vessel and all its passengers to ourselves until daybreak. Let us enjoy them.’

‘Yes, dracon.’

‘Now go away,’ said Utakk. He did not wait for the warrior to leave but turned back to the mon-keigh kneeling on the bridge deck.

‘As I was saying, before I was interrupted, I want to see your passenger manifest. Where is it?’

But the man shook his head with the hopeless desperation of a dog that has been unable to find its master.

‘There is no passenger manifest. The people who sail with us demand discretion and we give it – we gave it – to them.’

Utakk silenced the mon-keigh – although his method for doing so was surprisingly gentle. He held his finger to his lips.

He had smelled something.

Through the music of screams and the counterpoint of pleading, through the iron tang of spilled blood and the sewer reek of torn entrails, he had scented the perfume that his master, Archon Ilu Limnu, had sent him to track across the galaxy: the blood of that long-forgotten general.

For the archon it was an amusement, the very esoterism of the revenge a fitting addition to his gallery of vengeance. But for the dracon, it was personal; he had led that long-ago raid, he had all but died in the detonation that had claimed the lives of the harvested mon-keigh. After two decades of hunting he had captured the general and brought him back to Commorragh to learn of the archon’s long vengeance. But that had been millennia ago. Vengeance had been served, again and again and again, on the general’s unwitting descendants. Now, it was the satisfaction of completion that drove him on, that and the archon’s wish that his command be done. But still, he smelled the blood.

Utakk wrinkled his nose and sighed. Best get on with it, then. He turned his head, locating the scent.

Yes. There.

At the back. Towards the stern and on the main deck, or just below it.

The dracon sprung away, somersaulting through the empty space that defined the bridge’s viewport.

And as he hung poised in mid-air, apparently impervious to gravity, he swivelled his torso so that what he was holding pointed back into the bridge of At the Emperor’s Pleasure.

‘Oh,’ said Mr Hakupan, the first officer.

The splinters dug into his face and chest, passing through the broadcloth of his uniform as easily as through his skin. The dracon had still not completed his leap when the neurotoxins began to work.

Chapter 7

THE CEREMONY OF INNOCENCE

Amid the screams and the carnage and the body parts, Iraia hugged Jona tight while he held his hands tight over his ears. They were hiding in one of the lifeboats that hung above the taffrail. Although the lifeboat muffled the sounds coming from outside, Iraia wished that she could cover her own ears against the screams and cries. But Jona was on the verge of a complete meltdown. If that happened, he would either become catatonic or start clawing at his eyes. Iraia feared that, if she was not around to stop him, he might put them out. It was as if the sheer act of seeing became so overwhelming that he could not bear it any longer.

At least hidden in the lifeboat with the storm covers pulled over their heads they were shielded from sight and the sound was muffled. Although Jona held his hands tight over his ears, and his eyes were screwed shut, the incessant, frantic movement that had threatened to set the lifeboat swinging when they had first got in had settled down to a cradle rock.

Jona was calming down.

Iraia wished that she might. But too many images of the nightmarish passage through the ship were playing through her memory for her to relax.

The Master – she now knew he was called Tangata Manu but she could not bring herself to name him, even in her own thoughts – gesturing for her to silence Jona as he made inarticulate cries of distress. Stopped in the shadow beneath a ladder, she had quietened him the only way she could – by putting her hand over his mouth. Then, when the Master signalled for them to follow, she had led Jona on, the poor boy turning his head wildly at the cacophony of screams and wails and unearthly singing that assailed them. Their bare feet made no sound on the decking. The rest of the Hunt had disappeared into the depths of the ship but the other Master, the one with the green staff that they called Librarian, he followed behind, his presence a looming threat.

The Master had led them onwards. On one occasion he had stopped and pushed Iraia and Jona down, hiding them in his own shadow in the dark behind a stairwell.

Something, something that Iraia had never seen before, came tripping lightly down the stairs, its footfall as easy as snow. It was perfumed, suffused with a sweetness Iraia carried deep in her childhood memories of Monterosso, but under the perfume was a gagging scent of decay, for flowers that fester smell far worse than weeds. It was as if the creature were rotting from within yet covering it with all the scents of a bottled summer.

Iraia swallowed, forcing her gorge back, as the creature leaped down the last few steps, its voice raised in a sweetly melodious hymn that it appeared to be singing to itself.

As it vaulted over the stairwell, the Master, hidden in the darkness beneath the stairs, stepped out and, with a single exquisitely timed grab and heave, sent the creature tumbling far over the railing of the ship. As it arched outwards over the sea, the creature twisted, turning round so that it locked its gaze on its unexpected attacker.

Iraia saw its face.

Beautiful. Flawless. Utterly damned.

The beauty snarled into piqued rage as it turned the weapon it was carrying back in the direction of the ship, at the Master.

But he, reacting with a speed that all but matched that of the creature, moved before the weapon could come to bear.

She heard the shredding impact of its fire on the plasteel above her, but still she could not move. She saw the creature twist again, jackknifing into the perfect diving position with an elegance and economy beyond her experience.

It disappeared down, arrowing towards the sea. The Master had thrown it so far beyond the side of the vessel that there was no way it could twist back to the ship but, in diving down, it evidently intended to swim back and return to the fray.

But the Master made no move to see what had happened to it, instead indicating for her to follow.

Iraia could not move. The dread of its return, now that it knew where they were, was too great.

‘Master, it will come back after us,’ she whispered.

But the Master had already gone on.

Then the other Master, the Librarian, took her arm. She looked up, alarmed. His lips were parted and the teeth behind them sharpened to reddened points. He held his staff in his other hand. It flickered green and she felt her body move without volition. He was taking her to the side of the ship. She knew he had not wanted her presence on this mission. He was going to give her to the sea. The fear welled up but she could no more stop herself than she could stop the fear sweat beading her back.

Then she found herself looking over the side of the vessel, down at the sea far below. She closed her eyes against the sight of the creature already climbing up towards her – one of such grace would surely have no difficulty in climbing the sides of this vessel – but then she found her eyes opening.

The sea roiled red beneath her. Great sea predators were thrashing the water to bloodied foam as they fought over the remains of the creature. Looking along the length of the ship, she saw two other places where the sea boiled. Then another one of the graceful attackers came falling over the side, twisting to dive before realising, too late, what awaited it in the water.

Jona, looking down beside her, whispered, ‘Door.’

Iraia nodded and straightened.

‘We will follow,’ she said.

She went after the Master, Tangata Manu, following him until they came to the rear of the ship. Finding a lifeboat hanging from its pulleys above the taffrail, the Master drew back the storm covers and gestured for Iraia and Jona to get in. But it was too far for her to reach.

The Master bent down and picked her up.

It was as if she weighed nothing.

He put her and then Jona into the lifeboat, pulling the storm covers back over them once they were in the boat.

Iraia waited in the dark for the signal. She knew what the Master wanted her to do.

In the night, hidden under the storm cover, she could not see Jona. But she could feel him. Now that he had calmed down, she could feel his breath. She did not know how much longer she would be able to feel him like this, but she had been with him for longer than she had thought possible when she had first brought him to agonised birth in the service ducts of the Mako all those years ago.

Waiting in the dark, Iraia remembered the previous waiting, as they floated on the quiet sea under the bruised stars, allowing the ocean currents to drift them closer to the gaudily lit mass of At the Emperor’s Pleasure. From a distance, she had watched the vessel with something approaching delight; she had never before seen something so bright, so luxurious, so rich in detail and design. There was no envy in her at the thought that some people lived, normally, in such luxury, but rather a quiet relief that not all lives were like hers.

But then the air above the ship had shifted, cracked, as if reality itself was twisting and tearing. And out of the tear, too far off for her to see distinctly, had spilled jagged, graceful shapes that went hunting through the decks of the great vessel.

That was when the screaming had started.

She had tried to cover her ears against the sound, but it penetrated flesh and bone, driving into her mind. In the desperation of what she was hearing, Iraia even turned to the Master, thinking to ask him if there was anything he could do, if it was time to act. But he had turned his black eyes upon her and signalled her to silence.

Iraia knew the plan. The Master had explained it to her, in part at least, that she might better understand what she had to do. There would be no attempt to rescue the people on the boat from the drukhari raiders – they would serve to sate the appetites and dull the responses of the attackers. Only when the drukhari had had their immediate fill of suffering and were looking for more choice sensations would they approach the ship, climbing the vessel in silence. Then the hunters would become the hunted and Tangata Manu would bait his trap.

They were the bait.

She and Jona.

She waited for the sign, counting breaths.

The sign came. A quiet series of knocks on the side of the lifeboat.

Iraia knew what she had to do.

Jona had fallen into a doze, so she quietly let go of his hand. He stirred but settled.

Then Iraia drew the knife the Master had given her and, without hesitation, drew it across her forearm. The pain, while sharp, bore no relation to bringing Jona to birth in silence.

She felt the blood trickle from her arm.

The Master lifted the storm cover from the edge of the lifeboat, and Iraia, the sudden brightness almost blinding, shifted over so that she could daub blood over the side of the boat.

Jona stirred but still did not wake. At least that made it easier for her.

With the light filtering into the boat, Iraia gently lifted Jona’s arm and then, before he could wake up, cut him too.

Jona jerked awake. Iraia, holding his head, looked into his startled, frightened, surprised eyes.

‘I’m sorry, so sorry, so sorry.’

Jona looked at her, his eyes uncomprehending. Iraia could smell the blood. Its iron tang filled the confined lifeboat, clutching at her throat.

‘Door?’

Iraia nodded. ‘Yes, Jona, darling Jona, door, it’s a door.’

‘Door.’

The Master had told her who would be seeking the door they had opened with their blood.

But this was what the Master had told her she must do. For this, she and Jona had been spared the Void. For this they were still living. Despite herself, she felt her shoulders hunch as her body tried to protect itself from what was coming.

How long would it be?

They were hiding at the rear of the ship, inside a lifeboat. The whole ship reeked of blood. How could any of those monsters smell the small amount of their blood that she had shed?

Maybe they would not come.

Iraia put the thought aside. If they did not come, then the Master would move them somewhere else, somewhere even more dangerous.

But how long now? It seemed that they had been waiting forever.

Where were they…

The stars.

She looked up to see the stars above her rather than the dark lid of the storm cover.

Turning her head, Iraia expected to see the Master, come to move them to somewhere else. But there was no one there. Just her and Jona, sitting in the bottom of the lifeboat, the fractured stars above their heads.

Iraia listened. Jona, distracted and in pain, began to rock. Iraia tried to calm him, holding him tight to her.

‘This is almost lovely.’

The voice was mercury flowing over broken silver, a shiver of sharded light. Iraia’s head jerked up.

There, over the edge of the lifeboat, its arms resting on the gunwale, was one of them – one of the drukhari. She was within a few feet of it.

His face was a plane of perfect angles, the physical achievement of what human beauty aspired to. She felt it as a physical blow; her breath stopped and her heart lurched. But her lungs were thick with honey and her blood clotted with silver.

Surely such beauty justified itself completely. Nothing he could do or say could negate it.

The drukhari stared at them with an intensity that frightened and enthralled her. Iraia could not move.

‘Utakk.’

The name sounded as if it were dragged from Jona’s throat by cutting barbs, tearing the flesh as it rose. Iraia jerked round. Her son was staring up at the drukhari with a horror and an intent that he had never displayed for any creature.

The drukhari, in a single fluid movement, pulled himself up and stood, perfectly balanced, on the narrow edge of the gunwale.

‘You know my name already. How splendid – if a trifle surprising. But the lustre of my fame has spread far and wide.’ He stood looking down at Iraia and Jona. ‘A tableau worthy of my talent. A mother, a son, the infinite promise of life, and its infinite fragility.’ The drukhari struck a pose of rapt contemplation. ‘I had not thought that a mon-keigh might move me to inspiration and yet, dear mother and child, you have. I shall tell your praise in rhyme.’

The drukhari stepped daintily down into the lifeboat and reached his hand out to Iraia. The fingers were long, delicate and exquisitely proportioned. It was only when she started to lift her hand towards his that she saw a detail that jarred the perfection: each nail was filed to a needle point and each point glinted, wetly. A drop, collecting on the point of the index fingernail, swelled, narrowed at the neck and plinked onto the deck of the lifeboat, splashing red on her feet.

Iraia looked up from the hand into the face of the drukhari.

‘Oops,’ he said, and he smiled. The smile was broad, white and entirely without mercy. ‘It appears I have given the game away.’

Before Iraia could move, the drukhari grasped Jona, pulling him to his feet with surprising strength.

‘Utakk?’ said Jona.

Utakk laughed. ‘Quite right, dear one.’ The drukhari looked to Iraia. ‘He will be beautiful and loved. He will shine brighter than the stars – although it is true that these have dimmed following recent events. Surely you, his mother, should give him joy in that?’

Iraia grabbed for Jona but the drukhari stepped out of her way with barely any effort.

‘Give him back to me,’ she said.

‘Oh, I will, I will,’ said the drukhari. ‘In stages.’ He bent to the boy, blowing air into Jona’s face. ‘Won’t I, dear one?’

‘Door.’

‘Let go of him!’ Iraia made another lunge at the drukhari, who again skipped clear. This time, still grasping Jona, he hopped up onto the gunwale of the lifeboat and stood poised there, looking down at Iraia below him.

‘Do not fret yourself. I will ensure that you have the best view. This is the culmination of a vow made millennia ago. And when I am done with him, it will be your turn. I would not want you to feel left out.’

But as the drukhari stood, poised on point upon the gunwale, holding Jona by the elbow, muscles taut and legs and arms making the most elegant lines, two hands reached up from below, grasped his ankles and pulled him off the boat.

And Jona, dragged down, tumbled after him.

Iraia scrambled up onto the gunwale and looked below.

The Master, Tangata Manu, had hold of the drukhari, one hand now around his throat – the hand was large enough, Iraia noticed in one cold, observing part of her mind, to encompass the creature’s entire neck – and squeezing, while the other was beating back and fending off the desperate lunges Utakk made with his needle-pointed hand. The drukhari was pinned with his back to the Master and Tangata Manu lifted him up in the air, still holding him by the neck. But the creature, with the impossible grace and flexibility of his kind, managed still to twist half round, bringing his razor talons within reach of the Master.

Iraia saw the creature’s smile of pleasure, of delight even, as he saw what he was fighting. But even as she saw that, she jumped down from the lifeboat and grabbed the sprawled-out Jona, dragging him clear and pulling him into the quiet safety under the suspended craft.

From there, she watched, hugging Jona tight.

The drukhari had smiled so broadly because, twisting around, he had seen that Tangata Manu was as he had been on the floatboard, unclothed save for a loincloth, and armed with no more than his hands and his teeth. Despite the grip on his windpipe, the drukhari made a sound of strangled laughter.

Iraia glanced round, searching for the other Master, the Librarian, but she could see no sign of him.

The drukhari, dangling in the air, made to speak, his voice croaking and ugly under the pressure of the Master’s fingers.

‘A– little– underdressed,’ it gasped.

Then, faster than her eyes could follow, Utakk lashed out with his needle-tipped hand.

The talons scored over the Master’s flesh, but rather than laying open the muscle of his shoulder and chest down to the bone, as Iraia had expected, the strike left only four red score lines from which blood oozed.

For the Master’s skin was embedded with denticles, a thousand, ten thousand, she could not count. Arrayed in patterns around metal ports that broke through his flesh, each tooth was a trophy of a kill set into his living skin as a tally and an armour.

The drukhari’s talons scratched over the denticles, leaving barely a mark.

Seeing the lack of effect of his attack, the drukhari paused. The Master, Tangata Manu, held him up higher, the drukhari’s legs dancing in the air. Iraia saw the strain on the Master’s face, saw his mouth tight-lipped and his eyes as slits into the Void.

The drukhari lashed for his face, the only part of the Chaplain not covered with denticles, but the reach was beyond it. The Master pulled his head back and the talons cut through the air in front of his nose.

The drukhari was beginning to gasp in his attempts to breathe.

He lashed out again and again and again, but each time the blow either glanced off the Master’s armoured skin or fell short of its target on his face.

He struck out again but this time the Master caught the striking arm with his own free hand. He began to twist it, rotating the hanging drukhari so that his other hand was pushed further away from the Master. The drukhari began to flail with his whole body, writhing and twisting, bending into shapes that Iraia would have thought impossible for any boned creature.

Yet still the Master did not release his grip. He tightened it, and she heard the drukhari choke and gasp.

But then, as his struggles became weaker and his writhing less frenzied, Iraia heard a shiver bolt hiss through the air. The splinter shot, fired off in haste, mostly missed its target, but some of the splinters struck into the Master’s side and Tangata Manu staggered.

Vaulting down from the deck above, another of the drukhari appeared, weapon raised and ready to take the second shot that, this time, would shred the Master.

But as it brought its weapon up to bear, and the eyes of the trapped drukhari widened in hope and anticipation, green fire waves flicked up from the deck where it was standing. Looking down, startled, the drukhari saw the maw of some great sea predator rising from the depths, rising up and up until the jaws reached its chest. Then the jaws snapped shut and the shark drew back into the water.

The head and shoulders of the second drukhari dropped wetly onto the deck.

From where he had been standing, hidden in shadows, the Librarian stepped forward, his force staff glimmering with green fire. He looked to Tangata Manu, holding the first drukhari still at arm’s length, the xenos now struggling weakly in his grip.

The eyes of the Masters met. Iraia saw understanding pass between them with no words spoken.

While Tangata Manu continued to hold the drukhari helpless in the air – the strain of it was making beads of sweat break between the denticles that covered his chest and shoulders – the Librarian swiftly went behind the xenos and bound him, hand, leg, foot and arm, with one-way, thin plasteel tie knots, pulling the cords tight so that they cut deeply into the xenos’ flesh where it was exposed. With his legs bound together and his arms pulled behind his back he was rendered completely immobile. At last, Tangata Manu was able to lower the drukhari to the deck and loosen his grip on his throat.

‘You– will– pay– for– this.’

The words were harsh and grating, crow spoken, not the normal silver-tongued speech of the drukhari. The creature, lying helpless on the deck, stared up at the Carcharodons standing over him and fury crimsoned his eyes. Iraia saw that tears of blood were leaking down his cheeks, so great was his rage: the baffled, uncomprehending fury felt by someone that had believed himself in all ways superior to the animals he hunted when the animals turned out to have trapped him.

Tangata Manu bent down and, grabbing the creature’s cheeks with his fingers, forced his mouth open. With his other hand, he pushed a cloth, a none-too-clean cloth, into his mouth, stuffing it further and further in until the xenos began to choke. He then pushed the cloth a step further. The drukhari, eyes wide, stared up at him in shock and surprise. This was not death, this was humiliation. Iraia could see the frustrated rage in the creature’s eyes. This could not be borne.

But the creature was caught. Tangata Manu bent down and picked him up, slinging him over his shoulder as if he were a sack of tubers, while the Librarian, Te Kahurangi, sent a line snaking down over the side of the ship. They were going.

For a moment, Iraia thought of remaining where she was, hidden in the shadows beneath the lifeboat. But then she heard the distant, continuing screams coming from elsewhere in the great vessel. Although some of the drukhari had been disposed of, others were continuing their examinations in pain, apparently unaware as yet of what hunted the hunters. If she remained, Jona might fall prey to one of those creatures again.

As she tried to decide, more of the Masters began to appear, emerging from the darkness as silently as shadows. Some were smeared with dark, over fingers and faces and mouths. They had come at some silent call from Tangata Manu. They were leaving the rest of the passengers and crew of At the Emperor’s Pleasure to the mercy of the drukhari.

‘Aren’t you going to save them?’

The question was uttered before she even knew she was going to speak. The Masters who were lowering the bound and gagged drukhari from the ship did not even deign to glance at her, but Tangata Manu and the Librarian looked over.

They gave no answer, although silence was answer enough.

The Librarian disappeared over the side of the boat, sliding down the line out of sight. That just left Iraia, with Jona, and Tangata Manu.

The Chaplain stood poised, ready to slide down too. But he turned and looked, waiting for them.

Iraia nodded.

‘Jona. Come.’

Taking her son by the hand, she pulled him to the side of the ship and, pointing at the rope, Iraia said, ‘Door.’

‘Door?’

‘Door. Yes.’

But as Jona hesitated, the Librarian reached over the rail and, with one hand, lifted Jona up and over the side. Before Iraia could protest, she felt herself picked up too. Alarmed, she looked round to see the Master himself holding her.

The Carcharodons, with their human cargo, slid smoothly and silently down the rope to where the exfiltration craft – a small, fast, low boat –waited for them. Around, the water seethed with the ocean predators that the Carcharodons had summoned to the feast. Getting onto the boat, Iraia noticed that the floatboards had been attached to the hull of At the Emperor’s Pleasure.

Twenty minutes later, as the boat was nearing the distant and still unaware piquet line of patrolling destroyers and corvettes, the first of the floatboards exploded, setting off a ripple explosion that ripped a rent through the rear bulkheads of the pleasure palace. The escorts, seeing the explosions, abandoned their stations, setting course for the foundering ship.

The Carcharodons, with their captive, sailed silently on to where their star rigger waited, floating on the deep. The first part of the mission was over.

Chapter 8

VOID

It was the tedium that proved intolerable, the endless, numbing boredom. Confined to a featureless cell with no conversation, no window, no diversions and precious little in the way of sustenance, Utakk finally cracked and accepted the invitation that had been written, in execrably formed but nonetheless literate runes on the wall of his cell: Say when you are ready to talk.

The dracon banged on the door of his cell.

Silence.

This whole damned vessel was silent in a way that he had never known before. Even when they brought him that unspeakable gruel that they considered food he could not hear the approach; only when the panel at the bottom of his cell door slid open and the tray was pushed in did he know they were there. But that still did not afford him a glimpse of another living creature, for whoever delivered his rations did so by pushing the tray into his cell with a rod.

Utakk had grabbed the rod, thinking to make of it a weapon, but it was made from paper and another simply replaced it the next time food was delivered to his cell. They did not even remove the dishes afterwards, but left him to sit amid his own filth and detritus. He could count the days of his endless captivity by the number of paper plates stacked in the corner and, what was worse, the toilet was simply a bucket. A bucket that was not emptied. The thought of what he would do when the bucket overflowed was another fear that haunted Utakk as he tried to pass the empty hours.

He had never thought he would miss Commorragh so much. But the City of Dreams and Nightmares offered endless diversions, amusements of every stripe and variety to enable the functionally immortal to endure the passage of the hours and the days, the years and the centuries. There was always something fresh, something new – or if not new, at least a return to an amusement enjoyed so long ago that all memory of it had turned into the same dust as those upon whom the amusement was lavished.

There had, it was true, been times in Commorragh when he had, wishing solitude, betook himself to a lonely tower, there better to commune with his muse and create immortal verse. But it was a tower with a view, a high window that let him look down upon the spires and bastions, the palaces and mansions, the pleasure gardens and the torture gardens (the latter being generally combined) of the Endless City. Inspiration reached up to his lonely tower – Utakk called it his Stronghold of Solitude – from the city below, carried in image and sound and scent. There was a saying among his people: Tired of Commorragh? Time for the scalpel. But Utakk knew well the grotesqueries that were the favoured result of the flesh sculptors’ work. He was far too beautiful to gift his flesh to them for anything beyond a little corrective work. The centuries took their toll and all it took for a scar to sour his beauty was for one of the prey to strike a lucky blow.

Now, his thoughts lingered on the City of Delight with all the fondness of a neophyte remembering his first kill. But memory was no substitute for its real and physical pleasures, and nor was remembrance any replacement for the vital thrill of hearing the appreciation of an audience listening to a recitation of his verse: the rapt silence, the suppressed gasp at a particularly sonorous phrase, the widening of the eyes in surprise as a heard image chimed perfectly with the inchoate longing of the listener. All these were denied him in this endless captivity.

He tried composing verse. Before he began he even had a name for the verse collection: The Ballad of Mon-keigh Gaol. But when he tried to inculcate within himself the exalted state of consciousness that led to the descent of the poetic muse, the blank, featureless walls had closed in upon him and the memory of the choking, the gasping, the sheer ignominy of having that disgusting ball of cloth rammed down his throat recurred and no words would come.

Resist.

He must resist.

Utakk recited the poems he had stored in his mind; he danced, striking poses of such exaggerated perfection that surely even the blank walls must have noticed. But they were silent, and he sank down into an ungainly heap on the floor, for what is a dancer without an audience?

So, in the end, Utakk’s resistance crumbled, and he found himself beating on the cell door, asking for conversation, contact, amusement, diversion, death even, anything to relieve the crushing ennui of his existence in that bare prison cell. As he beat upon the door, his eye wandered to the tale of his long endurance as told by the stacked plates in the corner of his cell, next to the toilet bucket.

Three days. There, no one could say he had not gone beyond the point of any reasonable resistance. Most drukhari, he was sure, would have cracked after twelve hours.

He slapped the plasteel door. The enemy had, in his time of unconsciousness, removed his talons, leaving his fingertips blood-scabbed ruins. They had also removed his armour and his clothes. The armour was a loss, the clothes less so. The appreciation of his own physical perfection had helped him to endure his confinement much longer than would otherwise have been the case. Besides, when the time came for his eventual interview with his captors, they would no doubt be similarly dazzled by the perfection they saw before them, and he could make use of that. For while Utakk knew that he was undoubtedly in a perilous situation, he was even more sure that he would be able to work his way out of danger. After all, he was dealing with mon-keigh, creatures with the evanescence of dayflies. What could they know of the galaxy and its pleasures and its terrors? What could they know of him?

Yes, Utakk would dazzle them with his beauty, stupefy them with his wit, and turn their purpose back upon itself, so that they would serve him instead of their ridiculous – and very ugly in His state of arrested corporeal decay – Emperor.

Let them open the door and he would greet them as a king greets an erring but earnest courtier: gracefully, magnanimously but with a hint of veiled menace.

Utakk knew what he was going to do when finally he met his soon-to-be-erstwhile captors, and as he heard the key turn in the lock, he stepped back from the door and adopted a suitably regal pose to greet them.

The door slid back.

Utakk, whose pose of regal greeting had meant that he was looking up at the ceiling, inclined his head to engage with the captors eye to eye at the same moment that a jet of cold water from a high-pressure hose struck him square in the chest, hurling him back across the cell and pinning him against the far wall, gasping, spluttering, blinded and all but deafened.

The water was a weight, an implacable force pushing him against the bulkhead. Through his water-bleared eyes he saw the poor detritus of his captivity swirl around in the well of his cell; beyond, through the door, he dimly saw the shapes holding the hose that funnelled the water over him.

At last, the water’s pressure eased and stopped.

Utakk slid wetly down the wall and sat, coughing, at the junction of wall and floor, his legs spread out limply in front of him.

Slowly, his vision cleared. Of course, his senses recovered more quickly than he gave away; from his hearing, more protected against the watery onslaught than his sight, he had already learned that three of his captors stood outside the cell. He could hear the doubled rhythm of their hearts, a rhythm that marked them out as different in fundamental ways to the other mon-keigh.

But while they might have two hearts, they still only had one brain, and that was, by nature, inferior to his own. As Utakk lay limp, apparently still recovering, he was already assessing his chances of disabling and overcoming his three captors.

The assessment just as quickly came up negative. The risk was unacceptable and, even worse, the outcome would likely be messy and undignified.

Utakk, dracon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose, thrice winner of the Laurel Crown of the Verse Olympiad, principal dancer of the Corps Diagilevsky, fully intended that his end, when it came, should be one to inspire poetry, song and legend so long as the galaxy endured. Dying in the dirty water of a solitary cell was not such an ending; therefore it would not occur. He willed it otherwise.

Utakk wiped the water from his lips and flicked it away into a corner of the cell. He looked up, his eyes carefully modulated to a clear and almost innocent azure.

‘If you wanted to wash the cell, you merely had to ask.’ The dracon coiled upwards, flowing from his ungainly position with fluid grace. ‘But I will not hold it against you.’ The drukhari sketched the outline of a courtesy, the most minimal of gestures that an aristocrat might make to a peasant who had rendered him some small but appreciable service. ‘For we have been scarce introduced. While form suggests that the hosts should make themselves known to their guest first, I shall introduce myself, that you know whom you are dealing with, and adjust your perspective accordingly.’ The drukhari scanned the three silent, watching faces. They were much alike: broad featured with the paleness of centuries spent sequestered from the light of any sun, imposed upon an underlying hue of brown gold that told the tale of being born under a tropical sky. ‘I am Utakk, poet of the Five Schools, artist supreme and so far beyond your ken that I am willing to forgive your assault upon my form as the result of fear and ignorance on your part.’ The drukhari saw not a flicker of response in the watching faces. ‘I am willing to forgive you,’ he repeated, putting all the silver spin of persuasion into his voice and his face and his form.

The water pinned him back against the wall.

They held him there, writhing helplessly, for what felt like forever, although it could only have been for a minute or so, and then, rather than switch off the water, they slid the door shut again, cutting off the flow.

Utakk sat in the pool on the floor of his cell and stared, unbelieving, at the closed door.

He flung himself at it.

‘Let me out,’ he cried, beating the plasteel with his hands and kicking at it too. ‘Let me out!’

But they did not let him out. They kept him there for another day as he bayed and screamed and cried, as he tried to pull the server of his food through the small feeding panel, as he yelled at them to honour the message on the wall of his cell: Say when you are ready to talk.

They came again the following day. He heard their approach, through the stillness of the ship, three sets of steps approaching. This time, Utakk stood to the side of the door. This time he would not be humiliated as he had been before.

The door slid open.

He remained pressed against the wall next to the door.

He waited.

Outside, it was silent. He could not even hear the double heartbeats he had heard before.

He waited longer. Let one enter, and then he would render upon its flesh such punishment as only a dracon of outraged dignity could inflict upon a mortal.

The door slid shut.

Utakk threw himself at it, hammering on the plasteel.

‘No, no! Come back, come back.’

But through his cries he could hear the steps, walking away, leaving him alone in his terrible solitude.

Anything would be better than that.

When next they came, Utakk waited in full sight of the door as it opened, although his eyes were reduced to slits in anticipation of the coming onslaught.

The water jet pinned him back on the wall. At least this time he kept his mouth shut. But it proved harder to seal his nose; water pushed up his nostrils, choking him and forcing coughs that opened his mouth to the ingress of more water.

The jet stopped.

Utakk slid down the wall, still coughing.

Outside, his three captors waited in watchful silence, the hose pointing at him. One of them, he saw as his sight cleared, was holding a staff that flowed green fire.

Psyker.

Beside the psyker, and standing a little forward, was the one that Utakk understood to be the leader of his gaolers. He it was who had seized him but the drukhari could see no trace of the stripes he had dealt him. Either the cuts were not as deep as he had thought or this creature recovered from injury even faster than he had been led to believe. The third Utakk assessed and dismissed: a lackey, an underling, a soldier under the command of others, of no more interest than a drone apart from the fact that it was he who held the water cannon.

Then, before Utakk could say anything, the door slid shut again, condemning him once more to silence and solitude.

Utakk screamed.

He screamed as he heard them walking away. He screamed as the sound of them disappeared into the stifling silence. He screamed at the silence, into the silence and against the silence, but the silence swallowed his voice and returned him nothing back.

His screams, eventually, died away. In the silence, that awful, overpowering silence, Utakk, dracon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose, began to speak to himself, mumbling songs and poems and fragments of forgotten lullabies from the deep past before the Fall.

He thought of death, of the ease of self-slaughter. But there were no instruments for his killing, nor could he claw out his throat with the blunted instruments of his hands. Besides, in the part of his mind that still clung to some semblance of thought, he knew that such a self-slaughter would be to gift himself to She Who Thirsts, the one who waited outside the fabric of reality for the souls of those whose dark delights had birthed her. Such a fate appalled him, and made him stay his hands. He would wait. He would wait, for they would come back to him, and the next time he would give them no cause to close the door and condemn him to silence.

They must want something from him, for he still lived.

He would give it to them.

The dark layer of rationality that lay over the bubbling insanity of Utakk’s mind smiled at the thought. For in the giving of what they wanted, the dracon would find the key to their desires. And once he knew the heart’s desire, it was only a matter of time before the heart itself would be resting, red and pulsing, in his hand.

So the next time they came, Utakk stood in full view, in the centre of his cell, and he made no move, nor did he say a word, while he waited for the water to be turned upon him.

But seeing him there, they stopped. The water cannon pointed at his chest. Green psychic fire rippled over the length of the force staff, tickling at the deep layers of Utakk’s mind with all the allure of the one temptation that every resident of Commorragh had, perforce, to forswear: the temptation of the warp and its power. For to use such talents that they had by birthright would be to signal to the Unnamed an invitation and a location, a passage into the shimmering contact zone between realities in which they had found a refuge from her overmastering desires.

Utakk waited.

They stood in still silence, watching.

Utakk waited some more.

Still they stood, silent, watching.

Utakk waited longer. But his finger twitched.

They made no move and gave no answer.

‘Aren’t you going to say…’

The water cannon knocked him back onto the bulkhead, pinned him there for a minute, and then released him to the floor. The door slid shut.

Utakk stared at it.

He hit the floor.

He hit the floor again, and again, and again, until he had reduced the bones in his fist to fragments. But at least he felt something.

When next they came, he said nothing. He waited, cradling his injured hand. He waited, and he said nothing.

They looked at him as if he were a beast: impassive, possibly dangerous, but nothing more than an animal. Utakk realised that that was how he regarded the lesser races himself, except for when he was actually killing them, when their souls dying brought some temporary relief to his boredom.

They waited and Utakk waited on them, doing or saying nothing to bring the cannon into play.

Then, the youngest mon-keigh, at some sign invisible to Utakk from his seniors, pointed to the ground.

They wanted Utakk to lie down.

The drukhari carefully acknowledged the direction with the slightest of nods and then, just as carefully, lay face down on the floor.

‘Put your hands behind your back.’

The tone was uncouth and the language coarse, but they were the first words that Utakk had heard in interminable ages of unbearable solitary suffering, and hot tears of joy sprang in his eyes as he hastened to follow the command.

They could speak. They wanted to speak with him.

He was not going to be condemned to an eternity alone.

Utakk saw the feet as they stepped cautiously into his cell. No doubt the others waited outside, weapons trained upon him. But he had no intention of attempting to attack his captors, not now. He just wanted to speak with them.

The mon-keigh worked its way round to the side of him, moving on surprisingly quiet feet given its size and weight. Then, with even more surprising speed, it bound his wrists and arms together. The pain from his mangled hand was bracing rather than debilitating in the present context of solitude-induced ennui.

With his arms tied, the mon-keigh pulled Utakk up onto his feet. The ease with which it did so gave the drukhari some pause. He had probably lost weight during his captivity – the food was certainly not calculated to induce gluttony – but the strength implied by the action suggested that any ideas of disposing of the mon-keigh without a weapon be postponed. But as the mon-keigh pushed Utakk from the cell, the prospect of actually getting out of that hideous space outweighed everything else.

The dracon drank in every detail of his new surroundings. He was in a long corridor, with doors leading off it into cells very similar to the one in which he had been confined. It appeared that these mon-keigh had need of a reasonable number of cells for their prisoners: strange, as he had thought they did not take slaves, unlike his own people. Then, a glance through one open cell door told him the lie of that thought – a suit of the mon-keigh armour stood unoccupied by the bedroll.

These creatures actually lived like that.

The thought appalled Utakk.

Pushed onwards, the drukhari came to a meeting of passageways and was directed right. The passageways themselves were very different from the sharp-edged, angular designs of the Eternal City: these seemed like tunnels through something that hovered on the margins between growth and design. The angles of the junctions suggested design, but the growths that covered the walls were redolent of some slowly growing organism.

The silence of the ship weighed on the drukhari. When he had ridden destroyers and cruisers, the journey had always been made to the accompaniment of music, and conversation, and the background laments and shrieks of slaves being punished for not carrying out a task properly or simply for the diversion of a bored warrior. But this ship moved in absolute silence. Even its mechanisms, the devices that circulated air and extracted poisonous waste products, and the background noise of the engines maintaining the Geller field that allowed it to pass, a bubble of reality, through the roiling chaos of the Sea of Souls, were silent. Utakk, in a life of many experiences, had never walked the corridors of a tomb world and now, he thought, he would not need to. The company, too, was little more forthcoming than the animated skeletons of the necrons.

It was with such thoughts that Utakk occupied himself through the long and undignified march through the bowels of the ship. Then the mon-keigh pushed Utakk into a space that opened out from the corridors leading to it. The drukhari suspected, judging from the blasthead doors that led from this hall, that some of the more sensitive areas of the vessel lay nearby.

But he had no chance to investigate any of the more interesting doors. The mon-keigh pushed him through another small bulkhead door that led up, via a circular stair, to what he presumed were the higher decks of the ship. The stairway wound upwards, the light playing down through it becoming steadily brighter and clearer, as if he were ascending from the deeper levels of the sea towards the surface.

They were.

But it was not the surface of the sea that they emerged into, but a crystal dome, set atop the mon-keigh vessel. The dome was closed, baffles sealing it from whatever was outside.

The mon-keigh escorting Utakk indicated a chair.

Utakk sat down. This was proving less unpleasant than he had expected.

The mon-keigh then tied him into the seat, attaching shackles to his wrists and ankles and a neck collar clearly designed to keep him immobile.

They intended to interrogate him. Utakk schooled his face to show no satisfaction. It would be a straightforward matter to turn these mon-keigh against each other. Their corruption would almost be recompense for the indignities they had forced upon him.

But as he watched, Utakk saw the mon-keigh withdraw from the chamber and the door close behind them.

They were leaving him alone.

Then, the first mechanical sound he had heard in this most silent running of ships: the creak of the baffles beginning to draw back.

Utakk looked wildly back at where the mon-keigh had gone. They were not going to make him look into the warp, were they?

He opened his mouth to call after them, but the first glimpse through the opening shutters served to quell his fears. That was not the immaterium. It was too black, too empty. They must have dropped from the warp and returned to realspace.

Utakk settled back in his chair. There were worse things than being in a dark room looking at the stars.

But as the shutters opened, the drukhari slowly realised that there were no stars. There was nothing. There was nothing at all.

They were showing him the void.

They were showing him to the void.

Was that it? They were putting him in a bowl to look at nothing? Utakk began to laugh. But under the fearful weight of the void, the laugh slowly trailed away into the encompassing silence.

Outside, as the hours passed, Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi heard the silence give way to defiance that slowly trailed back into a long quiet.

Then the sobbing began.

They waited until the sobbing died back to silence.

Then they waited some more.

Utakk was broken.

They would put the drukhari back together as they wanted.

And what they wanted was a guide into the Dark City.

Part 2

Way

Chapter 1

THE DEAD PLANET

Spread into a semicircle formation, their weapons raised and tracking, the Hunt watched in silence as Utakk, dracon to the Kabal of the Pierced Rose, quartered back and forth across the desiccated plain of a nameless planet of a forgotten sun beyond the edges of the galaxy. Behind them, the shuttle craft sat amid the burn marks of its landing, a stream of Chapter-serfs silently unloading crates of ordnance from its cargo bay and stacking them in the manner prescribed by the order’s Rule.

Tangata Manu watched in silence as the drukhari stumbled and shambled over the plain, his dragging feet kicking up little dust devils that sank exhaustedly back to the ground after the xenos had passed. The iron chain, attached to the collar around his neck, hissed through the dust as the xenos moved, its other end in the hand of Brother Folau.

The air was thin and cold, with a dryness that told no rain had fallen on this planet for twice ten thousand years. This was an old world and a tired one, all the rough geological edges of its youth smoothed down by the endless millennia. Utakk had brought them here, promising to find a portal to the webway, one leading them to the Dark City itself. But they had stood in silence for hours now. Behind him, Tangata Manu heard the bustle of the unloading die away to a waiting silence. The Chapter-serfs had finished the preparations. They waited too, enjoying for the moment the biting chill of the air, clean of the ever-present taint of rebreathed atmosphere that was their lot aboard the ship. With naught else for them to do until the drukhari found the portal, Tangata Manu was minded to let them. Anything to draw out this time.

For if the drukhari had spoken falsely, or was unable to find and open the portal, then the brief stay of execution that had been granted Tangata Manu by the Red Wake would finish. He would meet his end upon a forgotten world beyond the edge of the galaxy.

So the Chaplain waited and the only sound over the disappointed rustle of dust raised and then let fall by the wind was the stumbling of the drukhari’s feet and the shuffle of Jona’s movements as he circled, looking for doors. Tangata Manu had brought the son and his mother – their lives endured only as long as his did. To have left them aboard the Nicor would have seen the sanction visited upon them. Besides, after the capture of Utakk and the part they had played in that, Tangata Manu was mindful that the two of them might be of use again.

The waiting, though, was long. And while the brethren, the Hunt, waited in stolid silence, their weapons tracking the drukhari through his perambulations upon the plain, the same was not so for the Librarian, Te Kahurangi. Tangata Manu felt his glance, both physical and psychic, turn upon him ever and again. He wondered how long the Librarian would restrain himself before declaring the mission pointless and the expedition void. Then sentence would be passed and Te Kahurangi would have finally achieved his long-sought aim.

As the time dragged on, the drukhari’s progress became slower. His feet dragged trails in the dust, trails that came into sharper relief as the sun of this lost world, a swollen, exhausted star that cast little light and less heat, began to sink towards the horizon. If Utakk did not find the portal to the webway today, Tangata Manu was not sure if he would get a chance to look for it on the morrow, since the days on this tired world were long, each lasting near a week.

Despite himself, Tangata Manu glanced towards the Librarian, only to see Te Kahurangi looking at him. The Librarian indicated a nearby rock spar that jutted from the plain, the worn-down remnant of some vast outcrop of feldspar that had once dominated the plain. Now, it was little higher than the two Carcharodons who went to stand beside it.

Te Kahurangi pointed to the sun. It was long past its zenith and settling towards the horizon.

Tangata Manu did not need to look at it. He knew that time was running short. He made the sign of release that they might speak and Te Kahurangi signed his assent.

They would talk.

‘This plan is madness,’ said the Librarian.

‘This plan is working,’ said Tangata Manu.

‘In the same way as your other plans. The brethren pay the price, in lives, for your schemes.’

Tangata Manu turned away. He stared out over the plain, to where the drukhari stumbled, searching for trace of a portal in a place without feature. ‘You have my life in your charge now, brother. How long will you give me before you claim it?’

‘You have until the sun sets to find the portal,’ said the Librarian.

‘Then what? You carry out the sentence? Are you that eager to see me dead, brother?’

Te Kahurangi shook his head. ‘You will return to the brethren, that they might see sentence executed.’

‘Then we shall have lost the Glass.’

‘We? You were the one who lost the Glass… brother.’

‘I… I know that.’ Tangata Manu turned his gaze back to the Librarian. ‘The fault is mine. I will pay the price if I fail to carry out the Oath. But the plan is working. We broke him. He will find the portal and open a way for us to the Dark City. There, we shall find the Void Glass and claim it. Give it only a little more time.’

‘How many lives have your plans cost, brother?’

‘That we have come so close to reclaiming the Void Glass is due to my plans. I fail, but another would have failed utterly.’

‘I do not question your ideas, I question their cost. This plan…’ The Librarian looked at Tangata Manu. ‘This plan, even should it work, will cost us dearly.’

‘But for the Glass, the price is surely worth paying?’

Te Kahurangi’s gaze shifted inwards as he thought on the question. ‘I do not know.’ The Librarian looked back to the Chaplain. ‘We do not know. The Void Father charged the Forgotten One with care of the Glass. For thousands of years we kept it safe. But none among us know its purpose, nor why it had to be cast into the Void for all ages. If use or power it had once, none can use it now.’

‘The Forgotten One took the Glass at the behest of the Void Father that it might remain secret. You know too the tales about it: that in uttermost need, we may look into its depths and see answer to our despair.’

‘I have looked into it. All I saw was black glass.’

Tangata Manu sighed. Long ago, he too had stared into its depths and seen only darkness. ‘But why would the Void Father have charged the Forgotten One with its keeping, with Oath and Promise, if it were not something of danger and import?’

‘I would not presume to guess the mind of the Void Father.’ Te Kahurangi looked up at the sky, sliding towards night. ‘Much has changed since the Glass was lost and first you took the Oath. The galaxy is broken, split asunder. Monsters stir and wake. We are stretched, stretched thinner than a hair. A single pull, I fear, might be enough to break us.’

‘All the more reason to find the Glass then.’

Te Kahurangi stared at his brother. Their eyes were both dark, dark as the Void, and each saw the Void in the other’s eyes, for they had spent the silence of their lives in it.

‘You have until nightfall.’ Te Kahurangi walked back to where the four hunters stood, arranged in a semicircle, their bolters still patiently tracking the slow movements of the drukhari.

Tangata Manu stared after his brother, then looked to the position of the sun. It was now no more than two handspans from the horizon. But this planet turned slowly. There was still time. Slowly, the Chaplain walked forward, taking his place in the guard line, and waited. As he waited, he settled his breathing and, deep in his mind, began the Litany of the Lost, going out into the Void.

‘I… am… hungry.’

Tangata Manu emerged from his meditation and stared at the creature.

‘Please.’

The words were thin as the wind of that lonely planet.

Where before the drukhari had been beautiful, the perfection towards which all human beauty aspired but which none among humankind ever attained, now, as a dust-bitter wind scoured the red sands, he was a creature as desiccated as the plain. Utakk’s skin was dry and cracked, his hair lank and thin, his eyes rheumy and watering, milky white where before they had been faceted jewels splintering light with their sharpness. The creature seemed old and worn and beaten, a dog going through its motions for patient but relentless owners. From one who had worn, explicitly, the mantle of a race that had for millennia beyond number held sovereignty over the galaxy, ruling it as gods, Utakk was reduced to a beaten starveling, stumbling and falling into the dust.

Tangata Manu watched as the drukhari scrabbled weakly in a futile effort to get to his feet, whimpering and crying again, ‘You are starving me.’

It was not food he craved. They had fed the xenos well once he had been broken by the mirror of the Void, the great emptiness that encompassed the galaxy’s two hundred and fifty billion stars, the Void that, with its relentless clarity, showed all that looked into it their true nature. First the Void had revealed Utakk’s soul to the creature’s horrified gaze then, to seal his service to them, the Chaplain and the Librarian had drawn his regard away from the Void to focus on ambition – help against the archon to whom he owed allegiance. Should ambition prove insufficient surety of service, they had also implanted into Utakk a small frag grenade, primed to explode at a command from either Tangata Manu or Te Kahurangi.

It was not food he craved. What he needed was food for his soul, a soul that was withering and fading, leeched away by She Who Thirsts. And Tangata Manu well knew that the only food to feed the drukhari’s soul was the soul of another.

The Chaplain looked to Te Kahurangi. The Librarian nodded his reply. The xenos spoke the truth. Te Kahurangi had looked into his soul, pushing aside his fraying defences.

Tangata Manu turned and signed to Brother Hehu. Brother Hehu acknowledged the command and, holstering the bolter that had been trained upon the xenos, turned and made his way towards the shuttle. Among the crates of ordnance and logistics supplies there was also a cage. Hehu signalled two of the Chapter-serfs to pick it up.

Fingers, jointed in so many places they seemed like tentacles, wrapped around the wire as the Chapter-serfs carried the crate over to where the drukhari lay, feebly stirring the dust and, with a final dramatic flourish, dribbling it over his hair. The Carcharodon signalled the serfs to put the cage down some ten feet from Utakk and to unlock it. Brother Hehu leaned down and held out his hand. Nothing emerged. The fingers, still wrapped around the wire, went dark from squeezing the metal. Hehu bent down and reached into the cage, pulling. The wire began to bend inwards. Hehu pulled harder. The wire bent further. Hehu jerked. The wires cut through the fingers holding them, the digits falling down into the dust, as the Carcharodon pulled out the creature, wriggling and squirming and making keening noises of pain and fear. The xenos had the basic vertebrate body structure, with four legs and a head, but with a crest and wattle and a tail continuing from its spine. The creature lashed itself into a frenzy as Brother Hehu carried it closer to the drukhari, but it could do nothing against the implacable strength of the Space Marine.

Seeing the drukhari lying in the dust, the xenos made one final frenzied attempt to escape Hehu’s grip, but the Carcharodon seemed to not even notice the flailing of its limbs, nor its attempts to bite him. For his part, Utakk looked up from where he lay, his eyes blear milk.

‘That?’ he asked, his question a bone whisper in the desert silence. The drukhari turned his head to Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi. ‘That?’ he repeated.

Hehu gave reply by dropping the xenos to the dust beside Utakk. The xenos, released, began immediately to try to scramble away but before it could move more than a few inches it was pinned to the ground, crushed there by the weight of Hehu’s foot, pressing down on its back. The xenos cried out, whimpering as it strove to escape the pressure, but beneath the power armour it was helpless.

The drukhari slowly turned towards the xenos. Utakk looked at it, his face slipping between disgust and desire until, in a sudden convulsive movement, he grasped its head and, pulling himself to the creature, began to feed. The dying of the creature, the pain and panic of the realisation of what was happening to it, fed the drukhari far more than its flesh. Even as Utakk slurped and sucked, his skin firmed, his hair thickened and grew more lustrous, and his eyes, which snapped open as the xenos died, were clear of the milk white that had obscured them. The xenos was left broken on the dust.

Utakk got up, wiping the back of his hand over his mouth.

‘That was disgusting.’

Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi stood beside each other, neither acknowledging the presence of the other, their gaze locked upon the stooping, twisted figure of the drukhari. And as the vitality and soul pain of the xenos replenished him, Utakk stood straighter and taller, regaining something of his lost beauty. His eyes were still hollow and his cheeks sunken, but where before the drukhari had appeared on the point of death through starvation, now it merely looked undernourished, its deprivation adding a certain sallow glamour to its appearance. The drukhari appeared to realise this itself, for in straightening, it smoothed out the wrinkles that had appeared over its skin-tight body suit while adopting, finally, a pose that melded martial readiness with the poise and presence of a dancer upon the stage.

‘But I do feel better for it. I want some more.’

Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi glanced at each other, then back to the drukhari.

‘Ah,’ said Utakk. His eyes skittered from Tangata Manu to Te Kahurangi and back again. ‘I had better continue looking for the portal then.’

The drukhari quartered over the plain once more, stopping every so often to look around, sniffing or squinting, turning a gavotte or declaiming a triplet in the complex rhythms of the terzanechore. All this he did while ignoring the iron collar around his neck. The cold metal was inimical to the older races of the galaxy, and particularly to the aeldari and their dark kin.

Tangata Manu first heard, then felt, the skitter of dust over the plain, blown by the zephyrs of the day’s ending. His shadow, stretching now twice his height, told the tale of the sun’s setting. He turned to see the red orb’s first touch of the horizon.

‘Yes. Of course.’

The Chaplain turned to see Utakk standing triumphantly, poised on point upon his right foot, his left arm raised in the most elegant of curves as if about to unveil a great, covered statue. But there was nothing anywhere near him. Only the endless, featureless plain.

The drukhari, assured of their attention – even the Chapter-serfs had sat up from where they had been huddling against the thin wind in the lee of the shuttle – swept his arm down, chanting a sprung hexameter rhythm while simultaneously and smoothly moving from pointe en dehors to the right. And as he did so, the empty space beside Utakk began to dilate.

Tangata Manu smelled it – the characteristic ozone scent produced when a portal opened or closed, a result of the ionisation of oxygen molecules. The dilation, which had first been little else than a shimmering dot, grew outwards, expanding and, sometimes, contracting, but whenever it threatened to collapse the drukhari’s voice rose and the sprung syllables hooked the portal open with their sound, holding it until the gate stabilised.

‘There!’ The drukhari turned to his audience and swept a bow before suddenly leaping sideways for the portal. Perhaps, when first he had been captured, he might have made the leap. But his captivity had left Utakk weakened. Even fully healthy, he likely would not have escaped the tether chain attached to his collar. In his reduced state, it required the barest flip on the chain by Brother Folau for the drukhari to be upended, his feet flying skywards as his neck was pulled backwards before falling to the ground.

Utakk lay on his back, staring up at the air, then rolled over to look at the advancing Carcharodons.

Tangata Manu signalled Brother Folau and Folau hauled the drukhari to his feet.

‘Was that really necessary?’ asked Utakk.

Tangata Manu walked up to the drukhari. He held up his hand. On the back of his gauntlet was the switch that would detonate the frag grenade implanted into Utakk’s body.

‘Ah, yes. I forgot. Thank you for reminding me.’

The Chaplain looked into the eyes of the drukhari. Utakk attempted to return the stare but the eyes of the Carcharodon were the eyes of the Void: he could not look into the abyss any longer, for the abyss had looked into him. Utakk’s gaze dropped.

‘All right, I did not forget. The signal would not have passed through the portal. But if you had set off that thing out here, there would be no rebirth for me from the vats of the haemonculi: only the glad welcome into the embrace of She Who Waits for me.’ Utakk nodded, as if talking and remonstrating with himself. ‘I will make no such attempt again.’

The drukhari risked a swift look into the face of the Carcharodon. The swirls and patterns of the lines that covered his face seemed, for a moment, to flow, as if leading down into an ocean maelstrom.

‘The door is stable?’ asked Tangata Manu.

‘Until the next precession of the equinoxes,’ said Utakk.

The Carcharodon turned to Brother Folau, who held the drukhari on the end of the iron chain. ‘He is in your charge until we pass through the door. See that he does not escape.’

Brother Folau, still held by the Vow to Silence, signed his acknowledgement of the order. There was nowhere to run on the plain. Only the door.

Tangata Manu looked at Te Kahurangi.

The door was open. Now all they had to do was pass through it.

Chapter 2

THE WEB BETWEEN THE WORLDS

Iraia was trying not to look where they were going. She was trying not to see anything at all. But sometimes her foot would catch – whether it be on a flagstone or a rip in reality she did not, could not, know – and in her stumbling she would look beyond the ambit of her own immediate space and see again where she was, and her mind would quail, trying to sink into itself and away from the impossible things that moved at the edges of sight. Sometimes, they were not even at the edge of sight but right in front of her and she would have to turn aside, following a path up or down, or under or through, or yellow or circle. Some paths were scents, others were dances, yet more were sheer plod, plough down, head down tread. Where the path wandered – and with these paths, the wandering took the form of it becoming something else entirely – Iraia then had to look up from Jona’s hand, clasped tight to her chest, and look to the grey shapes of the Masters. They marched ahead of her, seemingly imperturbable in the face of impossibility and monstrosity alike, and she followed after them, terrified of being left behind and getting lost.

There was no way of telling how long they had been following the Masters – there was neither day nor night in these paths – other than their occasional stops to rest. But amid the impossibilities that surrounded them, Iraia had lost count even of those, stumbling to keep up as they strode on, holding Jona’s hand while striving to ensure that she did not lose the Masters when the path turned from clear way to number sequence, to the falling petals of a flower, to the rising melody of a song.

Iraia, almost falling as the path turned to fractions beneath her feet, caught her fall on a perfume that she grabbed with her free hand. The scent of it, crushed into her fingers, brought a fleeting memory of her childhood on Monterosso, for it was the scent of rose and mandragora.

But while the path itself skewed between the senses and the body, it was still a path, with the inherent logic that came from starting in one place and going to another. On those few occasions when Iraia let her concentration slip and her gaze wander, she would look through the shifting walls of the webway to the shifting worlds it traversed. True, sometimes what she saw, fading in and out of view as if seen through rain or fog, or as fragments of a conversation heard across a crowded room, was reassuringly solid and real: a red plain, like the one in which the drukhari had opened the portal; clouds rushing past of brown and red and purple; a dark, drifting ocean moving beneath the stars. But other times, when she allowed her sight to stray, she looked upon madness made physical. Mountains upturned upon their summits, dripping rocks like blood; flesh fountains churning body parts into new and bizarre combinations; colours exploding into scent and then retreating into sound. And, sometimes, she saw intelligences, minds with bodies that were creations of their insanity, watching her through the thin skein of unreality that separated her from that which was without. Could they see through the wavering skins of being and perceive her? Iraia hoped they could not, but their eyes, their eyes moved, tracking the column as it made its way along the path.

It was as her gaze strayed to a movement of the skein of reality that resembled both a shifting fractal oil film and the climax of a hymn she had heard at prayer that Iraia saw it. Cutting through the music and the fractal, tearing through the veils that hid one branch of the webway from another, was a viciously clawed glove, its fingers syringes that oozed ichors of green and yellow and purple.

Iraia screamed.

She could not help herself, for wielding that glove, and struggling to push its way through the rent in reality that it had cut, was a creature from nightmare: a face sutured and sealed, its mouth stitched shut and its eyes peeled permanently open. Her scream called forth a response from the Carcharodons; a volley of bolter fire rendered the glove and its wearer into strips of flesh and fragments of bone.

But there were others, following fast after the first, heading for the rip in space that had allowed them to see into the hidden path that Utakk was leading the Carcharodons along.

As Iraia scrabbled backwards, pulling Jona with her, away from the approaching horrors and the answering volleys of bolter fire, she heard the Master speaking to the drukhari and by this she knew more than by anything else how dangerous their situation was, for the Master so rarely spoke.

‘They must not follow us. Find an escape.’

With the brothers of the Hunt laying down covering fire, Utakk led the party on through twisting, turning paths, while the Carcharodons fought in silence, orders passed by gesture and signal, the only sound the percussive jolt of bolt-shells striking sparks of dream and splinters of nightmare off the walls of the worlds they walked between.

Iraia felt her back tingling and raw with the fear of some dreadful weapon touching her with agony: she had seen the pain the drukhari visited upon their prey. Ahead, she could hear Utakk protesting that there was no portal from the webway for many miles yet, while Tangata Manu insisted, with all the force of the Masters, that he find one immediately, lest they be overwhelmed amid these tunnels.

Which was when Iraia saw Jona staring at something behind her. Never before had she seen his eyes so focused, so clear. He was looking at something. Something right behind her.

Iraia felt her skin prickle. She did not want to look round. If their death was approaching, she did not want to see the face of that which would take her from Jona. She tried to pull him along but he pushed past her, and she heard Jona chuckle.

No one, not even Jona, would laugh at an approaching drukhari with murder in its eyes and death in its hands.

So Iraia turned to see what was making Jona laugh.

At first, she saw nothing but the shifting webway and the evanescent images of the worlds beyond.

Then, as Jona’s delighted laugh grew louder, it began to shift into place. It had been there all along, but she had not seen it.

It was a door. A door where before there had not been a door but yet a door that had always been there. A door of laughter and humour, both sly and broad, an opening that colluded with those who saw it, whispering to those who saw it that they alone were privy to the joke that saw everyone else pass it by, oblivious.

‘Here.’

But the word was too quiet, lost amid the concussions of bolter fire and the hiss of drukhari projectiles.

Iraia turned and gestured to the Master, who was remonstrating with Utakk. She pointed again. ‘Here!’

The Carcharodon looked to where she pointed. Iraia saw Tangata Manu’s eyes widen a fraction, the darkness of them growing deeper as he saw what she was indicating, before he strode towards her.

‘What is this?’ Tangata Manu asked Utakk. ‘A trap?’

But the drukhari shook his head. ‘I… I am not sure. A portal, certainly, although it is like no portal I have seen before.’ Utakk paused. ‘Maybe… I have heard tell, in whispers and dreams, of a hall, a hall with a thousand columns that some few have found, once, but never again.’

Tangata Manu looked around. They were in danger of being trapped in this section of the webway, forced to make a stand against an unknown number of drukhari with others presumably on their way. At least the door offered a retreat.

The Chaplain signed to Brother Matu to go first through the portal. The Carcharodon, bolter raised and ready, paused at the shifting curtain of light, then disappeared through it. Beyond, to Iraia’s sight, Brother Matu appeared as one transformed: no longer a man but a great predator, reptilian or piscine she could not tell, moving stealthily through the green tendrils of a floating forest. Everything looked different when viewed from the path. Brother Matu disappeared from view for a while as if he had swum into a great forest of swaying kelp. Then the fronds parted and the Carcharodon re-emerged, signalling that the way was clear.

Tangata Manu indicated for Brother Folau to take Utakk through, passing him the iron tether attached to the drukhari’s collar.

That left Te Kahurangi, Tangata Manu, Brother Hehu and Brother Ihu holding the perimeter, and Iraia holding Jona’s hand and wondering why they were not being allowed through to safety. Even as she hunkered down behind the Master, projectiles splashed violet against the door, although the light of the door did something strange to the weapons, turning the drukhari splinter neurotoxins into bursts of discordant music and making the beam weapons splash colour.

But though the remaining Carcharodons were maintaining the perimeter, sending juddering volleys of bolter fire at any xenos that risked emerging into the fire channels of the approaching paths, Iraia still waited with Jona at the door.

In a brief lull, as Te Kahurangi, Brother Hehu and Brother Ihu fell back towards the portal, Iraia moved slightly that Tangata Manu might see her.

She gestured towards the door, for herself and Jona, but the Master shook his head.

So surprised was Iraia by this refusal – what possible use could she and Jona be here? – that she asked, ‘Why?’

The Master, without taking his eyes away from the fire channels, said, ‘He found the door. Maybe it is waiting for him before it closes. We will go through together, last.’

As he spoke, Tangata Manu signalled Brothers Ihu and Hehu through the door.

Sensing the lessening of the firepower ranged against them, the attacking drukhari began to emerge from cover, firing off volleys of splinter rounds at them.

Iraia, sheltering behind the grey bulk of Tangata Manu, realised that Te Kahurangi had retreated so that he was standing shoulder to shoulder with the Master. She saw the Master’s hand sign to the Librarian, the knuckle thumb tap that requested a diversion.

In response, the Librarian’s force staff flared green fire. Iraia’s breath misted as the temperature fell, energy being sucked from the surrounding air by the flaring weapon. Then Te Kahurangi unleashed green fire in waves, like breakers pounding a rock-strewn shore. The advancing line of attackers was burned back, the most eager among them stripped to bone before Iraia’s light-blinded eyes. She saw only a dim shadow of Te Kahurangi slip through the door. But as soon as the Librarian had passed through, Tangata Manu, loosing off a wave of suppressing bolter fire into the regrouping enemy, pulled her and Jona back through the door.

And the door closed.

Where it had been, there was nothing. Not even the lingering smell of ozone that normally accompanied the opening and closing of a portal into the webway.

Iraia looked around. The drukhari had told the truth. They had stepped into a world. And a house. A hall with a thousand columns.

The building – Iraia presumed it was a building although one so vast that she could see no wall – they were in was fluted and columned, the pillars rising to a ceiling so distant she could not tell if the clouds above were painted on the ceiling or real. The pillars themselves, those she had taken for the fronds of an undersea forest, were like trees, rising on slender columns and then branching out to make the ceiling that was also the sky. Iraia squinted through the forest of columns, searching for sign of the enclosing walls, but they were lost behind the pillars. Only hints of light, streaming like fingers through the gaps between the columns, hinted at a sunlit world beyond. But here, the house was scored by scars of sunshine.

Looking down, Iraia saw that the floor was tiled and mosaiced into intricate geometric designs, some of which seemed to disappear into themselves in impossible loops and returning spirals, whereas others snaked off into the distance, pulling further designs into a whole that she somehow sensed but could not see. But in many places it was not possible to see the designs for the piles of blown leaves that clustered in the wind shadows behind columns and in the lee of the other features she now saw: there were doors, many doors, standing alone and unsupported among the columns. Some, she noted, hung askew, others had fallen to the ground, but there were still many that remained upright, waiting for someone to open them.

‘What is this place?’

Iraia turned to see the Master asking the question of Utakk.

The drukhari, now almost back to his pre-capture levels of beauty and bounce, swept an arm wide.

‘Allow me to welcome you to the Hall of a Thousand Columns, the House of Wonder whispered of in dreams and told in poems older than the galaxy.’ Utakk made to bow, his teeth sharp and shining in his smile.

Tangata Manu, bolter raised, circled slowly, watching carefully, while the rest of the Hunt fanned out, taking defensive positions that allowed them to cover the area outside their perimeter while also protecting each other.

‘That did not answer my question, xenos.’

Utakk laughed, and the sound silvered the air. ‘Surely even a mon-keigh may see? It is, as I said, the House of Wonder. From here, doors open to heavens and hells, to worlds and oceans, to airless space and the hearts of stars. Some doors give entry to souls and others to dreams, some to songs and more to colours. Ever wondered what it is like to ride upon a beam of light? There is a door here to that ray. Do you wish to know true love? There is another that will take you to the heart of one seeing his beloved raised in glory and majesty before him.’ The drukhari paused. ‘At least, that is what I have heard tell. The tales also tell that the doors will open to whom they please, taking some to adventure, others to glory, yet others to eternal perdition. Will you step through? You know not what you will find on the other side.’

‘Do others know of this place?’

‘As I say, it hovers at the edge of dream and hides under the lines of poetry. It is known and unknown, suspected and denied. The hall was lost to memory and remembered in song. There are doors here to places that may not otherwise be reached.’

‘To the Dark City?’

‘Ah.’ Utakk held up his finger. ‘That is the curious thing. All roads lead to the Dark City, the City of Dreadful Night, but it is said that from the Hall of a Thousand Columns, no door leads directly there. Yet it is also said that those who wish to will find a way. If we cannot find a door that takes us directly to the Dark City, we shall for sure find a way to a portal that will take us there by another way.’

Tangata Manu indicated the columned hall. ‘Is this a safe place to rest? There are wounds to tend.’

‘It is the only safe place to camp before we get to Commorragh. If you wish to rest, this is the place.’

Iraia saw Tangata Manu glance towards the Hunt. Brother Folau and Brother Hehu were cut and bleeding. And even on the impassive faces of the Masters, the strain of the journey was beginning to show. The webway was no easy place for any human, even those engineered and trained to withstand the stresses of battle and the temptations, subtle and overt, of the heretic, the witch and the alien.

They would all benefit from a rest.

Tangata Manu signed the Hunt to take up sentry positions, then turned to Utakk. ‘We will rest here for one watch. Brother Folau and the other brothers will take turn in guarding you.’

The rest was welcome, particularly as Jona seemed content to simply look at the doors and the columns marching away to infinity.

‘You like this place, Jona?’ Iraia asked him.

Jona did not turn to look at her but, with a smile on his lips, he said, ‘Door.’

‘Lots of doors,’ said Iraia. ‘I’ve never seen so many doors.’ She took Jona’s hand and, pulling him along beside her, went to a column with part of its pedestal scooped out to make a hollow. ‘I’m going to rest here for a bit, Jona,’ Iraia said. ‘Don’t go far.’

‘Door.’

‘Yes, look at the doors.’

With Jona looking around, Iraia curled up in the protecting space at the bottom of the column.

The House of Wonder. That was what the xenos had called it, and although she ordinarily would have put the words spoken by an alien from her mind, in this case they seemed to fit. But who could have made such a place? And for what purpose?

She looked up at Jona, slowly turning in a wondering gyre. He was her house of wonder. She felt the column against her back. It did not have the feel of cold, rough stone. It seemed almost motile, like the tree it resembled, swaying slightly with a wind she did not feel but which moved among the branches that held up the sky.

The Masters, she saw, were split between those on guard and those taking some rest, although the rest appeared to her eyes to be vigorous exercise: smoothly executed patterns of movement punctuated by sudden eruptions of violent action as serrated knives cut through imaginary foes or jabbed fingers put out eyes. But Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi sat silent and motionless, the Chaplain cross-legged, the Librarian squatting upon his heels. Their eyes were open but downcast and their stillness complete.

For Utakk, tethered to Brother Folau, the waiting and the silence was clearly growing intolerable. He attempted to engage Brother Folau in conversation but the Carcharodon, still bound to the Vow, made no reply, and when the drukhari’s conversational gambits grew tiresome Folau jerked the xenos to choking silence.

Although Iraia tried to sleep, she could not settle. The hall was too strange. Giving up the struggle, she rose and, taking Jona’s hand, began to walk, keeping within the protective screen of Carcharodons.

‘How delightfully… maternal.’

Iraia stopped. She glanced at the Masters but the Chaplain and the Librarian remained locked into their silent withdrawal; the Hunt rested in martial drill or took guard, while Brother Folau guarded the drukhari’s tether but made no further effort to stop him speaking.

She turned to the xenos.

Utakk smiled at her. His teeth, through their dazzle, were sharp. ‘I remember you, or rather your delightful, if laconic, son. He lured me to this trap I find myself in. Indeed, thinking on it, you are responsible for the fact that I, Utakk, dracon to the Kabal of the Pierced Rose, laurel-crowned poet, am bound here.’

Without sign of muscle tensing, Utakk leapt at them, needle teeth bared, hands raised into a talon strike. He sought to hook Jona and pull him from her. A month ago, Iraia would have stood transfixed at his transformation from a creature of transcendent beauty to a ravening predator. But in that time she had walked into the great silence of the Convocation of the Masters; she had walked the decks of At the Emperor’s Pleasure; she had stirred the dust of a forgotten world and travelled through the webway.

Having done all these things, Iraia was not the serf she had been before. Seeing the motion flash of the drukhari, and knowing it at once for the revenge it was intended to be, she moved. But rather than stumble backwards in the line of movement of the xenos, Iraia stepped to the side, pulling Jona with her, causing Utakk to try to change direction in mid leap. Utakk tried to twist in flight but he could not alter the momentum of his motion: a single flailing arm reached for Jona but missed, the nails scoring her shoulder instead. In the sudden burst of adrenaline she barely felt the sting of the cuts but pushed back, putting them beyond the reach of a follow-up leap.

But the drukhari had no chance to leap again. Brother Folau snapped the chain tight and Utakk flipped backwards, his head striking the tiled floor where the mosaics made an impossible loop of paradox.

Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi were on their feet. The Chaplain had raised his bolter, and the Librarian’s force staff licked green fire. When they saw the drukhari laid out on the ground though, their stances relaxed. Tangata Manu clipped his bolter back to his belt. The green flames on Te Kahurangi’s force staff flickered to the dull glow that normally lit the weapon from within, hinting at the latent power that it carried.

While the Carcharodons sheathed their weapons, Iraia let go of Jona’s hand and, stepping forward, kicked Utakk in the head.

‘My son used to have nightmares about you. He would wake, screaming your name. But since we saw you, the nightmares have stopped. He can’t tell me why, but I think it’s because in person you’re not so frightening after all.’ Iraia kicked the drukhari again. ‘Just pathetic.’

The Chaplain and the Librarian looked at each other, then back to Iraia. But she had turned away and was calming the frightened Jona, holding both his hands, looking into his face and speaking to him, urgently but quietly. She did not see the Carcharodons approach. She only became aware of them when their shadows were cast over her, blocking out the light that came from beyond the Hall of a Thousand Columns.

Startled, Iraia looked round and saw the faces of the two Carcharodons looking down at her. Sensing her startlement, Jona, so nearly calmed, set to rocking backwards and forwards again. It took all Iraia’s strength to hold his hands down, to stop them from trying to push out his own eyes. Needing to calm Jona, Iraia said without thinking, ‘Can’t you see you’re frightening him? Move back.’

As soon as she had uttered the words, they shocked her. But already Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi were stepping backwards, obeying the command in a protective mother’s voice.

‘Is your son all right?’

The question came from the Master, the Chaplain. Iraia nodded, dumbly, astounded at what she had done and more surprised at its effect.

‘The xenos did not hurt him?’ That question came from the Librarian, whose face was scored with tattoo lines and whose eyes were windows to the Void.

Iraia shook her head, still speechless. But beneath the withdrawing panic, she was beginning to realise that Jona was of more interest to the Masters than she had realised. For him to survive, she knew that she had to impress him further on them.

She took Jona’s hand and held it out to the Masters. ‘He sees doors no one else can see. That might be useful where we are going. He can show you.’

As she offered Jona’s hand to the two Carcharodons, expressions Iraia had never seen before flickered over the faces of the Masters. She saw Te Kahurangi glance at Tangata Manu with a shock of déja vu, as if a deep memory had been summoned from his deeper past; she saw Tangata Manu begin to raise his arms to take Jona’s hand as if saving someone beyond saving, a tearing, cutting yearning for the lost upon his face. Then the Chaplain stopped. He forced his arms down and made to turn away.

But Iraia, stepping forward, put Jona’s hand in his.

She smiled up into his startled face.

‘Call of nature,’ she said, and ducked behind one of the many columns before Tangata Manu could say anything.

Tangata Manu was standing, holding Jona’s hand. Although her son was taller than her now, he looked tiny against the bulk of the Space Marine. Te Kahurangi, standing next to his Void Brother, was looking at the other hand that Jona appeared to be holding out to him. Then, as the brethren stared openly at the scene before them, Te Kahurangi took hold of Jona’s other hand.

With the Carcharodons on either side of him, Jona began walking around the camp and, as he walked, he saw and pointed out doors, doors hidden in plain sight, doors opening out from columns or steeped in shadow, trapdoors in the mosaic on the floor and openings in the fabric of the air.

‘Oh, isn’t that sweet.’ Handclaps, slow and derisory, echoed down the columned hall. ‘Touching. Humanity’s twin aspects, holding hands. Your past and your future. Rather different to how your kind usually interacts – far fewer gunshots. Someone should immortalise it in verse.’ Utakk, sitting up with the red weal still livid around his neck, continued. ‘But who? I know – I will.’

Tangata Manu turned to the drukhari. ‘Continue to mock and I will gag you as I did before.’

‘I stand, well, sit actually, accused of a charge of which I am innocent – not something that happens very often.’

‘Do you understand?’

Utakk sighed. ‘Poetry is wasted on the mon-keigh. Yes, I understand.’

Iraia emerged from behind her pillar and Tangata Manu tried to take Jona to her.

‘Door,’ said Jona, heading in the opposite direction, heedless of the Carcharodon.

‘He is happy with you.’

The Chaplain looked down at the young man holding his hand. Jona had let go of Te Kahurangi’s hand to point ahead.

‘Door,’ he said. Then Jona did something that Iraia had never seen him do before. He repeated the word but, repeating it, turned to look at Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi. He wanted them to see the door too.

‘Door.’

A smile, unfamiliar and unexpected, creased the Librarian’s face. ‘I see it.’

But Tangata Manu released his hand from Jona’s grip and, turning to Iraia, beckoned her over.

‘Take him.’

Before Jona could spoil the moment, Iraia went to him and took his hand.

‘Thank you.’

She looked up and saw the Master looking down at her. Iraia smiled. Tangata Manu nodded and turned away, while all those eyes that had been watching went back to duty or rest. Except for the Librarian. He looked at her, his eyes dark and searching. Iraia saw the green fire of his force staff flare and she felt the feather breath of thought on thought.

+You are a good mother.+

Iraia nodded, unsure how to respond to words spoken within her own mind.

+You have given me back a memory of my own mother that was lost. For that, I am grateful.+

‘You are welcome, Master.’ Iraia answered in spoken words, unsure that Te Kahurangi would hear her thoughts clearly.

+Now rest. We have far to go and we shall have need of you and Jona when we reach journey’s end.+

‘Yes, Master.’ Iraia stared up into the scored and lined face, and a memory flashed through her own mind: of Te Kahurangi denouncing Tangata Manu before the Convocation of the Carcharodons aboard the Nicor. And the thought question was asked before she knew she wished it answered.

Why do you hate the Master?

The Librarian’s eyes narrowed as he stared down at her.

+I do not hate him. He is my brother.+

But aren’t all the Masters brothers to each other?

+I have seen where loyalty to Tangata Manu leads. I have seen what happens to those caught up in his plans.+

His plan is what is keeping Jona alive.

The Librarian stared down at her and his face grew as dark as his eyes.

‘You speak of that of which you have no knowledge.’ Te Kahurangi spoke in sound now; the touch of his thoughts withdrawn from her mind. ‘Only ignorance excuses you. Speak of this no more.’ With that, the Librarian turned and walked away, going to check the piquet line for trace of trouble.

‘Very interesting.’

Iraia turned herself to see Utakk looking up at her.

‘Do tell,’ said the drukhari.

‘I will kick you again,’ said Iraia.

Utakk bared his teeth at her, but Iraia had already turned away. Finding shelter behind one of the columns, she settled down to rest.

Chapter 3

THE HALL OF A THOUSAND COLUMNS

The boy had disturbed him. There was no denying that. Sitting cross-legged, Tangata Manu would normally be able to find the Void within himself and rest there, alive to every instant, observing the quanta of thought and sensation as they bubbled up from the infinite Void within that took its birth from the infinite Void without. But now, try as he might, the Chaplain could not rid himself of the memory of Jona pointing out doors that even he, with his enhanced perceptions, had not seen.

His first, wary thought was that Jona was a psyker. But a glance to Te Kahurangi showed that was not the case. The Librarian, seeing his question, signed that he was monitoring the young man but there was no indication of psychic activity.

Whatever ability enabled Jona to see doors no one else could see, it was not by drawing on the energies of the immaterium.

As Jona had led the Chaplain by the hand around their temporary camp, chirping cheerful cries of ‘Door,’ Tangata Manu, with all his own senses, natural and enhanced, straining to their maximum, had striven to understand how Jona could perceive that which he could not. But it was only now, as he sat cross-legged attempting to find the Void within, that he began to understand. Reviewing the stored perceptual and kinaesthetic memories that were embedded in his memory, Tangata Manu walked through the same route again. But, with the knowledge of where and when Jona would see the doors, he was now able to see the array of subtle clues and markers that the boy perceived. Jona had seen patterns that he had not and, just as importantly, he had seen small changes in existing patterns.

It was as if he saw a landscape as music, a rhythmical and mathematical fugue, in which the doors that no one else saw were obvious.

As Tangata Manu reviewed his memories, he realised that Jona’s eyes were grey. Having not looked, he hadn’t seen that before. The boy’s eyes were the same shade of grey as the armour of the Carcharodons.

Tangata Manu stood up, automatically checking the status of the camp for potential threats or the slackening of sentry discipline. But he saw at once that the brothers on guard were maintaining their concentration. The xenos, guarded by Brother Folau, appeared to the Chaplain’s eyes to be composing poetry – Tangata Manu offered a brief but heartfelt silent prayer to the Void Father that he not have to listen to the finished work – while Jona and Iraia were both sleeping, the son leaning against the mother.

Then he turned to see Te Kahurangi staring at him from where he sat, squatting on his heels, the Librarian’s preferred meditative position.

Tangata Manu nodded to Te Kahurangi and the Librarian unwound himself from the ground, moving upwards like a surging mountain.

It was clear that neither of them could find their customary repose in the Void.

Tangata Manu gestured in a direction, slightly away from the rest of the company, and Te Kahurangi, after a pause, nodded his acceptance. They would walk together, beating the bounds of this strange place, away from ears that might hear.

As they made their way between the pillars and the doors that stood closed or hung ajar or tumbled upon the intricate mosaic of the floor, it seemed that their tread was silent, swallowed by the forest of columns. They remained in sight of the camp as they walked in a rough circle around the perimeter. Te Kahurangi made the sign that, with Tangata Manu’s agreement, would free them temporarily from the strictures of the Vow to Silence. The Chaplain nodded his agreement.

‘This place is like no other that I have seen in the galaxy,’ said Te Kahurangi. ‘Have you seen its ilk?’

‘No,’ said Tangata Manu. ‘Nor have I heard tell of any place like to this.’

‘It seems to me not to be the work of the drukhari, nor of those from whom they sprang.’

‘Have you any sense of its makers?’

The Librarian looked at the Chaplain walking beside him. ‘You would have me employ the power I have?’

Tangata Manu returned his regard. ‘You have been sent to accompany me on this journey against my will. Why should I not ask you to employ your skills for the success of the mission?’

‘You have always looked askance at the gift I was given by the Void Father.’

‘For to me it has seemed more a curse than a gift – to you and to the Chapter.’

‘It is what I have been given. But as to your question, I have already tried. I can sense only the most distant echoes of those who first made this place. It is old. Old beyond anywhere I have known. Older than the city we seek. The drukhari claims to have knowledge of it, but it is not part of their domain – it stands apart, lost.’

‘Is there danger here?’

‘Where is there not danger in this galaxy?’ The Librarian gestured to take in the infinitely receding hall. ‘But the danger here is not that of blade or bolter, nor heresy or witchcraft. It is the danger of forgetting what we are.’

‘We are sons of the Void. We will not forget.’

The Librarian gestured back towards where their little camp was established.

‘From what I saw,’ said Te Kahurangi, ‘you may be reconsidering your plan. I think that is for the best. It was never likely to succeed.’

‘Why do you think I am reconsidering it?’

The Librarian stared at the Chaplain, his dark eyes narrowing. ‘You would still continue with it? Now?’

‘I have made a vow to retrieve the Void Glass. I professed that solemn vow before the Convocation of the Chapter of the Carcharodon Astra, in the name of the Void Father. I can no more go back on it than I can defy the Shade Lord.’

‘He trusts you. The boy trusts you.’

‘There is nothing and no one I would not sacrifice in order to gain back the Void Glass. With it in our possession, we might be able to turn away the tide that threatens to sweep us away. For the moment, I believe our enemies do not truly understand that which they have in their possession. Should they come to that knowledge, then who knows what they will be able to do. Besides that, any consideration is unimportant.’

The Librarian put a hand on the Chaplain’s shoulder, stopping him in his stride. The two Carcharodons turned to face each other.

‘You made such an assertion once before, a long time ago. You were wrong. The circumstances are similar now to those then. You wish for something with all your being and are willing to put aside all considerations and obligations in pursuit of it. Others paid the price before. Will it be the same again?’

The Chaplain’s face darkened. ‘You gave word that you would never speak on that matter again.’

‘I had not thought to see you repeat those actions.’

‘This is not the same.’

‘The circumstances are different but, from what I see, you have changed not one whit from what you were then.’

The Chaplain stared at the Librarian. ‘Before the Void Father, you will retract what you have said or I will call you out upon this before the whole Chapter.’

The Librarian returned the stare, giving neither space nor ground to the Chaplain.

‘You forget yourself, brother. You stand condemned by the Convocation. Death is prescribed you and stands delayed only through the acquiescence of the Shade Lord. You, who are as a dead thing walking, are in no position to call me out.’

‘Until I hear otherwise from the Red Wake, the command of this mission is my prerogative, brother. You will not seek to undermine me, countermand or gainsay me in carrying out this task.’

‘Judging from how this mission is proceeding, I will not need to. You will condemn yourself by your failure – or by your success.’

‘Do you think the Red Wake will be concerned with how I achieve success?’

‘Ordinarily, no. In this case, yes.’

The Chaplain’s shoulders slumped. His gaze fell away from the Librarian. He stared out, without seeing, through the forest of columns into a distance that had no discernible end. Then he looked back to Te Kahurangi.

‘Do you think truly I would do this if there were any other way, brother?’

‘I think the loss of the Void Glass has gnawed at your soul, as it would have gnawed at mine, such that you are not capable to judge what is commensurate with regaining it and what is beyond the pale.’

‘You think what I plan is beyond the pale?’

‘Yes,’ said the Librarian. ‘Yes, I do.’

‘But this is but one life. Does not the Imperium expend thousands, tens of thousands, of lives each day as we attempt to turn back the dark? Would we not give our own lives, without thinking, in service of the Void Father and in fulfilment of our vows? Why is this one life so different?’

The Librarian looked at Tangata Manu and saw the strain in his face as he spoke, and the tremble in the tension of his muscles, and the shadow of the fear of damnation that hung dark in his mind and heart.

‘You do not need me to answer that for you, brother. You need to answer that question yourself, lest your soul fall to the darkness and your spirit be lost.’

Chapter 4

THE CITY OF DREADFUL NIGHT

The city was a painting made life.

The city was a living thing, writhing at that infinitesimal point where pleasure and agony met and merged.

The city was an abomination, a cancer upon the galaxy, consuming everything and everyone brought to it to feed its dark lusts.

The city was a threnody to the desires that had spawned She Who is Not Named, who hunted it, beating upon its defences with her own insatiable lusts.

The city was his home.

Ilu Limnu, archon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose, looked upon Commorragh and in his heart he sighed. There was no sign of that heart sigh upon his face, a face of perfect plane and symmetry, for no one ascended to the status of archon by allowing the workings of his heart to appear on his face. Standing on the pinnacle of the Rose Tower with the attendants and the warriors, the slaves and the supplicants, and all the others of the endless stream of people that waited upon his every word and gesture, Ilu Limnu appeared every inch the supreme archon. But in his heart, he sighed.

Ilu Limnu was weary.

He had lived for centuries beyond his numbering, his life extended and, on a number of occasions, returned to him through the flesh-rearing skills of the haemonculi. He had ascended through the ranks of the kabal by the normal methods: through assassination and murder; through successfully plotting the disgrace and the failure of rivals; through temporary alliances made against more powerful enemies that survived so long as the foe remained undefeated, then were dissolved at the moment of triumph, when the former allies turned upon each other to see who would ascend the next step of the ladder. He had disposed of the previous archon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose by a stratagem so apt that it had become a byword among ambitious dracons throughout the city and its environs: by modifying the perfume of the rose that the archon wore as the badge and emblem of his mastery of the kabal so that it slowly poisoned him.

So he had ascended to mastery and control of the kabal; he had achieved his desire and, for long years, he had revelled in the power it had brought him. The Kabal of the Pierced Rose, by tradition and by his own design, remained largely detached from the ruthless politics of those that sought to either curry favour with Asdrubael Vect, the Supreme Overlord of the Dark City, or to overthrow him. In this, the kabal was served by its position: it stood apart from the main sprawl of Commorragh, separated by tracts of workshops and slave pens and slaughterhouses, and the taboo waste of the Valley of Hinnom. Those who dwelled near the great tower of the Supreme Overlord and the stronghold and power base of his Kabal of the Black Heart, would seldom make the journey so far from the cluster of great towers and sprawling palaces that lay before Vect’s great and terrible throne room. For his part, the Supreme Overlord had summoned Ilu Limnu to his presence only rarely, and then most often on those few occasions when the city entered the crisis of Dysjunction, when the moulded reality of which it was made shifted and splintered, casting down great towers, opening rivers of poison and blood where before there had been avenues and thoroughfares, and threatening to bring down the dark stars of its heaven and throw wide the gates barred against the ravening hordes of the warp, which prowled ever hungry beyond the wards and charms set to prevent their entry.

Other than the chaos of Dysjunction, Asdrubael Vect required, every century or so, some act of devotion, some supplication or humiliation to establish once again the subordinate position of the Pierced Rose to the Black Heart. When the Supreme Overlord had required this of him, Ilu Limnu had swallowed the pride of his soul and the rage of his heart and did what was required of him, whether that be personal abasement or the service of his kabal to some scheme of the Twisted One. In the secret space of his deep mind, that was the name Ilu Limnu gave to Asdrubael Vect. The Twisted One. Flesaur in the tongue of the aeldari. He suspected that Vect would take that name and make of it a badge and an honour, so he spoke it to none. For he was twisted too.

And the twist turned as the years twined, until one night-struck day, as he stood upon the thorn of the Pierced Rose looking out upon the torture parks and the pain sanctuaries that spread in dark swathes of nightshade and hellebore, about the Garden of the Rose, the twist turned itself upon itself. Archon Ilu Limnu looked out upon the warriors and the torturers, the flesh sculptors and the assassins that stood ready to act upon his word and to carry out his every wish. He looked out upon all that he had achieved, at the kabalite warriors assembled and potent, at the long dying of those who had plotted against him or gainsaid his desires, he looked out upon all of this and he knew that he was weary of it. He was weary of it all. The consummation of all desires, be they of the flesh or the mind, be they material or aesthetic, was his.

Along with the powers of life and long dying, Ilu Limnu sculpted living tableaux into the most exquisite representations of the long decline of his people and of their rage against their dying. He wielded brush and blood to create icons that transfixed any unwise enough to look upon them. There they remained, locked into eternal contemplation of his vision of the heart of darkness so that all they could do was murmur, in chorus without end, ‘Please, please,’ their trembling voices dwindling away into the endless labyrinths of the Garden of the Rose.

Archon Ilu Limnu had ascended to power and prestige, to perfection in art and potency in vision. He had done all these things and gloried in them for years beyond his numbering.

But the glory had dimmed.

The diminution was slow at first. A slight lessening of the savour with which he greeted the chained and bound plotter brought before him. A reduction of the satisfaction in achieving the brushstroke that perfectly caught the moment of sudden, dawning despair when an escaping prisoner destined for the arena emerged from the tunnel only to find himself looking up at the spectators banked high, assembled to watch his dying.

At first, he had tried to keep the taste for power, embarking on schemes more secretive and subtle to root out the disloyal among his own kabal and to bring down the more troublesome among his neighbours. But the plotters were, for the most part, poor imitators of his own subtlety and the kabals were inferior, flesh flies to be swatted away rather than rivals. Of rivals, in truth there was only the Black Heart and, in his own heart, Archon Ilu Limnu knew better than to rise against the Twisted One. Of the many dark pleasures he had tasted, self-torture remained the one least to his taste. He would not make himself subject to the horrors that Asdrubael Vect visited upon those who crossed him. In art, he pursued avenues more abstract and more concrete, creating life sculptures from things that had never lived – he even took to shaping imported stone into statues – and making paintings of the strictest geometrical structure from that which least obeyed mathematical rules, living creatures.

But Ilu Limnu had soon realised that these were but refinements on skills he had already perfected: they could no more assuage the gnawing dissatisfaction than he could resign from his position. The climb, Ilu Limnu came to realise, was only one-way, and the fall, terminal.

It was as he sat upon the Thorn Throne that Archon Ilu Limnu realised he would, if he could, take that fall, if it were truly terminal. As the endless succession of supplicants and votaries, of the ambitious and the criminal, of the crafty and the thirsty, presented themselves to him to seek his approbation and patronage, he knew that he was tired past feeling.

What he wanted, alone and pure and uncorrupted, was an ending. An end to the vulpine faces and the lupine stares, an end to the screams, both ecstatic and tortured. An end to the schemes and the plots, the applause and the smiles. An end to everything.

But most of all, an end to his own voice, to the face that stared at him in his carefully sculpted doppelgangers, eagerly learning to mimic his phrase and gesture. An end to his own presence in his own mind.

But death came not so easily to an archon of the Pierced Rose. He had known death, he had known it many times over, only for the flesh sculptors to bring him back from the blood banks and the bone shards they had in their charge. But even should he cancel his resurrection, as he could, there would be no true ending. His soul was forfeit to She Who Thirsts. There, in Her tender, sweet charge, it would persist for eternity.

On a passing day engraved in memory, when the dark stars of Commorragh were occluded and night settled in day upon the city, Archon Ilu Limnu came to know his heart’s sole remaining desire: true death. Not the death of the drukhari, a death postponed for fear of the thirst of She Who Thirsts, but true death.

The true death of the void.

Ilu Limnu wanted to die.

So from that time on, he bent his considerable resources and even more considerable mind to learning how it might be possible for a being such as him to know true death. Many were the arcane practices and obscure tomes that he consulted. In a city where knowledge was power and rumour its currency, news of his quest began slowly to spread through the many scrabblers who bought and sold scraps of information and insight. Whispers, among the desperate and the seeking, told of an archon who sought the means for dealing true death; Ilu Limnu, as skilled in the dark arts of misdirection and misinformation as anyone in Commorragh, let the rumours swirl, the finest of nets to sieve through the lies and truths of the Dark City. For of course, it was true that he sought true death, but the most skilful of lies is that which is closest to the truth: all the supplicants and the seekers, all the rival archons, imagined that he desired the means of giving true death that he might expunge and utterly extinguish some hated rival, destroying their very soul without hope of return. None of the whisperers imagined that the archon sought the secret for himself. Thus they made their way, through the slums and the slave pens, to the great gardens of the Pierced Rose – no doubt many more attempted the journey only to find themselves unwitting inhabitants of those slave pens – and asked for an audience with the archon. Few made it to the Garden of the Rose; fewer still ever saw the Thorn Throne. Of these, only a handful left, empowered to return with that which they had promised.

One of these was named Marek Krayt.

Marek Krayt had first heard it whispered in the den. The den was his home, his sanctuary, the place he returned to when he had some money or some favour to cash in or some knowledge to trade. The den was where it was safe to bouquet, to fall into its golden embrace and leave behind the never-ending strain of the Dark City. The den was where they went, all the stimmheads, to drift through hours and days and, if you were really lucky, weeks.

Coming up from the peace of the bouquet, Marek rolled over, his tongue thick with thirst but his belly shrunken. Beside him, another of the stimmheads, an old and familiar face in the den, smiled in the bouquet’s golden glow. But as Marek, on his hands and knees, coughed mucus onto the blood-smeared floor, he noticed that the smile did not vary, nor the face move with the normal stimm dreams. The coughing fit passing, Marek sat back on his heels and looked more closely at the figure occupying the couch next to him. He passed his hand over the lips. He listened, without touching, as touch might trigger an implant response, and bring the stimmhead flailing and cutting awake, the bouquet wiring into the fight response systems of the stimmhead rather than the pleasure zones to which they had rerouted it.

The bouquet the stimmheads used in the den was mixed in very different proportions to the phial bouquet that the Cult of Strife wore in pretty, jagged vials on wrist or shoulder. But then, it wasn’t meant to pump the taker up to help them win in the arena.

Marek Krayt looked round. No one else was moving. Stimmheads lay in rows upon their couches – chariots, they called them in stimmhead slang – safe for a while from life in the Dark City.

‘You gone to the happy place, Arkaz?’

Arkaz remained locked and immobile, the smile fixed and glassy.

Rocking back, Marek touched Arkaz lightly, ready to roll back out of the way if the sleeper had set a touch trigger response. But Arkaz did not move. His skin was cold. Marek touched finger to throat. Cold too.

Marek Krayt leaned forward and looked into the smiling face.

‘You really have gone to the happy place, Arkaz. Here’s hoping the bouquet keeps you there a long, long time.’

With death, and the cessation of bodily functions, there was nothing to flush the bouquet out. Arkaz would stay in the happy place for as long as it endured in his system. There were some stimmheads in the den who had been dead for a decade but still had enough bouquet in their system to keep them in the happy place. But, eventually, the processes of decay would denature the bouquet, slowly catalysing it into its products. Then She would come for them as She came, in the end, for all the stimmheads who tried to escape the Dark City by dying in the happy place.

Marek proceeded to search Arkaz for anything to sell, trade or otherwise exchange. He slipped the rings off his fingers, except for the large faux diamond on his middle finger that refused to budge – a quick slice with his monomolecular blade removed that. He took out earrings and collected the brooches, gang markers and kabal pins from his clothing, then stripped the clothes from the body; some of that would sell in the slum markets, and as a stimmhead he could not be choosy about where he gained his funds. The body plundered, Marek paused and did a quick visual check on Arkaz. Many stimmheads hid their most valuable possessions in body cavities – emergency stashes, although that always came with the risk of a beatific but swift exit, blackmail picts and recordings (in the Dark City these were normally evidence of a lower-level kabal functionary plotting against his superior) and sometimes surprising quantities of money and jewels.

Marek sighed. It was a dirty job but someone had to do it.

It was in the final cavity that Marek found it. A small tube. Wiping it off on the mattress, Marek put it in with Arkaz’s clothing. He wanted somewhere more private to see what Arkaz was hiding there.

The bouquet haze had worn off completely now. With Arkaz’s belongings bundled up in his arms, and one or two of the nearby stimmheads beginning to stir, Marek decided it was time to head out.

Blinking, he emerged from the den into the bleak, weak light of the twin dark stars of Commorragh. Outside, the thoroughfare was its usual noisy, jagged state: columns of dazed and frightened slaves being whipped down the street to the slave pens and meat markets; weapon smiths and poison pushers opening their storefronts, ready for passing trade; retinues of high-ranking kabalites pushing paths through the throngs with prods and flails and even more lethal instruments; silent columns of robed haemonculi processing to meetings and covens; and the usual street filth of peddlers, mercenaries, down-at-heel xenos, prostitutes, pushers and prophets.

Hugging the spoils of Arkaz’s untimely death to his chest with one hand, while the other hovered ready near his knife, Marek Krayt ducked into the stream, letting it carry him down the way until he spotted the turning he wanted. Pushing past a painted-up courtesan, Marek paused at the entrance of the alleyway, scanning quickly to see if anyone was following, then ducked into the shadows.

It was quieter here, away from the main road, and darker. There were, of course, eyes following him, but Marek raised his hand to make the signal that marked him as having paid his dues for the privilege – some privilege! – of living here, and the hunkered-down enforcers of Retec, the alley king, let him pass without comment. Coming to the entrance to the tenement, Marek pushed the door, stepping carefully past the body lying at the bottom of the stairwell, and made his way upstairs. His room was at the top, up eight flights of increasingly rickety steps. Reaching the door, Marek checked the sentry markers he had left to tell if someone had been in the room while he was out: a hair, stuck with saliva across the hinge; a strip of paper stuck in the door jamb; and the sprinkle of powder on the doorstep. All were in place or unmarked. If anyone had got into his room, they would have had to do so via a climb up the exterior of the tenement.

Unlocking and opening the door, Marek scanned the interior. Since it was a single room, it was not difficult to see everything save for the space directly behind the door. But the window’s markers were also in place: tape across its sill and an unbroken lock on its handle.

All clear. Marek Krayt ducked into the room that was as near to a home as he had in the Dark City, and closed and locked the door behind him. Throwing the detritus of Arkaz’s life into a corner to be disposed of later, Marek sat down, cross-legged, and examined the tube that Arkaz had hidden so carefully.

It appeared to contain something. Marek carefully wiggled it open, then turned it upside down. A little paper parcel fell out, the paper covered with minute, intricately interlocking letters. Marek scanned the writing, then read more closely, his breath beginning to come faster as he unlocked the meaning of what was written there. Then he unwrapped the paper parcel. A small, black shard of glass lay on the paper.

Marek Krayt began to laugh.

‘Oh, Arkaz, you never even knew what you found, did you?’

Perhaps the single most tedious aspect of being dracon to Archon Ilu Limnu, Utakk had once reflected, was interviewing the stream of supplicants that came to the Garden of the Rose seeking audience and advantage. Only those who could actually provide something of genuine worth were allowed through the screening, for which Dracon Utakk provided the final check. Anyone presented to him had already been through interviews and searches and random torture checks before being allowed to present his case. As such, they were usually better specimens than the obvious stimmhead who was now being pushed into Utakk’s palatial suite of offices, pleasure rooms and studios in the Palace of the Pierced Rose.

Utakk paused in his doodling of a new lyric on the skin pad on his desk. The lines of the tedious and the desperate who had been filing into his office had inspired a new work, which he was just finishing off, so the interruption was not welcome.

The dracon flourished his stylus, picking out the line he was working on. He said the final, descending coda softly to himself. ‘…The way to dusty death.’

Satisfied, Utakk put down his stylus and looked up at the waiting stimmhead.

‘I hope you have a good reason to interrupt me in the act of creation. I hope this for your sake as well as for the sake of artistic posterity.’

The stimmhead, who had not been named to the dracon, nodded vigorously.

‘What do you have that is worthy of the attention of the Archon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose, Ilu Limnu himself? For you to have come so far, it must be something that I would not expect to be in the possession of a stimmhead. What is it?’

The stimmhead stuttered a request for permission to show the great and noble dracon what he had brought for the archon.

‘Of course you can. That is what I just asked you to do.’

Marek Krayt took from the pouch he was carrying the shard of black glass and the sheet of tightly written paper and laid them on the desk in front of the dracon.

Utakk looked down at the shard of glass and then up at the stimmhead.

‘What is this?’ he asked.

And the stimmhead answered, ‘A piece of the void.’

Utakk smiled.

‘You will work for me from now on, stimmhead.’ The dracon stood up. ‘I will take this to the archon.’

Archon Ilu Limnu dismissed the bodyguards and the counsellors, the warriors and the wyches, the flesh sculptors and the pain artists, and betook himself to his own private sanctuary, his studio, where he had worked for centuries on paintings and sculptures each more exquisite than the last. But his brushes lay now untouched upon his palette, his chisels were blunt through disuse. The work of making was dry to him now, of no more moment than the random killings of the Under City.

Alone in his studio overlooking the Garden of the Rose, Archon Ilu Limnu walked to the easel on which he had once placed his latest works in progress to best catch the generally feeble light from Commorragh’s dark stars. For years the easel had been empty, but now there was something on it, covered over by a great sable cloth made from the skins of the choicest slaves to be offered for sale in the meat markets of the Dark City.

Dracon Utakk had returned from the ocean world with a gift worthy of the archon to whom he gave it, the parent of the sliver of night that the stimmhead had first brought to him.

Ilu Limnu stood in front of the easel for a while, and then drew back the cover.

Archon Ilu Limnu stared into the void.

And the void stared back.

Chapter 5

THE VALLEY OF HINNOM

‘What is this place?’

Around them, from small pyres, rose up columns of sweet-smelling smoke. Yet it was not the smoke that drew the question from Tangata Manu but what he saw burning in the pyres that littered the valley bottom.

‘Somewhere we will not be bothered,’ answered Utakk, leading them onwards, the iron chain still attached to his collar.

But the horror of what he saw drew the question again from the Chaplain. ‘What is this place?’ Tangata Manu repeated. For amid and beside the ashes of the smouldering pyres were remnants of what had been burnt on them: hands, fingers, toes, sometimes a whole limb or part of a head.

Utakk held his finger to his lips. ‘Later,’ he whispered. ‘When we are safe.’

The valley was empty. Nothing moved in it other than the smoke. Above, through the honey-scented reek, shone the twin dark stars of the City of Dreadful Night, that city to which they had travelled, first through the webway and then, finally, from the House of Wonder, the Hall of a Thousand Columns. Jona had showed them the way from the hall as he had opened the door into it, pointing and saying his single-word refrain over and over again. None of them, not the boy’s mother nor Te Kahurangi, could see what Jona was seeing. But all the other doors were closed to them, or those that would open went only to the hall itself.

So they had gone through the door to find another door, and then another, and another. Always doors, until it seemed that Jona had led them into his obsession: a universe of doors. Jona’s joy at finding each door never diminished, but for the rest of the party, the thrill soon palled, to be replaced by a growing unease, until Tangata Manu had been minded to call a stop and ask of Iraia if she could learn from her son when the doors would finally lead somewhere. Before he could do this, though, the final door opened on this valley and Tangata Manu knew that they had arrived. The door through which they entered dissolved away behind them but when the Chaplain asked Utakk if he knew where they were, the drukhari smiled.

‘This is good,’ he whispered, staring up at the sky, ‘very good. No one will see us in the valley during the day and I have a place not far from here.’

‘Take us there,’ said Tangata Manu.

The Carcharodons spread out in combat patrol formation and Iraia, with Jona holding her hand, followed in the cover of the Chaplain. Utakk led them a short way down the valley and then up to a cave entrance.

As he followed the drukhari, carrying out the customary visual and sensory scans while constantly appraising the surroundings for potential ambush points and exit routes with the surface levels of his mind, Tangata Manu realised deeper down that everything around them filled him with the deepest revulsion, from the crumbled soil that analysis confirmed was in reality the remains of corpses beyond number, to the dead darklight of the twin stars, to the distant threnody of pain that thrummed, a constant subconscious hum, beneath the limits of normal perception. But Tangata Manu could hear the screams that sustained this place.

In his mind, he refused to give it the title of ‘city’.

The drukhari started scrambling up the valley side, the white, chalky dirt crumbling away beneath his feet and hands, until he came to one of the many cave mouths that pockmarked the slopes.

‘In here.’

But Tangata Manu stopped the drukhari going on.

‘Check it,’ he ordered Brother Hehu, while Brother Folau kept hold of the chain round the drukhari’s neck.

‘Don’t you trust me?’ Utakk asked, smiling. The smile showed his teeth. Back in Commorragh, the drukhari was recovering his strength and his arrogance.

Tangata Manu signed to Brother Folau: the barest of finger movements, but enough to convey his command.

The jerk near broke the drukhari’s neck. But Brother Folau knew just how hard to pull. Utakk stared up, eyes blood red and raging, at Tangata Manu.

The Chaplain stared back, eyes Void dark, until Utakk lowered his gaze.

‘Clear.’ Brother Hehu reappeared.

Tangata Manu gestured for the drukhari to stand. Then, with Brother Folau on point and Utakk following with the Chaplain beside him, they went into the hill.

The tunnel twisted and turned back on itself, passing other tunnel entrances but slowly rising. Sconces lined the sides, flaring into life at their approach and then dying back to darkness after they had passed.

‘Just one of the little conveniences we take for granted here in Commorragh,’ said Utakk. Tangata Manu looked at the drukhari but before he could sign him to silence, Utakk went on, ‘You really need not be so on edge. These tunnels are attuned to my presence. Should anyone else attempt to enter them without my permission, they will close upon them with all the weight of a mountain.’

Tangata Manu put his finger on the drukhari’s lips.

‘No more talk.’

He scanned his auspex readings. It was as the drukhari said: they were alone in these tunnels.

After half an hour’s march they came finally to a door blocking the way. It appeared to be made of no more than wood, but the Chaplain’s auspex scan revealed it to be seething with suppressed energy such that if it were released they would all be blown out of the tunnels like shells from a cannon. Tangata Manu turned to Utakk.

‘Can you open it?’

‘Of course. It is my door, the entrance to my storeroom and my hearth, the space that is mine own and no other’s. None know of it.’

The Chaplain looked askance at the dracon. Tangata Manu knew well of the suspicion that ruled among the highest echelons in the Dark City. He doubted that Utakk could have kept such a secret from his archon.

‘To my knowledge, none know of it. Certainly none may enter, for it is coded to my soul. Even should a twin for me be raised from my own genes then the door would not open, for its soul would not be mine.’

Tangata Manu gestured Utakk forward.

‘Shall I open it?’ Utakk asked.

The Chaplain nodded his assent.

So Utakk went to the door and he spoke the word of opening and stood aside so that the Carcharodons could see into the space beyond.

‘Impressed?’

Tangata Manu made no answer. Having scanned the entrance for obvious traps, he signed for Brother Hehu to take the lead. They entered the space in practised sequence, each covering the other as they went in then immediately moving to cover and waiting for the next until the ‘clear’ signal was made back to Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi.

Tangata Manu gestured for the drukhari to enter, then followed.

Utakk had asked if he was impressed. Despite himself, he was. The space was nigh as high as the House of Wonder, although it had walls that were closer, set a hundred yards from the door and making a rough circle back to the door through which they had entered. On the far wall there was another door, far larger than the first. But necessary, Tangata Manu could see, should the day come when Utakk wanted to remove the weapons he had in storage there: Reaver jetbikes and Venoms, Razorwings, Raven Strikes and Voidravens, even a Ravager and a Reaper. And that was beside the stores of splinter rifles and shredders, hellglaives and klaives, dark lances and neurotoxin missiles.

The Chaplain turned to look at the drukhari, who shrugged.

‘Best to be prepared.’

‘Indeed.’ Tangata Manu signed the brothers to make a complete search of the compound and then beckoned Utakk to him. When the drukhari did not immediately respond – he was busy brushing dust from one of the Venoms – Tangata Manu hauled him over, reeling him in on the chain and depositing him on the floor at his feet.

Utakk looked up resentfully, feeling his neck for where the collar had rubbed skin from flesh. But such were the drukhari’s powers of recuperation that Tangata Manu could see the flesh wounds skinning over as he watched. Utakk inspected the blood on his fingers, licked it appreciatively then said, ‘You could have called.’

‘What was that place, the valley of the pyres?’

Utakk got to his feet, brushing the dust from his clothes.

‘That place? It’s called the Valley of Hinnom. What of it?’

The Chaplain stared at the drukhari.

‘Oh, you mean the pyres? Is that what you’re asking about?’ Utakk paused, seeking confirmation in the Carcharodon’s expression, and then continued. ‘It’s where we dispose of the unwanted.’

Tangata Manu blinked.

‘Unwanted?’

‘The unwanted, the unnecessary, the sick, the crippled, the diseased. There’s a lot of detritus in the Dark City and not even the covens want what’s left of a mon-keigh when he’s been working the mines for a couple of years. Think of all the slaves, those defeated in the arena, even those few who get too old. We’ve got to get rid of them somehow. What sustenance can you draw from those already wholly broken? Those for whom there is no market are brought here and disposed of. The pyres keep it all hygienic. Can you imagine the bloodflies that would be breeding here otherwise? Really, it’s a mercy. Who would want to be unwanted on the streets of Commorragh? They’d be meat before you could say, “Supper!” Even so, they only bring them for burning at night-time. That’s why I knew we were safe in the day. I don’t know how the door knew it, but the Valley of Hinnom in daytime is about the safest and quietest place in Commorragh. No one goes there.’

Tangata Manu stared at the drukhari. ‘You burn your old?’

‘What else are we going to do with them? The young too, if they’re not fit. But not the valuable ones, not the innocent. They are useful. None of them get disposed of here – although by the end, they’d probably wish they had been.’ The drukhari looked at the Carcharodon’s taut face. ‘You really are upset, aren’t you?’

Tangata Manu stared at Utakk. The vein in his temple pulsed.

‘But what do you do with your unwanted, with your old and your sick and those too poor to be any use to anybody? Do you care for them? Do you look after them?’

‘We don’t burn them.’

‘Perhaps you should. It would be a cleaner death than the life they are left with. Besides, your Jona would go for a good price to a coven if you weren’t getting me to offer him to the archon. We might even be able to make the exchange you want. The boy is the last of the bloodline the archon has sworn to eradicate: delivering him to Ilu Limnu will allow him to declare the vow fulfilled. Although, if you want my thought, the archon has grown as bored with completing this vow as I have become bored with carrying it out for him. But now, at last, it can be completed. There is value in that. So long as he has not discovered the secret of the glass, I am sure the archon will do the deal. I must say, I can’t see what you’re getting so worked up over.’

Tangata Manu could taste black bile in his mouth. He swallowed convulsively. He felt eyes upon him and saw the Librarian watching them both.

‘Master?’

The Chaplain looked down. Iraia was tugging at his elbow while Jona was inspecting the door with his usual fascination.

‘Master, what does he mean? You can’t mean to sell Jona? Not… not my son. Master?’

Tangata Manu began to answer but no words would come from his mouth. He turned away. She was a Chapter-serf. What business did she have to question him?

But Iraia scuttled round so that she stood in front of him again, looking up into his face. She had pulled Jona with her so that Tangata Manu had to look at him.

‘Master, please. Please say it is not so. Not Jona. You could not be so cruel. I-I thought it was your task, given to you by the Emperor, to protect mankind from the monsters of the Void, not to become monsters yourselves.’

Tangata Manu, voiceless, tried to turn away from her again but Iraia followed him round, tugging at his arm, trying to make him see Jona, trying to get an answer from the Carcharodon.

‘Master, please. Master, answer me.’

Angered almost beyond enduring by her insistence, and by another voice that he refused to entertain, Tangata Manu, Chaplain to the Carcharodons, servant to the Void Father, stood still and looked down at the woman and her son. He looked down and spoke, his voice trembling with the anger that roiled within him, anger that struck at his conscience but found outlet at the woman pricking his heart.

‘How can you importune me thus? You are a serf. I give you the chance to serve the Void Father through sacrifice: I would do no less. This is more than your conduct deserves. You have no leave even to speak to me without permission. You bred your son without leave – you and he live now only by the sufferance of the Shade Lord and through my intercession. I saved you. You and he are mine to do with as I will. Give thanks that he will do a great service to the Void Father – it is more than you deserve.’

Iraia looked up, tears in her eyes, but for the first time she looked at him without fear.

‘Does Jona serve the Emperor by doing this or does he serve you? It was not the Emperor who lost the Glass, it was you.’

Tangata Manu raised his hand. He was not even aware of doing so.

Iraia did not flinch although she must have known well that a blow from the Carcharodon would leave her body broken.

Tangata Manu’s hand trembled, caught between rage and regret.

Te Kahurangi grasped the Chaplain’s wrist, holding it back. ‘Move,’ he said to Iraia, ‘get back.’

But the woman refused to budge.

‘No. Kill me now, if you will, but I will not give Jona up for this thing.’

Tangata Manu strained against the Librarian’s grasp but Te Kahurangi, better balanced, pulled him backwards.

‘Leave her be,’ he said. ‘Leave her be.’

And the Chaplain coiled his rage and stood down. ‘Let me go,’ he said.

The tension released from his body, the warring emotions that drove Tangata Manu’s anger drained away.

‘Are you sure?’ asked Te Kahurangi.

‘Yes.’ Tangata Manu nodded. ‘Yes, I am sure.’

Te Kahurangi let him go and stepped back, cautiously. The Hunt had bolters raised and ranged on him for laying hands on the Chaplain. But still he stood near enough that he might stop Tangata Manu if he should lash out at the woman again.

Iraia stood at the centre of the triangle made up of the Chaplain, the Librarian and the drukhari. She stood among more danger than she had ever faced before and yet she did not seem afraid. She was fighting for her son’s life.

Iraia looked at the Librarian and then back to the Master.

‘I had not understood before why you wanted us to come with you to this place, Master. I had thought, maybe, it was to protect us, for it is true that we live only through your intercession and I thought that if you left us behind then sentence would be carried out on Jona and I. But never, in wake nor dream, did I think you had brought us here that you might give Jona to these…’ she pointed at Utakk, ‘these creatures. How could you? How could you?’

Iraia waited, saying no more, looking from one giant to the other and back again.

‘He will die in the Void Father’s service,’ grated Tangata Manu. His voice softened. ‘As will I.’

But Iraia shook her head. ‘Will you kill me? Then kill me – and look after Jona yourself. You want to trade him? You need me to care for him, to keep him healthy for you to sell.’

Before Tangata Manu could speak again, Te Kahurangi held up his hand. ‘There may be another way.’

The Chaplain looked at him. ‘You were against this from the start, brother. Why should you give me succour? You would have the sentence executed and see me dead. Will that satisfy you?’

‘I would have this boy spared and the Void Glass returned to the Nicor. I would have a weapon against the onrushing dark and a victory in the long retreat. I would have you save the soul you are intent upon destroying, brother. For I am still your elder and I would not lose you, not like this.’

Tangata Manu looked down. ‘What is the way you have in mind?’

‘It is this…’

Chapter 6

THE MESSAGE

Marek Krayt was pulled roughly from the bouquet’s embrace by a cocktail of stimms of such potency that they would probably have got a corpse jumping to its feet and asking what was happening.

Marek, on the other hand, rolled over and fell off the couch, planting his face on the none-too-clean floor.

‘Yeuch.’ There was something on his tongue that he really did not want to identify. He turned his head and saw the boots standing next to him. Slowly, he looked up. Standing over him, with an expression of infinite disgust on his face, was a kabalite warrior. From the markings on his clothes and weapons, he was a warrior of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose.

‘Hello,’ said Marek.

The warrior kicked him.

‘Get up.’

Marek rolled onto his side and then sat up.

‘What do you want?’

The warrior kicked him again. ‘I want you on your feet so that I can get out of this place.’

Marek smiled a twisted, lazy smile up at the warrior. ‘Want some? It’s good…’

The warrior kicked him again. This time in the mouth.

Marek smiled again. Blood leaked from his lips and ran down his chin. ‘All right, I’m coming.’

The warrior turned and stalked away through the rows of couches and the recumbent forms lying upon them. Marek Krayt, shrugging, got to his feet and followed him, pausing to spit blood on his way out. As Marek checked his teeth – for a stimmhead, he had retained a surprising number of them – he thought that a summons from the Kabal of the Pierced Rose might mean some profit for him, some proper profit. That would be just what he needed. He knew his body could not take much more of the abuse and the general lack of food: Marek paid for stimms but only stole food when he remembered to eat. Maybe that was it. A big profit and then into the arms of the golden lady. Marek spotted the couch where Arkaz had gone out, a row over. Of course, the couch itself was now occupied; stimmheads who took the long dive in the den were hoisted on hooks up the walls, gazing down with closed-eye, beatific stares. Marek saw Arkaz and gave him greeting before following the warrior out the door.

No sooner had Marek emerged from the den into the thoroughfare than the warrior seized him by the throat.

‘You’re wanted, stimmhead. Follow and don’t get lost.’

Marek, struggling for breath, gestured for the warrior to let him go. The kabalite dropped him to the floor.

‘Why… why wouldn’t I follow someone as courteous as you?’ said Marek.

The warrior glared down at him, then turned and began to push his way through the crowd. Still feeling his throat, Marek followed.

They made their way along the wide road that led down from High Commorragh, the realm of the duelling archons and their palaces and fortresses, to Low Commorragh, the sprawl of slums, tunnels, slave pens, dens, brothels, stews, rookeries, shooting galleries, flesh sculptors, workshops and torturies that lay under the spires of the High Lords of the Dark City. It was not unknown for even an archon of one of the great kabals to visit Low Commorragh, although always incognito, to sample the pleasures of the low city.

Marek had, in his time, played a small part in the slumming of a denizen of High Commorragh, although never one ranking as high as an archon. Running to catch up with the warrior, Marek grabbed his arm.

The warrior stopped. He looked down at Marek’s hand on his arm. He looked up at Marek. Marek smiled. The warrior slapped him aside and Marek fell down into the churned mud of the road.

‘Don’t… touch… me.’ The warrior was breathing harshly, his breath coming in great jerking heaves.

Then he turned and stalked off.

Marek scrambled to his feet. At least if this present business didn’t turn a profit he’d got a potential in with one of the Dark City’s most powerful kabals.

He set off after the warrior, down into Low Commorragh.

‘Where are you taking me?’

Marek had followed the warrior into the depths of Low Commorragh, regions that he knew far better than any kabalite warrior, but then they had kept going. Through alleys, along sudden, unexpected waste expanses where fires burned, sending up columns of acrid smoke that defied the wind by rising straight into the sky, transitioning through portals obvious, subtle and, Marek suspected, completely undetectable, until they emerged into a quiet valley.

There were fires here too.

But the smoke from them… It was sweet and heavy and cloying to the lungs. Marek knew that sweet smoke: it was the perfume of flesh, burning.

Strange that burning flesh should smell so sweet. It was not as if frying a steak of grox smelt like that – although it had been long since he had tasted fried grox. With animals, the frying meat smelled of smoke and charcoal. But this was honey sweet, as if the fire were burning out the last little bits of good in them.

The warrior looked round.

Marek saw the way his eyes were pulled tight as he scanned their surroundings. Even a mighty kabalite warrior, it seemed, could be disturbed coming here.

For Marek knew all too well where they were.

‘The Valley of Hinnom.’

The warrior coughed as he spoke, the sweet smoke catching in his throat.

‘It’s the smell of roasting flesh,’ said Marek.

At that, the warrior drew his blade and held it to Marek’s throat. The point, slicked down to slice through molecular bonds, pricked blood from the stimmhead’s neck.

Marek stared over the knife into the sweating face of the warrior.

‘Gets to you, doesn’t it? All these burning corpses. Creeped me out too, the first few times I came here. But it’s amazing what people leave behind when they burn bodies. Got some of my stuff here.’

The warrior stared at Marek. ‘You disgust me.’

Marek giggled. ‘Disgust is relative in Commorragh. Besides, the dracon won’t be pleased if you kill me now we’re so close.’

The warrior’s eyes widened.

‘Spend as much time here as I have and you start noticing other visitors, even when they try to keep a low profile. Besides, I’ve done business with the dracon before.’

‘Go on then. You lead the way.’

Marek smiled. ‘This way.’ And he swung up the flank of the Valley of Hinnom to the cave opening hidden by an outjutting chalk extrusion.

Fingers white with chalk, Marek came to the cave mouth and stopped there, waiting for the warrior to catch up.

‘Seeing as how we have been bosom companions these past few hours, I really feel we should introduce ourselves.’

‘I know who you are,’ said the warrior.

‘And I know what you are,’ said Marek, ‘but it would be nice to know your name too.’

‘Vitrek.’

‘Yes…? Your clan name?’

‘Kraytor.’

‘Kraytor? We’re pretty well cousins. How delicious.’

‘Come on. The dracon is waiting for you. I will go first.’

He led Marek down tunnels and up crawlspaces, along ledges and, once, through a sewage outflow that Marek marked in memory to return to at a later date: there were some interesting items among the effluent, he saw, including various severed body parts, some of which appeared to still have their jewellery. But after a while, Vitrek’s progress slowed down. He stopped at junctions, looking one way and then the other, before plunging down one of the passageways. He began to glance behind and around.

‘Not lost, are we?’ asked Marek.

‘Shut up,’ rasped the warrior.

But it was true. The tunnels in the sides of the Valley of Hinnom twisted through rock and portals, moving sometimes as the ground itself shifted through the shuffling dimensions of the webway. Even a marked path might become something else. And this was no marked path, Marek knew, but a secret way to a more secret place.

‘Here, this way.’ The relief was palpable in Vitrek’s voice. He had seen the path he knew and now, conscious of being late, he began jogging down it towards the great door that marked the entrance to Dracon Utakk’s hidden stronghold.

Coming to the door, Vitrek stopped to check that Marek was with him, then made to make his mark on the door. But it opened before he even placed his hand upon it.

Marek looked past the warrior into the darkly lit space beyond. He saw there a shape, dim and waiting, tall and forbidding with the halo of power that surrounded the nobility of High Commorragh.

Vitrek Kraytor stepped forward into the stronghold and, as he did so, an arm, more powerful and heavily armoured than Marek had ever seen before, grabbed him around the throat and, lifting him as the warrior thrashed, snapped him down in a single motion, breaking his neck with a crack.

Marek tried to step backwards. He could not. Something was blocking him. He looked up, slowly, and saw the face of death, whorled and spiralled, gazing down at him with eyes blacker than the black suns of the Dark City.

‘You will take a message to Archon Ilu Limnu in the Garden of the Rose,’ said Dracon Utakk to the stimmhead sitting tied to a pillar in the stronghold. ‘You know where to go, that is how I knew to call on you. You will take this message and, of course, none will listen to you because you are a stimmhead but you will remind them that you served the archon well in the past and that you wish to serve him again. You will not, of course, reach so high as to speak to the archon himself but you will speak to another of his dracons, most probably Samnir Lekryr. You will tell him that there is an organisation that wishes to make contact with the archon, to mutual profit, but by the fact of where their ostensible allegiance lies they cannot make contact directly. Hence, they are working through a trader named Bayle Swannit who has sent you as his first, thoroughly expendable, messenger to the archon.

‘You will tell the dracon that this organisation has a presence in the void and access to many secrets of the void, secrets that they are willing to trade. As surety of their word and the seriousness of their purpose, they offer to give to the archon a gift worthy of his puissance: a sacrificial offering to accomplish his long-purposed vow to extinguish utterly the accursed bloodline he was sworn to expunge from the galaxy. In return, they ask only a trifle, a piece of black glass that the archon has in his collection. You will take this message to the dracon, to the archon himself if the dracon will bring you into his throne room, and tell the dracon that the organisation for which you speak, wishing to remain anonymous, will hand over the gift to representatives of the archon in the Valley of Hinnom at the setting of the suns.’ Utakk looked down at the stimmhead’s bloodied face and his nose wrinkled in disgust. Marek had spiralled even further down into dissolution since the last time he had seen him.

‘Carry out this task and you will have bouquets to keep you happy for a decade.’ The dracon indicated a crate standing nearby with its lid popped open: it was stuffed with stimms, of the highest quality that Marek had ever seen. He could feel his body leaning towards it, even against the restraint of the ropes holding him.

‘That’s all for you if you do what we ask.’

The dracon paused, as if interrogating what he was thinking of saying next, and then spoke. ‘Do you have any questions?’

There was of course one question that loomed above all others for Marek. ‘All of it? All the stimms? For me?’

Looking up at the dracon, Marek saw something that might have seemed impossible: the distaste on his face actually grew deeper.

‘Who else would want it?’

‘Who else?’ Marek laughed, black semi-congealed blood spitting from his mouth. ‘Stimms that good? Half of Low Commorragh will be trying to steal from me, and the other half will be too out of their heads to notice. I’ll need protection.’

‘Buy protection with what you receive.’ Utakk looked down at the stimmhead. ‘Do you have any other questions?’

‘Yes,’ said Marek. ‘What about them?’ He jerked his head towards the waiting, silent, grey-armoured giants. ‘Do I say anything about them?’

‘No. You will not breathe a word about them, do you understand? Not if you want payment.’

‘Sure. I understand.’ Marek licked his lips. ‘You… you couldn’t give me a taster before I go? Just a little something to keep me going?’

‘No.’

‘Thought not. Worth asking though.’ He looked down at the ties binding him to the pillar. ‘You going to let me go, then?’

‘Repeat to me what you are to do.’

‘Go to the Pierced Rose. Speak to a dracon, try to see the archon if possible. Tell them a trader wants to trade on behalf of another party who wishes to remain unidentified. As surety, the trader wants to give the archon a gift: a sacrificial offering to complete his vow. In return, the party wants some black glass from the void. To collect the gift from the trader, they need to come to the Valley of Hinnom at dusk tomorrow. That it?’

Utakk turned away. One of the grey giants stepped forward and Marek, glancing up into the black eyes of its helmet, felt his bowels turn to ice; it was as if the cold beyond the stars were clutching at his insides. The grey giant bent down and cut the ties that held Marek immobile and hauled the stimmhead to his feet.

‘When do I get my stimms?’ Marek called after the dracon.

‘When you have successfully done what you have been told to do,’ said Utakk without turning round.

‘I don’t suppose you actually do have what the archon wants to fulfil his vow?’

‘Ah, but we do.’ Utakk turned to his right and pointed. Marek saw there one of the grey giants standing guard over a woman with a tall young man standing beside her, looking vacantly into space. The woman had a neck collar on, the chain tied to the grey giant’s gauntlet.

‘Oh, you do. That’ll make things easier. I’m a terrible liar.’ Marek grinned. ‘Just show me how to get out of here and I’ll have them at the Valley of Hinnom just when you want them.’

Utakk pointed. ‘He will show you the way.’

One of the grey giants, black eyes cold, stood waiting by the other door to the stronghold.

‘I can really go?’

‘I certainly do not want you to stay.’

Marek, not quite able to believe that he still lived, made his way to the door and the waiting giant. He glanced back, waved, said, ‘Anon,’ and disappeared, the Carcharodon following.

Utakk waited for the stimmhead to move out of hearing. It was not far from that door to a portal path that led to the alleys of the lower city, where Marek would quickly find his bearings. When he knew that the stimmhead had gone, Utakk turned to the silent, watching Carcharodon.

‘He will betray us. Even if he tries to hold silence, the archon will break a creature such as he within minutes of laying eyes on him. Don’t blame me, I tried to warn you.’

But Tangata Manu made no reply. The Carcharodons waited in silence.

Chapter 7

REACHING FOR THE VOID

‘I’ll tell you everything! Everything! Just stop. Please stop. Please…’

‘The creature is ready to speak now, my archon.’ The torturer, one of the best in Ilu Limnu’s employ, stepped back from his charge.

Archon Ilu Limnu, who had been contemplating the patterns of the fall of jarcand blossom upon the mirror pools of the water garden, rose slowly from the mortification of command and advanced across the Hall of Audience to where the torturer awaited him. Finding the torturer’s art unsubtle, Ilu Limnu generally preferred to banish its practitioners to the lower levels of the palace complex, somewhere below the archives, the stores and the abattoirs. However, on this occasion, having seen the creature that Dracon Samnir Lekryr had brought for his attention, the archon had summoned the torturer to the Hall of Audience. It would not take him long to make the creature sing. And now that it was singing, there was, despite the wretch’s evident debasement, clearly something to hear from it.

The Hall of Audience, with the Thorn Throne at its centre, was an indoor garden to match the Garden of the Rose without, but a garden where flowers bloomed as often from flesh as from plant, and the silviculture was underplanted with a boscage of bodies, still living, into faunicultural beds.

Making his way across the hall, Archon Ilu Limnu paused to appreciate a floral sculpture, the topiary carefully detailed to celebrate one of his triumphs: the Explication of the Rationale behind the Conspiracy of the Thirteen Archons of the Lower Ranks and their Subsequent Introduction to the Mysteries of Grafting as Applied to Animal Subjects. At the time, Ilu Limnu recalled, he had been particularly proud of how apposite each punishment was, most pointed of all that of Archon Ugolino, who, set into a lake of ice, gnawed perpetually at the brains of Archon Ruggieri, the betrayer of the betrayers consumed. Ilu Limnu had set their punishments to verse in a recondite language and obscure form suited to the subject; the result was perfect, he acknowledged to himself even now, although the taste for the music of words had slowly drained away from him with life’s savour. Looking at the tableau, he started to murmur the lines in which he had immortalised their punishment.

But before he had finished speaking the couplet, he let the words trail away into silence. The lines were perfect, as they had been when first he composed them, inspired by newly acquired knowledge of archeolinguistics and recurrence patterns in poetic rhythm, but now, speaking them again, they were dust between his teeth, grit and ground noise, devoid of the music with which he knew he had imbued them.

The world was going grey.

Ilu Limnu knew that other archons would arise, plotting and scheming, making alliances and seeking to suborn his subordinates with promises of power; he had seen it all before and he would see it over and over and over again until, attention finally flagging through the enervation of overpowering boredom, he allowed one of these plots to come to fruition. Then the dagger would strike home and the successful pretender would take the Thorn Throne, all the time unaware that he reigned because Ilu Limnu could not rouse himself any longer to defeat his rivals.

Archon Ilu Limnu remembered how he himself had overthrown Archon Ulik Memnu. He remembered the expression of overwhelming relief on Ulik Memnu’s face when he had struck him down, after the long poisoning had weakened him sufficiently that a sudden strike would succeed. At the time, and for lifetimes afterwards, he had interpreted that final glance and the convulsive grasp of his arm by the dying archon as a futile attempt to drag his killer down into the pit with him. But now, he knew better what his predecessor was trying to say as life turned to death in his veins; he had been trying to thank him.

He would, Ilu Limnu realised, thank the usurper who finally prised him off the Thorn Throne too. But the usurper would not value the thanks until he too wished to relinquish it.

Sometimes, Ilu Limnu wondered how the Supreme Overlord could find the energy and the desire to cling to rule after so many millennia in control. He suspected that, ultimately, it was vanity. Asdrubael Vect could never admit that any might best him in the struggle for power, so even weary beneath the weight of centuries, he must still rouse himself to fight and win when any contender rose against him.

But vanity was one of the joys that had become flattened and grey. There were now none left. Not even appreciation of the grotesquery in front of him.

The stimmhead was strung upon the harpsichord. The torturer, standing beside his charge, made abasement as he approached. For his part, the stimmhead was unable to move even an eyelid for the tautness to which the torturer had strung the instrument.

‘My archon.’

The torturer abased himself further, lying prostrate upon the ground beside the harpsichord.

But before Ilu Limnu could permit him to stand, the stimmhead did something that neither torturer nor Archon expected. He spoke.

‘I’d… bow too, but as you can see I’m a bit strung out at the moment.’

The torturer, fearing imminent mortification for himself, struck a discordant note on the keyboard, pulling from the stimmhead the highest notes of screaming pain.

‘I am most deeply sorry, my archon…’ stuttered the torturer over the chord.

But Ilu Limnu held up his hand.

‘G, A flat, B. Chromatic composition is the refuge of a torturer devoid of talent. Play him in the Lydian mode.’

‘Y-yes, my archon.’ The torturer began playing the tortured, wringing the notes and chords of a progression through the advised Lydian mode from the stimmhead, with high screams and low grunts marking the five-octave range of the performance. But for Ilu Limnu, exquisitely skilled in composition and performance, the torturer’s improvisation was both a trial and an incentive. Finally, irritation at a missed modulation caused the archon to signal the torturer to move aside.

Trying to conceal his terror, the torturer gave over the keyboard to the archon, who paused for a passing moment, the final, unresolved chord still resonating through the perfect acoustic of the Hall of Audience. And then Ilu Limnu began to play. Starting from the F sharp, he developed the sketchy theme begun by the torturer, wringing depths of despair and heights of agony from the stimmhead that none present would ever have believed such a wretched subject could produce. But the archon had heard, in Marek’s unexpected response, a capacity for pain that might produce great music: so he made it.

Finally, Ilu Limnu brought the music to its close. The audience, eyes closed, sighed as the final note diminished to silence, before beginning to applaud.

The archon made no move to acknowledge the applause. There was no one listening who could truly appreciate what he had created.

‘The… the way you hinted at the Phrygian before moving… to the Dorian, that was good.’

Ilu Limnu looked up at the instrument.

The stimmhead coughed blood. ‘Really good.’

‘You heard it?’ asked the archon.

The stimmhead coughed again but the archon realised that the cough was an attempt at laughter.

‘Heard it? I was making it. Couldn’t really not hear it.’

Ilu Limnu’s retinue, hovering at a respectful distance, gasped in horror. But, hearing the stimmhead’s reply, the archon smiled. For the first time in decades, Archon Ilu Limnu smiled.

‘Indeed. How could you not? I always suspected that the instrument alone might appreciate the music as much as its composer and now you have confirmed that. For that, I will give you the gift of a swift and painless death.’

The archon began to stand.

But the stimmhead interrupted him.

‘Before I receive your wonderful gift, archon, I would give you one.’

From Ilu Limnu’s entourage came more gasps of horror and high-pitched sniggers of derision. But the archon himself paused and looked with renewed interest at the stimmhead’s taut face, the hooks pulling back his cheeks so that his teeth might be more cleanly plucked by the harpsichord’s plectrum to sound the bone notes that the instrument was known for.

‘What can you give me?’

‘In-information.’

Archon Ilu Limnu waited, poised. The stimmhead stared at him. He couldn’t really do anything else, as his eyelids were pinned open.

‘You-you want me to speak?’

Ilu Limnu inclined his head in gracious acknowledgement of the question.

‘They-they’re setting a trap for you. The dracon, Utakk. I know it’s him, I sold him bouquet before. He’s got mon-keigh giants with him. Grey ones. Black eyes. They told me to get you or a dracon to come to the Valley of Hinnom at dusk tonight, where they would trade a boy you need to complete your vow to extinguish the bloodline…’ The stimmhead began to choke, then gargled bloody froth from his mouth.

Archon Ilu Limnu held up his hand. ‘Enough. Utakk has returned, accompanied by new allies. We shall certainly greet them.’ The archon signalled to his retinue. ‘Release him. He shall take my warriors to the dracon’s lair.’ He turned to go, then paused. ‘Oh, and string the torturer. I shall play my La Marche des Scythes. It will suit him.’

Marek Krayt, reprieved stimmhead, led the silent company of kabalite warriors through the sweet smoke plumes of the Valley of Hinnom to the concealed cave entrance of the dracon’s lair. Despite the recuperative powers of the drukhari body, Marek’s frame ached in every bone, sinew, nerve and muscle: being played on the harpsichord was an education in both the outer and the most intimate reaches of pain. Those that he was directing to the Valley of Hinnom, though, had seemed uninterested in his travails, urging the stimmhead to greater speed when he lagged. In the end, Marek had suggested they simply carry him if they wanted to move more swiftly, as his legs, still recovering from providing bass notes, were barely capable of supporting him, let alone hurrying anywhere. So the warrior assigned to looking after the stimmhead had loaded him onto a Ravager, pushing through to the front of the jostling crowd.

‘The archon must really want the dracon dead,’ said Marek, as the wind of the Dark City, rich with the taint of perfume, fear and blood, whipped past his face. ‘This many warriors, just for him?’

The warrior piloting the Ravager did not even favour the stimmhead with a glance in reply, but Marek did not need confirmation for what he could see with his own eyes: a stream of Reavers and Ravagers searing through the airways above the Dark City towards the darker valley.

‘By the way, my name’s Marek Krayt. If you ever want to really taste the dark, enveloping night, look me up. I can get you the best stuff.’

This time, the warrior looked at him with disgust.

‘Do not speak to me again or I shall make you wish you were never born.’

At the threat, Marek laughed, a hacking, wracking laugh that turned into a blood-specked coughing fit.

‘Do you really think anything you can do would be worse than being strung for the harpsichord and played by the archon?’

And the stimmhead coughed into the face of the warrior, spattering his armour with blood. A different emotion flashed across the warrior’s face before he turned back to piloting the Ravager. That emotion was fear.

Marek had seen it before on the faces and in the aspects of drukhari to whom he offered the golden dark, the passage to the deepest, most forbidden of all the pleasures of the Dark City. For this was a pleasure that required your soul, abandoning all honour, dignity, position, power and ambition. To the eyes of everyone else, the stimmhead was a creature despised and outcast, but the stimmheads had a secret, a secret that everyone who rejected them feared they knew: the peace of the bouquet. The absolute joy of the golden dark. The serenity of it.

It was the one temptation, in a city where every temptation was embraced, that everyone feared.

Marek knew that the kabalite warrior piloting the Ravager with fierce, unblinking concentration, wondered, in some deep space of his mind, what drew the stimmheads to abandon everything else. He was wondering if it was worth it.

‘It is, you know,’ said Marek. ‘It absolutely is worth it.’

The Ravager jerked sharply, turning suddenly ninety degrees to the horizontal, and Marek clutched desperately to a grabhold to keep from falling out. The warrior, faced fixed forwards, just as savagely slewed the craft back level.

‘Got the message.’ Marek looked down at the blur below. They were skimming over the Field of Knives, the razor grass that extruded from one of the vast areas of wasteland that were the result of the last Dysjunction. It was difficult to tell if the grass was living or some form of fast-growing crystal. It flowed and moved with the wind, but any living thing that entered it was cut into slices neater than a haemonculus jointing a slave for vivisection. Marek had no wish to be sliced and diced, not when the biggest stash of stimms he had ever seen lay waiting for him at the other end of the ride.

The warrior gave no sign that he had heard what Marek said, but the ride became more stable: now it was merely its speed that might unseat him. So Marek settled back to enjoy the journey. It had been a long time since he had ridden a Ravager to a fight.

That there would be a fight he had no doubt. Those mon-keigh might be mon-keigh but he had seen how one alone had disposed of Vitrek Kraytor: it would take all the warriors the archon had sent to dispose of the rest of them. Then, when the fighting was over, he would take possession of the stimms and make his excuses and leave.

But how to get it safely home?

Maybe he would have to stash it somewhere in the valley and then return, over the next few days and weeks, to ferry it back. Musing on this delightful conundrum, Marek passed the rest of the journey to the Valley of Hinnom, only emerging from his reverie when the Ravager came to rest. They had arrived.

Or rather, Marek saw, they had come to the ridgeline that sundered the valley from the territory of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose. From here, they were to continue on foot.

Marek paused, looking down into the Valley of Hinnom.

He had not realised before how seriously the Kabal of the Pierced Rose had taken his news. The valley and its environs seethed with warriors. In the lee of the ridge, a squadron of Razorwings was running patrol patterns out of sight of the valley but ready to pursue anyone trying to fly out of Hinnom, while a swarm of Reavers buzzed like searching bloodflies over the slopes. On foot, kabalite warriors had set up positions along the ridge while others were guarding the veiled and hidden portals that allowed ingress to the valley.

‘All this because of me.’ Marek turned to the warrior. ‘There must be near half the kabal here.’

‘It is nothing to do with you,’ said the warrior, and he jerked his hand for Marek to follow. The stimmhead made his way forward to the commander of the craft. It was not often that Marek had had a dracon waiting for him, so he thoroughly enjoyed the mixture of impatience and disgust that shadowed his progress up the echelons of the Pierced Rose.

‘Dracon Samnir Lekryr, I presume?’

The dracon looked askance at Marek Krayt.

‘Yes. How did you know?’

‘A friend of yours told me to expect you. Utakk.’

The dracon smiled. ‘It is a friendship I too wish to renew. Show us the way, little one, and it will be a merry meeting.’

So it was that Marek Krayt led a small army of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose into the tunnels of the Valley of Hinnom. Reinforcements waited outside the tunnel, and further squads were making their way inwards through different tunnel systems that, according to the instruments Samnir Lekryr had employed, led to Utakk’s lair.

The dracon followed after the vanguard, where Marek showed the way to a team of warriors skilled in disarming traps. There were, of course, many such traps, but they were dealt with efficiently, using up less than half of the slaves they had brought along for the purpose. They came at last to the entrance to the dracon’s lair.

Having located the lair, Samnir Lekryr pulled his warriors back. Marek Krayt, of use no longer, was ignored and forgotten. Not that Marek minded: this way, he should be out of the way of the battle when it commenced. He was still close enough to hear the communication between Dracon Samnir Lekryr and his other warriors, learning that the squads he had sent to the rendezvous point were reporting it empty, while those that were approaching from other directions were all now in position.

Of course, they had arrived early for the proposed meeting: it was afternoon, not dusk. The dracon and his mon-keigh allies would be waiting undercover in the lair until the drawing down of the light allowed them to pass out into the open.

Crouching in a hollow, his tongue thick with the dust of its excavation, Marek Krayt listened to the whispered preparations and orders. It seemed that the plan would be to attack simultaneously through every entrance, as well as through several tunnels opened through the substrate with dark lances. Any resistance would be overwhelmed in a welter of firepower and speed.

Sounded like a good plan to Marek, especially seeing as how he was not expected to be involved.

But then, suddenly, Marek was pulled from the little hollow he had found by the kabalite warrior who had flown him to the Valley of Hinnom. The warrior smiled at him. ‘Didn’t want you to miss the fun,’ he said, grabbing Marek’s arm and pulling him forward.

‘You know, this isn’t really my sort of thing,’ said Marek. ‘I’m more of a lover than a fighter.’ But the warrior wasn’t listening. The exquisite anticipation of death was sending waves of trembles through his body. Only the climactic release of battle could expend the accumulating tension. Marek could see it in all the waiting warriors.

The stimmhead sighed. ‘At least give me a weapon,’ he said.

The warrior glared at him. His teeth were sharpened to points. ‘Such as you are not worthy of weapons.’

Marek grinned back.

‘I’ll use my teeth then.’

The signal came: attack in ten seconds. Marek counted them down in beats of his heart.

‘Five… four… three… two… one.’

Dark lances dissolved the doors of the dracon’s lair.

The warriors of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose followed in their wake, sweeping in through the yawning gaps and twisting out immediately to find space and movement before the defenders could recover from the shock.

Beside Marek, the warrior, suddenly heedless of the stimmhead’s presence, joined the rush, sweeping into the lair.

But the instincts that had kept Marek alive far longer than most in his position had kicked in. Even as the warriors rushed past him, and without any conscious thought on his part, Marek was pushing backwards, his legs taking him back, back, back, into the nearest hiding place he could find. Scrambling into a hole, Marek pulled himself into a small pocket of the webway. Without thought, he curled himself up into as tight a ball as his abused body could endure, hands pressed tight over eyes and ears.

The trap that was set in the dracon’s lair, the trap that Marek had sensed, sent the souls of all the drukhari caught within its flare screaming into the welcome of She Who Thirsts. The soulburst drained the life spark from the attackers, leaving them flesh puppets with cut strings, flopping upon the floor. Even within his hiding place, Marek could feel the shock of their terror as they apprehended what waited for them: damnation for the damned.

Marek’s fear slowly leached down into cautious hope, then became relief, then became a big, glorious, encompassing laugh, a laugh of life, a laugh of triumph, a laugh of release. With the psychic shock slowly dissipating, he could leave his refuge, pick up as much of the stimms as he could carry, and be out of there before anyone even realised he had survived.

Win, win, win.

Then Marek felt, more than heard, deep in his lungs and bones and blood, the rumble of the string of carefully planted explosive charges that the Carcharodons had left, implanted into the slope of the Valley of Hinnom.

And the hill collapsed down into the void at its heart, burying beneath itself a screaming stimmhead and the soul-sucked corpses of half the warriors of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose.

Chapter 8

THE GARDEN OF THE ROSE

The Palace of the Pierced Rose lay like a beautiful, jagged crystal flower in the centre of the Garden of the Rose. Tangata Manu, who had seen much that was strange beyond imagining and some things that were wonderful, still would not have believed that such a building could exist if he were not looking at it with eyes supplemented by auspex readings that confirmed it was no illusion. The palace was a rose of black crystal, rising from the centre of the garden on a stalk that appeared slender as a reed yet, rising half a mile high, must have been as wide as the Mako, even the Nicor. From the stem, angled out over the garden, leaf and stalk carried the lesser chambers of the palace, the auditoria, the lesser galleries, the quarters for the outer circle of the kabal. But rising from the stem was the rose itself, perfect, many petalled, its surfaces as richly lustrous as the finest bloom.

Tangata Manu’s nose twitched.

It even smelled. The palace was perfumed.

He wrenched his contemplation from the palace to its weapons. From their vantage point, concealed behind one of the ridges of topography that made the great amphitheatre in which the Garden of the Rose lay, the Carcharodons could observe the visible guards and sentries, the semi-sentient carnivorous plants interspersed with the most beautiful flowers to be found in the galaxy, and the fixed splinter gun emplacements and dark lance towers that defended the palace. Even after so many had been lost in the Valley of Hinnom, the stronghold of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose was still heavily defended.

Tangata Manu looked to Te Kahurangi beside him. The Librarian, seeing the Chaplain’s glance, signalled his readiness. They were under the Vow, bringing the silence of the Void to the heart of battle.

But the plan that he had worked out with the Librarian called for a change to the normal rule of battle of his order, which usually required immediately closing with the enemy that they be overwhelmed and destroyed through sheer aggression. Here, the mission objective was to retrieve the Void Glass: this took priority over the destruction of the foe. The aim was to extract the Void Glass from the palace by stealth.

Such a tactic spoke against all their instincts as warriors, as Space Marines and most particularly as Carcharodons, Hunters of the Void, predators of the deep. But, sometimes, even the apex predator must employ stealth and leave in silence, its prey caught. That is what they hoped to do here.

Tangata Manu looked to the drukhari. To prevent Utakk’s compulsive talk and to ensure he could not give warning to his kabal, he was gagged. In truth, the silence was a blessed relief. Tangata Manu realised just how much the creature’s talk grated upon his soul.

He made a spiritual note to inquire into this insight. As a son of the Void Father and Chaplain to silent brethren, Tangata Manu knew that he should not be so affected by the idle chatter of a vain and fleeting world – and the drukhari, for all their accomplishments, were vain to a fault – but Utakk’s stream of talk had unsettled the deep silence of his soul. He hoped it was no more than a ripple upon a lake that would pass with the descent of the stone into the depths, but even so, Tangata Manu felt that it required the Examen when the possibility arose.

Once they were inside the palace, he was going to have to remove the gag from the drukhari. His aid in directing them to the Void Glass would be invaluable – but accepting it was a calculated risk. While exposing Utakk to the Void had initially broken him, now that he was back in the Dark City his spirit was recovering. With suffering suffusing the ground they walked on and the air they breathed, the drukhari had revived: his skin had lost its unhealthy pallor and was now sheened with the shimmer-silver that gave him his ethereal beauty. His very motion spoke of his renewed vigour.

Such vigour could too easily be translated into betrayal if Utakk thought he could survive the attempt.

So before embarking on this final stage of his plan, the Chaplain had taken Utakk aside and, despite his revulsion at having to speak with a xenos, explained to the drukhari the personal advantages that would accrue to him if he cooperated with them, as well as the consequences of betrayal. The frag grenade that had been inserted next to the xenos’ spine was still in place, and Tangata Manu still had the detonator.

As for the advantages, Tangata Manu pointed out that even if the archon personally survived, the loss of prestige would leave Ilu Limnu vulnerable to overthrow – and as the dracon’s rivals would be leading the expedition to the cave, then Utakk would be best placed to replace the archon.

The dracon had remained impassive through the Chaplain’s explanation but Tangata Manu, alive to the subtlest of physical manifestations, noted that the pulse, visible to his enhanced sight at the xenos’ temple, initially accelerated before a deepening of the breath cycle told him that the drukhari was consciously acting to control his heartbeat. The creature was excited at the prospect and, behind its silver eyes, was calculating the odds.

Tangata Manu held up his hand. The detonator was wired to his bioreadings.

‘If I die, it explodes. If I lose this arm, it explodes. If you lead us to the Void Glass, you live.’ He said no more.

The drukhari, for once, kept silent. He merely nodded. And, from this more than anything else, Tangata Manu believed that Utakk would keep his side of their bargain: he would lead them to the Void Glass and then to a portal out of the Palace of the Pierced Rose.

As he looked at Utakk, Tangata Manu reflected that it was likely to be some time before he had the time for the Examen. When the time came, he would have to consider whether it was justified to kill an enemy who had faithfully carried out his side of a deal.

But the Chaplain had no intention of allowing a drukhari who had been part of their counsels to live. He presumed the xenos knew that; treachery was ever the way with his kin, why would he not expect it from his enemies? But both would continue with the fiction until the time came for honesty.

Tangata Manu knew that there was nothing more honest than death.

Leaving the drukhari gagged, the Chaplain went to check the readiness of the Hunt.

Although they were all skilled Void Brothers, none had the years of experience that he commanded. So the Chaplain went to each of them in turn, where they lay in concealment, and checked through their equipment, their weapons and finally, and most importantly, their spiritual readiness, making the Litany of the Void with each of them through their language of sign and gesture. Brother Folau was first, followed by brothers Hehu, Ihu and Matu in turn. The Chaplain tapped out the name on gauntlet and bolter and blade, and the brother answered by sign:

Void Father, intercede for us.

Lord of Silence, intercede for us.

Source of All, intercede for us.

Forgotten One, intercede for us.

Wandering Ancients, intercede for us.

The Litany of the Void complete, the Chaplain looked over to Iraia and Jona. He was still unsure what to do with them. The obvious option was for them to stay at the fallback position, but something, some intuition or premonition, nagged at him that they had a part to play yet in determining the success or failure of the Hunt. The Chaplain stared at Jona. The boy – the young man, really, but to the Chaplain he seemed a boy in all but size – was sitting beside his mother, rocking gently back and forth, mouthing his one-word litany of delight and discovery. He had been quiet during their passage through these quiet reaches of the Dark City but he had kept up the constant murmur of his comfort word, the sound low enough for the Chaplain to allow it to continue.

Iraia, sensing the Chaplain’s regard, looked up and saw him. For a moment she met his dark gaze before she lowered her eyes again. Tangata Manu saw how she held Jona’s hand, studying it with all the care of a mother with a newborn. She was, he realised, committing Jona’s touch, the feel and smell and sensation of him, to memory.

It was the action of one who feared she might soon lose her son.

It was the truth. Even should they survive the mission and return safely to the Mako, the sentence could not be indefinitely delayed once the mission was over. The Rule brooked no exceptions and permitted no mercy: the products of unsanctioned births must be exposed to the Void with the mother.

Looking at her, head bent over her son’s hand, Tangata Manu was suddenly struck by a question he had not thought to ask.

Going to Iraia, the Chaplain stood over her. Jona gave no sign that he found the Carcharodon’s presence a worry or a threat, but Tangata Manu could see the muscles in Iraia’s neck cord and stiffen under his inspection.

Finally, she looked up.

‘Master?’

‘How were you not discovered when you gave birth to Jona?’

‘I… I made no sound, Master.’

A memory of a long-destroyed world came to Tangata Manu’s mind. A child, listening to the screams and cries of his mother, and being told, for he was old enough to know, that she screamed like that to bring new life into the world.

Tangata Manu had heard many screams through the long years of his life, but none like those of his mother. She had been a brave and stoical woman.

‘You gave birth in silence?’

‘I-I had to, Master. I bit on a strip of leather.’

Tangata Manu stared down at the woman. A Chapter-serf, taken from the ruins of Monterosso.

He nodded and turned away. There was little enough time for Iraia to spend with her son. Taking them into the palace would only place them in more danger. Perhaps he should let them stay here at the fallback point, with the Librarian.

‘Let them come.’

Tangata Manu turned and saw Te Kahurangi. He was indicating Iraia and Jona. ‘They are part of this.’

That settled the matter for Tangata Manu.

‘Jona has opened the door for the Hunt. The Hunt will go through it.’ The Chaplain spoke now to the Librarian. ‘You will remain here with Iraia and Jona and guard our fallback. The Hunt shall finish the Hunt.’

The brothers locked eyes, dark on darkness, Void to Void. The Librarian’s force staff flared green fire. Around them, the Hunt stood poised, watchful and tense, waiting on the confrontation.

Then the drukhari coughed. He coughed again, pointing at his gag. From the colour he was turning, and the jagged movements of his ribcage, Tangata Manu realised Utakk was choking. Turning from the confrontation, he signed Brother Folau to remove the gag.

Utakk, the restraining gag gone, looked to the Chaplain and the Librarian.

‘The door will open very soon,’ he said. ‘It may not remain open for long. Don’t you want to go through it?’

Tangata Manu glanced at the Librarian. After the briefest of hesitations, the Librarian nodded his agreement. The door that Utakk had proposed to them opened only under certain strict conditions, of time and place, of rhythm and calendar, of the fall of light and the writhings of the webway. Utakk was exquisitely aware of these subtle variations, and he had made use of them to gain access to parts of the Palace of the Pierced Rose that were hidden to anyone save the archon. While some of them, he had explained, were probably emergency exits for the archon, others were certainly not known to him, for they depended upon confluences of circumstances and time that none might predict: you could only feel them. And only a supreme poet, as Utakk pointed out, could be sufficiently aware of these apparently tiny variations to open doors that were otherwise hidden. One such door was on this ridge, overlooking the palace, and Utakk proposed to take them through it.

‘When the door opens you will take us through,’ said Tangata Manu, ‘and on the door’s other side, we will destroy our enemies and reclaim that which is ours.’

‘What about my enemies?’ asked Utakk.

‘As long as they are our enemies, they will die.’

The drukhari smiled. Such a smile only a drukhari might make, for to the drukhari, all the other races of the galaxy were merely prey; only their own race could truly be enemies.

‘This way,’ said Utakk, and he gestured towards a small dell in the side of the slope, marked with the tumbledown remains of an abandoned shrine. Tangata Manu, seeing it, was surprised, for the drukhari held even their own pantheon in contempt as being beneath them. But then he saw that the gods that had once been called upon there belonged to one of the many xenos that found themselves unwillingly resident in the Dark City: a hasty, crudely assembled shrine put up by slaves calling for deliverance from a fate worse than any hell their cults might have conceived. But the idols had toppled, the altar had fallen, the gods had not answered the supplications of their worshippers, and the shrine had been abandoned as those who had built it had been chopped up in the eternal soul grinder of Commorragh.

But what better place for a door? Tangata Manu appreciated the wit that concealed one in such a place, for the drukhari would ignore a shrine to gods that they condescended to.

Now Utakk, standing among the fallen statues and in front of the broken altar, raised his hands in arcane signs, chanted fragments of lyrics from tongues forgotten, and wrote strange sigils in the dust. He paused, looking significantly at the space behind the altar. But the door did not open.

The drukhari waited a while longer. Then, carefully not looking round at the waiting Carcharodons, he went through the sequence again, stopping on the long-drawn breath of a dying sibilant. But the sssss died into the background hiss of the Dark City that was the sound of distant agony, drifting over Commorragh from its high spires to its dark deeps.

This time, Utakk could not help himself. He glanced round at the watching, waiting audience.

‘I… I…’ he began. He stopped. The black Void eyes stared at him. ‘Let me try again, this sort of door is very complicated and getting even one small element wrong will prevent it from opening.’

Tangata Manu gave the briefest of nods in acknowledgement. Already, he was beginning to run alternative plans of action through his mind, from calling off the mission entirely through to infiltrating the palace more directly by passing through the garden that he had observed from the surveillance point. But the chances of getting through there without being detected were, he knew, small, so he was already calculating the odds of an assault, with surprise on their side and a large fraction of the defending forces absent, when Jona laughed.

Tangata Manu looked at him. Had such a laugh been heard here in all the millennia of the Dark City’s existence as it had grown, cancer-like, in the membrane that separated reality from unreality? It was as if the whole of Commorragh, not its inhabitants but its corporeal and phenomenal being, a being that floated on the back of other realities as oil upon water, bent towards the source of that bubbling, joyous laugh.

Jona was looking at something that only he could see.

‘Door!’ said Jona delightedly.

Although the boy did not point to what he saw, Tangata Manu realised that he was beginning to perceive what Jona could see. A glance, to the Librarian, to the drukhari, to the Hunt, showed that they too were now seeing what Jona saw.

It was, indeed, a door.

‘Ah, well there you are then,’ said Utakk. ‘It just took a bit longer to find than I had anticipated.’

And striding to the door, the drukhari opened it.

But the Chaplain looked to Jona and knew that it was the boy who had found the door, as he had found the way into the Hall of a Thousand Columns. A glance at Te Kahurangi showed that the Librarian understood that too, and its implications. Although the Librarian had found no signs that Jona was a latent psyker, should they succeed in the mission and escape the Dark City, then the Black Ships would want to examine the young man.

A clean death would be preferable. While the rest of the Hunt prepared to go through the door, Tangata Manu looked for a moment longer at Jona, still laughing. The boy had brought them this far: the Chaplain resolved that he would grant Jona and his mother the mercy he could, rather than committing them to the Black Ships.

The drukhari looked round. ‘What are you waiting for? It won’t stay open forever.’

Tangata Manu signed the Hunt forward and then looked at Te Kahurangi. He indicated Jona and Iraia. He was putting them into the Librarian’s care.

Te Kahurangi signed acknowledgement. There was no further demurral from the Librarian. Jona had proved his worth to the mission. Should Tangata Manu succeed in retrieving the Void Glass, Jona’s ability to see doors others could not might prove invaluable in their efforts to escape from the Dark City.

Tangata Manu went to the door. The air in front of it shimmered. He flared his nostrils, breathing in, but he could detect no hint of the ozone scent of drukhari portals. It must have been opened by means other than those the xenos employed. He glanced again at Jona. Although Te Kahurangi averred there was no warp taint to him, his ability to find doors no one else could see would bring the galaxy down upon his head.

Drawing his bolter, with his mace in his other hand, Tangata Manu stepped forward through the portal.

Chapter 9

INTERLUDE IN THE DARK

Archon Ilu Limnu waited. He waited in the dark, in a dark so absolute that he floated, a presence divorced from physical embodiment. He was thought. He was memory. He was imagination.

He was art in its purest form.

He was darkness.

He was void.

But even as he thought this, he knew it was not the true void that brought forth the stars and ended them but the personal void that hung beneath the illusion of thought and memory and imagination. At some level, perhaps, this personal void met the void, but he could not find it: there was nothing further from the void, from absence itself, than an archon of the drukhari. Even his thoughts were sharp, his imaginings jagged and his memory stretched to the eruption of their own desires in a god that had killed the gods.

Do what thou wilt.

That had been the living law of Commorragh. So it should be still, but for the pull back of the strictures of Asdrubael Vect: what he willed was now the whole of the law.

The Dark City was contained, Ilu Limnu mused, constrained by the machinations and ambitions of its Supreme Overlord.

Time to break the cogs of turning.

It would, he realised, provide him with the sort of diversion that he had long wished for.

The archon opened his eyes. And as his eyes opened, the world – the Dark City – returned.

He was waiting. Sitting alone upon the Thorn Throne, he waited. He had sent out his warriors. He had sent them into the trap that waited for them, knowing well that few if any would return. But in the game, it was often necessary to sacrifice a few pieces in order to bring the enemy into play.

Archon Ilu Limnu waited. The game was afoot. The prize near. He closed his eyes and sought out the void beneath his thoughts and memories, beneath his very being.

Chapter 10

MEMORIES OF A SEA WORLD, LONG AGO

Te Kahurangi was not accustomed to keeping watch while others went about the main body of a mission. After the Hunt had gone through the door, leaving him behind with Iraia and Jona to guard the exit point, he had dug out gun hollows just below the lip of the small dell where they were waiting, creating fire points to cover every direction. That done, there was nothing else to do but settle down to waiting.

Waiting was not easy in the Dark City.

The light of its twin dark stars felt as if something crawled lightly upon the skin, some biting insect or worm, searching entry into the body. At least the Librarian was protected by his armour, and the mental and spiritual training of his calling enabled him to recognise, appraise and put aside the unease of their black light. But it was harder for Iraia and much harder for Jona. Out in the open, the boy began scratching at his skin in sudden frenzied bursts. At first Iraia let him scratch, but then Te Kahurangi pointed: red weals, breaking through the skin to the blood beneath, were forming under Jona’s frantic fingers. Iraia caught hold of his wrists and held them, speaking to him until the fit passed.

Already, some bloodflies were buzzing into the dell. Te Kahurangi, hearing one to his left, snapped out a hand, caught and crushed it. But with Jona’s scratches bleeding, others would follow.

The Librarian pointed to the flank of the dell. ‘Get Jona into shadow.’

Iraia, not understanding initially, nevertheless persuaded the reluctant Jona to move with her to the other side of the dell. There, the black suns were blocked by the slope above them and Jona’s frantic urge to scratch slowly subsided.

But although they were out of the light, there was no escape from the sound of Commorragh. The waiting silence was filled with the susurration of the Dark City, the echo of never-ending agony. Occasionally, some agony more sudden and piercing, and nearer, than others would spike up to a thin scream, but the background sound of the city was a low moan of constant pain.

The sound pierced Jona.

He squatted upon his haunches, rocking back and forth on his heels, his hands pressed into his ears as if he could grind the noise out of his skull. Iraia, speaking to him, holding him, tried to comfort her son but her words and presence were not getting through the pall of sound that had enveloped him.

His rocking became faster and more jagged, his own mumbled charm, his one-word vocabulary, chanted at louder and louder levels as he sought to drown out the city.

The Librarian worked his way over to them, staying below the ridgeline so that he could not be seen by any scans or eyes from the palace.

‘Can’t you keep him quiet?’ Te Kahurangi whispered to Iraia.

‘I’m trying…’ Iraia began, helplessly. But then her words trailed away. Jona’s frenzied rocking had calmed slightly and, with sudden insight, she turned back to the Librarian.

‘It was your voice,’ said Iraia. ‘Your voice calmed him. Can you say something?’

Te Kahurangi, already working his way to his next observation position, stopped. He looked back at her. Then began to creep upwards again.

Jona began to rock frantically. ‘Door, door, door,’ he chanted.

‘Please,’ said Iraia. ‘Just try. I can’t calm him.’

Te Kahurangi stopped. If they could not stop Jona’s noise, he would give away their position. He looked back to Iraia.

‘What do you want me to say?’

Iraia pointed at Jona. At the sound of the Librarian’s voice, Jona’s chant had become quieter, the rocking less frantic.

‘Look, even that calmed him. Please talk to him.’

‘What do I say to one who cannot answer?’

‘Then, please, perhaps you could talk to me. He can listen to us. That will be enough to calm him.’

The Librarian looked at the woman, a Chapter-serf lying under sentence of death for breeding the son she was holding. ‘What would we speak on, serf? Know that I will not speak of the sentence duly passed upon you.’

Iraia paused, as if unsure, and then spoke again. ‘I would still know why you hate your brother.’

The Librarian’s face hardened at the question. ‘I have told you, you speak of that of which you have no knowledge. It is not for those such as you to know.’

‘But your speaking – can you not see how it is calming Jona? Besides, we will be gone soon, I know that. What harm is there in telling me if it keeps Jona quiet?’

Te Kahurangi stared at her for a time. At their silence, Jona ground his knuckles into his ears and his rocking became more frantic.

‘Very well. If my voice is what serves, then it must serve. But first, I must take position where I can both speak and keep watch.’ So Te Kahurangi inched further up the ridge, to where a shard of knife crystal broke up the ridgeline. With it disrupting the horizon, he could watch down into the vale of the palace. In position, the Librarian began to speak, not looking at those he was speaking to.

‘Our world was ocean, with islands scattered widely upon it, and our people too were scattered there, lost upon it in a time beyond mind when, our tales told, the gods fought in heaven and we, fleeing, fell into a world of water. Our people made vessels from the trees that grew on the islands and set out on long voyages of discovery, learning to tell the signs of distant islands from the motion of the currents, the movement of clouds and other signs.

‘But there were monsters in the deep, and many such voyages foundered when the monsters rose. And, learning that we had come and claimed the land, the monsters began to come up onto the reefs and to crawl onto the beaches.

‘We became a people under siege, fighting off the monsters. Only those who succeeded in killing the creatures survived and flourished. We were Sea People and Battle People and War People.

‘And then the gods came from the sky. Grey gods, clad in armour, who told us of the Emperor they served. And they invited us to serve the Emperor in His battle against monsters even greater and more terrible than the ones we faced on our sea world. We were honoured. The Council of the Sea met on the isles and determined that the eldest son from each family should go to serve the Emperor in His battle among the sea of stars when he came of the right age, while the younger sons should remain on our world that we might continue to prevail against the monsters that beset us. We were ever a sparse people, scattered over the wide sea; if we had not come at the calling of the grey gods, they should never have found us.

‘So it was, for generations. The eldest son went, with honour and celebration from clan and people, to serve the Emperor while the younger stayed to protect his family and the isles.

‘So it was to be with my brother and I. We were twins, but I the elder. I had lived through my coming of age, I had defeated the monster. But my brother plagued my mother constantly, saying that as we were twins we should both be allowed to go to serve the Emperor. He said there were other children, other sons younger than us who could watch over her should he go too. For our father had died, pulled into the depths, and we maintained our ships in the face of the monsters.

‘The time came when I went to the sky ships, and left to serve the Emperor, leaving my brother behind. Or so I thought. For when the ship hurled itself into the sky, I learned that my brother had come with me to the stars. He had persuaded our mother to let him go, saying that our siblings would watch over her. She could never say no to him.

‘I would have turned the sky ship back if I could, but there was no returning, not then.

‘The training was long and its memory is bitter but since we came in freedom to serve, the Chapter left my memory of my childhood among the Sea People in place. Besides, we were Sea People come to serve the Emperor in the ocean of stars. And since we were Sea People, free warriors of the Emperor, when we became full Void Brothers of our order, we were sent back to our Sea People to bring the new recruits. Returning to our world, riding the shuttle down to the isles, my brother and I were eager to learn of our mother and our siblings.

‘Learn we did, and the news was bitter. Soon after my brother had left, the monsters had risen from the deep. Our brothers, too young yet, fell before them. They dragged our mother and our sisters from the ships, took them down into the dark.

‘I would have killed my brother on that day but the brethren held me back.

‘Others suffer and die that my brother may gain glory. It was so for our family, it has been so among the brethren.’

Te Kahurangi turned from his watch and looked to Iraia.

‘You asked why I hate my brother. That is why.’

Iraia made no answer in words but she gestured to her child for Te Kahurangi to see. Jona was sleeping peacefully.

The Librarian turned back to the palace. His brother was in there, somewhere. The tale, bitter in its telling, told him again that, in his heart, he did not know if he wanted Tangata Manu to come out alive again.

Chapter 11

THE PALACE OF THE PIERCED ROSE

Tangata Manu looked to where Utakk was pointing. In the Palace of the Pierced Rose the normally loquacious drukhari was learning the value of the noise discipline of the Carcharodons.

The door had opened into a deep level of the palace, well below the garden but still above the oubliettes and torture chambers of its deep roots, where it became the tunnels and laboratories of the coven that took subjects from the defeated enemies of the kabal and, in return, worked its flesh magic upon the wounded and the dead of the Pierced Rose.

Like a living thing, the palace had grown through the millennia of its existence, so that many rooms and levels were no longer used, but existed still, vestigial remnants of some forgotten function, appendices and tonsils in obsidian and jet, forgotten roots supporting the vast flower rearing up into Commorragh’s sky.

The door had brought them to such a place, a chamber where the dust of centuries lay undisturbed. Even the ghosts had forgotten this room existed.

Tangata Manu signed for Brother Folau to allow Utakk to cast around, while keeping him restrained by his iron chain, so that he could get some sense of where they were.

The Chaplain, his senses raised to battle pitch, saw the slightest flare of the drukhari’s nostrils as he tested the air. Tangata Manu did the same: the faintest tang of blood, formaldehyde and the bitter bite of chemicals that, in concentrations greater than a part per million, would be fatal. Alert as only a battle-ready Space Marine could be, Tangata Manu noted that Utakk found the smells familiar from the slight relaxation of the muscles around his eyes and mouth.

‘Do you know where we are?’

Utakk turned to the Chaplain, his nostrils wide, his teeth bared. Here, in the stronghold of his kabal, he was returned to the feral beauty, fierce and deadly, that he had displayed upon the deck of At the Emperor’s Pleasure when Tangata Manu had first seen him. The Chaplain knew that the xenos strained at the leashes, physical, mental and spiritual, with which they had bound him: the merest slip and he would turn on them.

The xenos drew back his lips. Behind them, sharpened teeth glistened wetly.

‘Yes, I know where we are. In the roots of the palace, but not its taproot.’

‘How far?’

‘In distance, not far. In time, it depends upon how many of his warriors the archon sent after us in the Valley of Hinnom.’

The Chaplain signed for Brother Hehu to open the single door leading from the chamber while the rest of the Hunt took up their positions to follow through. At the door, Brother Hehu paused, running auspex checks for traps and signal wires and life signs on the other side.

Once Brother Hehu had signed the all-clear, Tangata Manu signed back for him to open it and go through, the rest of the Hunt following in their trained and rehearsed order.

Brother Hehu went through the door first, breaking left, with the other Carcharodons behind him. As always, they moved in silence, orders given by gesture and sign. The way signed clear, Brother Folau jerked Utakk through, taking him to Tangata Manu.

‘Which way?’

Utakk had explained that he could not be expected to understand the Carcharodon’s sign code; if they wanted to ask him something, they would have to use words.

But in reply, Utakk pointed.

The passage stretched to darkness in both directions but Utakk was indicating, according to the Chaplain’s instinctive directional sense, that they go towards the core stem of the palace.

Before embarking upon the mission, while the xenos was still a broken creature aboard the Mako, the Chaplain and the Librarian had interrogated Utakk for detailed information concerning the structure of the Palace of the Pierced Rose. That knowledge Tangata Manu had placed deep into his mind and now he was swiftly orientating himself to the plans he had constructed in his deep memory.

The core stem was, according to Utakk, the location of the kabal’s treasury, where the Void Glass would be kept safely.

So far, the dracon was leading them right.

Tangata Manu signed Brother Hehu to take point and the Hunt followed, advancing into the underground darkness. But they were brothers of the Void; the dark held no fears for them.

The Hunt advanced cautiously, scanning constantly for movement or sound. Even with their size and armour, the Carcharodons moved in absolute silence.

Coming to a junction, Brother Hehu scanned it clear, then Tangata Manu brought up the drukhari.

‘Which way?’

Utakk sniffed the air. ‘That way,’ he said. ‘I can smell flowers.’

The passage grew lighter as they went. The few doors that opened to it were closed. Rather than attempt to check and clear, the Hunt made speed, following the twists and turns, Brother Ihu as rearguard, Brother Hehu pushing on as point man, with Utakk hustled on by Brother Folau at the centre of the group.

As they advanced, Tangata Manu compared their position to his mental schematic of the Palace of the Pierced Rose. Using the auspex readings to fix their current position against the point of egress and the set waypoint of their exit station, where Te Kahurangi stood guard with Jona and Iraia, he could place where they were in his three-dimensional mental diagram of the palace. They were still in the roots, but working towards the taproot that anchored and connected the stem to the great spreading rose of the high palace. The rose held most of the important parts of the palace: the archon’s private apartments, the Hall of Audience, the Thorn Throne and the seraglio. But the main armoury took up most of the stem, and the treasury, according to Utakk, was at the head of the taproot where it joined the stem, protected by all that stood above and around it: the splinter gun ports and dark lance emplacements, the tangle vines and poison pitcher plants, the combinations of weapons, biological, physical and chemical, that were characteristic of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose.

But, like bacteria, they had passed the hard, external defences of the body and were free in its waystream. With Utakk taking them on the quietest, least frequented ways, the Hunt made swift progress through the palace’s vast and sprawling root system. Three times they came across drukhari as a door was opened unexpectedly or a messenger turned a corner. Each time, Brother Hehu on point or Brother Ihu at the rear dealt with the xenos swiftly and before alarm might be raised. The bodies were quickly stuffed out of sight into one of the many tubes and passages that opened off the way. The palace, at least at these levels, was quieter than Tangata Manu had expected. It seemed the archon had dispatched even more of his warriors to the Valley of Hinnom than he had hoped.

As they approached the main taproot and rose closer to the surface, Tangata Manu noticed the scent of rose. From the merest hint, it grew stronger, the damask notes flooding his olfactory centres to such an extent that he had to disregard their input that he might still note other scents: the concentration of bitter musk that told of the presence of drukhari, or the various nightshade and hellebore perfumes that gave warning of poison traps.

Brother Hehu signed stop.

Despite their bulk, the Carcharodons melted into cover positions in the passage, such that a casual glance would like as not pass over them.

Brother Hehu signed for Tangata Manu to advance to the point position. Moving quietly up to where Hehu stood in cover behind a casual display of topiary torture, Tangata Manu looked out then turned to sign Brother Folau to bring up Utakk and allow him to look.

The Chaplain kept his bolter trained on the xenos as he crept to the edge of the display of flesh and flowers.

Utakk pulled back into cover. Gesturing Tangata Manu to him, the drukhari whispered, ‘We are at Waycross. But it is impossible for you to get past Waycross unseen. There are eyes everywhere.’

‘Where?’ asked the Chaplain.

Utakk pointed.

Tangata Manu adjusted his vision, zooming in and scanning over the richly carved junction. So far as he could see, there were neither guards nor auspex ports. But then a detail that he had first dismissed as unimportant came into focus. The filigree scrollwork that ran up and down the balustrades that arched over Waycross was highly detailed, carved with innumerable eyes. He saw that the eyes were moving, some scanning, others rolling, wild and mad, some fixed and staring.

Waycross was watched by a thousand eyes. And the realisation that the eyes were not carved, but living, told him also that the lips that lined the walls were not paintings but living too, ready to scream and shout and sing warning should any pass that did not belong in the palace.

‘Is there any other way?’ asked Tangata Manu.

‘There is, but it is long.’

The Chaplain nodded. He stared ahead, but within he sought the silence of the Void. The silence eluded him. His mind would not settle.

In frustration, he turned back to the drukhari.

‘How much further to that which we seek?’

‘Past Waycross there is the Path of the Penitent, which leads to the entrance to the treasury where the root meets the stem of the palace.’

‘The door to the treasury?’

‘Guarded but not locked.’

‘The return?’

‘From the far door of the treasury, there is the surface root. At its end, there is a portal that will take us into the open in the Garden of the Rose. From there, you can fight your way back to the door.’

‘Why not the way we came?’

‘You have seen it. It is narrow, winding, easily blocked and even easier to ambush. Unless the archon has sent all his warriors to where our greeting waits them, we would not escape that way. And I do not believe Archon Ilu Limnu to be such a fool that he would send all his warriors away from him.’

Tangata Manu nodded. Nor did he believe that.

He scanned the forward path again.

The time for concealment was over. Time for the monsters to rise from the deep.

Chapter 12

FROM THE DEPTHS

In his training, in the long, painful, painstaking years of his being made over into a professed brother of the Carcharodon Astra, Tangata Manu had looked often at the vowed brothers. He had watched them in their battle training; he had observed them as they prepared their weapons, blessing and censing them; and then, most of all, when he was allowed to follow them into battle as ordnance support, he had looked at the brothers and wondered what went through their minds as they dealt death and destruction to the foul enemies of the Void Father.

Now, he knew. He had known when he first went into battle himself, wearing the grey armour of the order, armed with bolter and blade, and with still not a single victory token embedded in his flesh.

There was nothing in the minds of the brethren as they fought: only the Void. The pure Void beyond the stars. From their endless hours of meditation upon it, from the days and weeks spent under the dome staring out upon it, from the silence of the inbreath and the death of the outbreath, the brothers drew the Void into their minds and their hearts and their souls, that it might dwell there.

It was the Void that advanced towards Waycross and the watching eyes and the mouths, opening to scream warning. It was the Void that acted without thinking, rolling a brace of frag grenades along the floor to where the ways crossed, timed to explode at the meeting. It was the Void, pure action, that targeted the kabalite warriors standing sentry at Waycross when they moved with preternatural speed towards the Carcharodons, themselves advancing with a speed that all but matched the drukhari.

And it was the Void, the deep silence of the heart, that allowed the mind and body of Tangata Manu to work in perfect synchrony, the muzzle of his bolter arcing from one warrior to the next, squeezing off bolt-rounds in patterns that anticipated the evasive manoeuvres of the kabalite warriors even as their muscles contracted. No single mind, no matter how complex, could track all these variables, anticipate them and act on them. Only the Void, utterly simple in itself, could know this and, being pure action, act.

The bolt-rounds exploded on flesh contact, shredding the lightly armoured warriors as they attempted to attack. The frag grenades, timed, burst in mutually reinforcing waves of expanding shrapnel, blinding the watching eyes, silencing the mouths opened to scream warning.

Tangata Manu, the Void embodied, moved to Waycross. The blinded eyes dripped clear aqueous humour like thick rain. The broken mouths leaked blood and spat broken teeth. With the barest motion, Tangata Manu caught one of these broken teeth: a trophy to join those other teeth embedded into his flesh.

Moving in practised sequence, the brothers of the Hunt followed Tangata Manu, taking position to guard each of the paths that met at Waycross.

He had thought he would have to ask the drukhari which of the ways from the crossing was the Path of the Penitent. But on seeing it, there could be no doubt.

Lit by skylights from above, it ran straight and broad towards a reinforced door that, scans revealed, was guarded too, although the auspex readings told of a different xenos breed to the drukhari. The name of the road to the treasury was given to it by the people lining the way, hanging, arms spread, from the crosses that ran parallel to the way, dead and dying alike. The readings confirmed to Tangata Manu what his eyes told him, that the crucified came from every sentient race in the galaxy: hulking orks, nailed and tied to their crosses, their heads pulled back by studded bridles; t’au warriors, extracted from their battlesuits and nailed exposed and naked; genestealers pierced through with hundreds of nails; necrons wired to pylons that sent jolting currents of electricity through their metal corpses; and Chaos creatures, deformed, mutated and transformed, impaled and fixed to their crosses of penitence. In most cases, life-sign readings revealed, penitence had ended in mortality, but a handful of the xenos hung on to dim vestiges of life – or what mimicked life in the case of the necrons. But in among the rows of xenos and the Chaos, the auspex also read human life signs, flickering on the edge of death.

Tangata Manu signed the Hunt on, with Brother Folau covering the rear and he himself just behind the point guard, Brother Hehu. As they advanced down the Path of the Penitent, the Hunt gave the Emperor’s Mercy to those humans they saw hanging from crosses, the thick, blunt thud of bolt-rounds beating a staccato counterpoint to their progress down the path.

Moving into cover behind the corpse of a huge ork – by its bulk and decoration it must once have led a not inconsiderable Waaagh! across many star systems – Tangata Manu felt through the greenskin’s flesh the thud of rounds slamming into his cover. Signing Brother Hehu to provide suppressing fire he waited for the rapid percussive jolts of a bolter firing on full-automatic, the rounds slamming into the treasury door and its surrounds, before emerging from cover.

With the bolt-shells tracing past his onrushing attack, Tangata Manu ran down the remaining thirty yards between the now shredded ork and the emplacements from where the rounds had come. As he ran, the only sounds he uttered were of his barely raised breathing and the semi-cushioned impact of his feet upon the ground. Tangata Manu was the Void, enveloping the failing light.

And, mace in hand, the Chaplain jumped over the lip of the armoured emplacement into a nest of xenos.

The fight was short. The xenos, snake-bodied ssylth, were crushed in a killing frenzy before they had chance to do more than raise a few score marks on Tangata Manu’s armour.

Grey armour slick with xenos gore, he checked back down the path. The Hunt had taken up cover positions, bolters levelled and tracking, waiting for a counter-attack. Utakk, still tied off to Brother Folau, approached, walking delicately down the middle of the path. Tangata Manu turned to the great, high door to the treasury.

There was no handle.

‘There are no locks here.’

He glanced round to see the drukhari gesturing what he meant.

‘Push.’

Tangata Manu would have preferred to have Utakk open the door but the drukhari was still fifty yards away and time was of the essence.

He put his gauntleted hands flat on the door, held them there for a moment, and then pushed.

As the drukhari had said, the doors swung open as smoothly as the tide turning on a sea world. Expecting a storm of fire, Tangata Manu stepped to the side, but the empty door stood quiet and dark.

Tap-signing the Hunt, Tangata Manu went through, bolter raised, with the Hunt poised to rain down fire upon any targets.

But the treasury remained quiet. Nothing moved within its dimly lit depths. Expecting the shatter-rattle of splinter guns, or the hiss of monomolecular kill nets, Tangata Manu found himself pulled from the focused silence of the Void trance by his surprise. Scanning, with senses natural, enhanced and artificial, he sought trace of the enemies that he was sure must be guarding the archon’s treasures. But all his senses came up clear and untroubled.

‘See, I told you.’ Utakk sauntered into the treasury, achieving the sort of apotheosis of smugness available only to one of the aeldari. ‘The archon brooks no guards on his treasury lest the guards avail themselves of some treasure they should not take.’

‘But with the door open, what stops anyone from entering and taking the archon’s treasures for themselves?’ asked Tangata Manu.

‘Some of the creatures hanging along the Path of the Penitent thought the same thing.’

‘Where is that which we have come so far for? Where is the Void Glass?’

In answer, Utakk pointed to the centre of the treasury. There, on a plinth set in the centre of wonders, treasures and artefacts and archeotech beyond the fever dreams of a rogue trader, was the Void Glass. It stood, black, inert, an irregular lump of dark in the dim. It was a black so absolute that it seemed the galaxy itself, with all its two hundred and fifty billion stars, might fall in and not raise a flicker in its darkness.

The life cycle signs displayed on Tangata Manu’s display spiked: heart and breathing, brain rhythms and muscle tension. After a thousand years, the Void Glass, the objective of the Hunt and the fulfilment of his Oath, was before him.

Stepping forward, a grey-armoured giant, Tangata Manu approached the plinth on which the Void Glass stood.

Its central place in a treasury of wonders showed well that Archon Ilu Limnu knew its worth.

Tangata Manu, condemned Chaplain to the Carcharodons, reached up to claim the Void Glass for himself.

On touching it, and despite himself, he paused, expecting some devilry on the part of the archon.

But it lay inert and cold in his hands.

It was his to take.

Tangata Manu lifted the Void Glass from the plinth. Through the silence, he heard the sibilance of the indrawn breath from all four members of the Hunt as they saw what he had and what he did.

The Hunt was achieved.

For a moment, for the briefest of moments, the space between the beats of his two hearts, Tangata Manu exulted. He had satisfied the Oath. He had vindicated himself.

But as the muscles of his second heart contracted, the Chaplain stifled the triumph. For his vindication to be complete he had to bring the Void Glass safely from Commorragh.

He loaded his bolter, the shells locking in place with the most familiar of clicks. The sound was echoed four times over. The Chaplain looked round at the Hunt, each ready, their bolters loaded.

Tangata Manu glanced at Utakk.

The drukhari pointed.

‘That way.’

There was another door, at the further side of the treasury, past the arcane and the grotesque, the beautiful and the damned. The door that led to the broadway out from the Palace of the Pierced Rose and then to the garden itself. That was the path the drukhari said to take, rather than to return the way they had come.

In Tangata Manu’s memory, the narrow tunnels and blind corners they had come down presented themselves as an alternative route. Utakk had served them well so far. But that was, the Chaplain knew, no guarantee of what the drukhari would do in future. However, betraying them to the archon would bring the dracon at best the mercy of a quick death but, more probably, a lingering and public one. Archons did not rise to their power by forgiving those who betrayed them. Utakk’s only option was to continue with them in the hope that their escape, with the Void Glass, would so damage the prestige of Ilu Limnu that the predators, sensing blood in the water, would all turn on the wounded archon.

So Tangata Manu signalled the Hunt on to the door and the broadway. As they made their way through the treasury to the door, the Chaplain noticed that the drukhari, still attached by chain to Brother Folau, tried to grab a couple of the smaller and more portable items from their plinths as he went past.

Coming to the door, the Hunt spread into covering positions, bolters raised, before Brother Hehu burst through.

Clear, he signed.

The way was broad indeed. A tunnel, lit by skylights, wide enough for two Leman Russ tanks to grind down it side by side without getting their sponsons caught on the walls. The broadway itself sloped steadily upwards, the skylights widening as it ascended until, at its ending, it became open to the sky, as a surface root might eventually emerge into the light. There were regular openings to either side of the road, some near as broad as it, others little more than narrow alleys.

It was ideal territory for ambush, from either side, from the skylights above and probably from beneath them too, for there were gratings along the way that told of tunnels running beneath.

But, as yet, auspex readings told of neither movement nor life signs beyond those of the Hunt themselves and the drukhari.

Tangata Manu glanced at Utakk, who pointed ahead.

‘There, where the broadway opens to the sky. There is a portal there. Get to it and we get away.’

The Chaplain of the Carcharodons held his hand up, signing wait.

It was too easy.

Tangata Manu looked at the drukhari. All far too easy.

He ran the schematics of their advance through his memory: to return the way they had come would take longer but they knew the route. What was more, they had cleared it of traps and detectors already. But even as the Chaplain prepared to countermand his order and send them back the way they had come, his auspex flared. The Hunt had left sensors along their path, embedded in wall and ceiling and floor. Now, some of those sensors were picking up movement: converging movement.

The Kabal of the Pierced Rose had realised that its defences had been breached.

They could not return the way they had come.

Advance, skirmish formation, Tangata Manu signed to the Hunt.

Even if Utakk intended a trap, the distance was shorter and, more importantly, his auspex told him that the way ahead was still clear. The Chaplain put the Void Glass into a belt pouch before moving forward. He did not know what would happen should a bolter shell or drukhari splinter round hit it and the blackness within – but nor did he want to find out.

Leading the Hunt, Brother Hehu advanced rapidly, moving from one passage to the next, while the following brothers covered the skylights and the other junctions. Brother Folau, with Utakk, brought up the rear. Glancing back, Tangata Manu click-signed to Brother Folau to release the drukhari from the constraints of the iron chain, and the metal clanged to the ground.

Utakk looked at him in shock, his surprise growing as Brother Folau, in passing, handed him the key to his iron collar. The iron followed the chain, metal clanking on metal.

Tangata Manu strongly suspected that they would soon have to move and move fast; he could sense his hold on Utakk fraying with every passing moment as the drukhari drew strength and ideas from his passage through the palace of his people. When the betrayal came, he did not want Brother Folau slowed down by having the drukhari chained to him.

The attack, when it did come, was swift and close but piecemeal, and nothing to do with Utakk.

The response, drilled into the Carcharodons through endless battlefield drills, was just as swift but not at all piecemeal. For there is only one way to respond to ambush. It is neither to take cover nor to attempt to return fire.

Attack.

Tangata Manu signed the order, but he did not need to. The Carcharodons, schooled through drill and battle, knew without thinking, without orders, what to do: attack the enemy, lay down as heavy a fire as possible. But close on them. Close on them. Close on them and break through and then turn the attack back upon the erstwhile ambushers.

That is what the Carcharodons did. Uncoordinated fire – from splinter rifles and shardcarbines – hissed past them as the Hunt turned as one and, relying on their armour to protect them from the toxins of the splinter rounds, ran into the hail of shards, firing as they did so.

Tangata Manu, just behind Brother Hehu, saw the second attack coming from the left, emerging from the alley that Brother Hehu had just passed, the splinters like a stream of rain splashing off the back of his armour. Together, the two Carcharodons turned, loosed off the loaded rounds in their bolters, and charged.

The rest of the Hunt, ranged in line behind, were shot upon from the previous alley entrance: the ambushers had allowed Brother Hehu and Tangata Manu to go past before opening fire on the second half of the Hunt. As with their brothers, the rest of the Carcharodons charged at the attackers without pause for thought or consideration.

The initial volley of bolter shells, loosed off without hesitation but also without much in the way of aim, found few marks in flesh and bone, but struck off wall and stone and floor, sending up concussive showers of sparks and fragments as the rounds exploded. Even as the kabalite warriors attempted to avoid the shrapnel, the Carcharodons were upon them, grey and silent, the Void come to wreak death. Tangata Manu, moving into close-quarters combat, brought his mace down upon a desperately dodging warrior. The warrior was fast, supple and agile. He moved his head out of the way. But that meant that the mace came down upon his shoulder. Bone splinters erupted from the drukhari as if a frag grenade had gone off inside him. The warrior, a connoisseur of pain like all his kind, had a short opportunity to appreciate the greatest agony that he had ever known before the return sweep of the Chaplain’s mace crushed his skull.

Following Tangata Manu, Brother Hehu eviscerated another warrior before spinning to loose off a brace of bolter shells at further kabalite warriors running towards them. This time, aimed, the shells exploded in the centre of their torsos, leaving arms and legs continuing on for a moment under their own momentum before they collapsed to the ground.

Tangata Manu, working at point-blank range, absorbed the desperate fire of the last of the warriors, letting the splinter rounds ping off his armour, before grabbing him by the neck, lifting him up and shoving his bolter into a mouth opening to scream. The bolt-shell removed the mouth, the head and the scream as one, leaving only the silence of the killing.

Threat extinguished, Tangata Manu and Brother Hehu exited the alley, with Brother Hehu spot placing a couple of motion-sensitive frag grenades to the wall, and saw that the rest of the Hunt had come back to the broadway as well.

Utakk, waiting in the broadway, clapped. Slow, sarcastic applause.

Tangata Manu ignored him.

Advance, double time. Suppressing fire. The enemy knew where they were now. No further point in concealment: speed was all.

But the void of silence in which the Carcharodons fought still veiled them to some extent from the enemy. While vox communications were encrypted and unreadable to those trying to listen in, the Imperium’s enemies could normally monitor the overall chatter to gauge both the numbers and the rough location of their forces. But since the Carcharodons fought in silence, only those who made visual contact with the Void Brothers could know for sure their location – and those who saw the Carcharodons seldom lived long enough to pass on that information.

The Carcharodons advanced along the broadway, moving fast and swapping point duty, throwing frag grenades into the mouths of every approaching opening where enemies might be hiding, and laying down a barrage of bolter fire along the broader thoroughfares that connected to their path.

Contact, signed Brother Hehu. Forward.

Working in vox silence, the Carcharodons were trained to always maintain peripheral visual contact with other squad members and their commander while scanning for enemy targets.

The attack was fast but poorly thought out: a small squad of warriors that were cut down the moment they tried to slow down the advancing Carcharodons.

There were other such attacks, spotted and suppressed, but the number of attackers reduced as they advanced. The Carcharodons were moving faster than news of their advance could be relayed back to the enemy.

Tangata Manu saw that the broadway was sloping upwards. The skylights were widening too. Not far ahead, they opened to the surface entirely. He could see the dark sky that hung low over the Dark City. Target tracking revealed many circling Reavers and jetbikes waiting for them to come out into the open before attacking. It would be a hard fight to cross the Garden of the Rose and get back to where Te Kahurangi waited on them. The Chaplain assessed their chances of making it as minimal.

The end of the broadway was approaching: a series of doors and, between them, a portal, shimmering with opening.

Tangata Manu pointed. Eschewing combat silence, he called back to Utakk, ‘Which one?’

The drukhari pointed back in turn.

The portal.

It was open. They simply had to go through it.

Tangata Manu looked at the drukhari. This was the most obvious point of betrayal: a portal that led them to a killing ground. But it was also their only chance to escape.

He held up his hand so that Utakk could see the detonator.

‘One touch…’

‘…and I say goodbye to my backbone.’ Utakk gestured upwards, to the circling Reavers and jetbikes. ‘I would hardly betray you here, they would kill me regardless.’

Tangata Manu nodded.

‘Very well.’

The portal was wide, broad enough to take them all. Tangata Manu grabbed hold of Utakk, his hand poised to break the drukhari’s neck, while the brethren laid motion grenades around the portal. Then, together, they stepped through the door.

Part 3

Arena

Chapter 1

COLOSSEUM

For an occasion such as this, something special was called for.

Archon Ilu Limnu took his seat upon the Thorn Throne to the acclamation of the vast crowd that filled the colosseum. The Kabal of the Black Heart preferred it be known as the Amphitheatre Vectian, although the vast arena predated the rise of the Supreme Overlord to power by thousands of years. If there was a dark heart to the Dark City it lay here, in the public spectacles of torture and death that had played such a large part in precipitating the emergence of She whom the archon wished never to meet.

The archon had had his slaves bring his own Thorn Throne to the colosseum, Reavers from the Kabal of the Pierced Rose riding escort as it flew above the tenements and slums of Low Commorragh to the arena set at their heart. The denizens of the lower part of the city were ever the most eager to see the entertainments put on there, formerly by the noble houses and then, since the rise of the Supreme Overlord, by the competing kabals.

The floor of the arena itself had been planted out by the kabal’s slave workforce as an image of the great garden of the Pierced Rose, complete with lake, artfully sited so that it caught and transmitted the reflection of the archon to all the watching crowds; multi-level cascade; the poison grove, home to the most toxic plants of the galaxy; and carefully placed topiary that melded plants and living beings into skilful tableaux of torture and the most artistic of deaths. Here was an image of the spray of arterial blood caused by the slash of the hair talons of Lelith Hesperax planted out in a drift of crimson sanguinary roses, there the crystal transformation of flesh into lilies of glass. It was, Archon Ilu Limnu noted as he acknowledged the cheers and applause of the vast crowd, a triumph of the horticultural arts. Nothing less than he expected, of course. Only the Kabal of the Pierced Rose realised the wonders of artistry that could be achieved through careful grafting, pruning and planting.

Archon Ilu Limnu was not as other archons. He sat alone upon the Thorn Throne, with none around him. Archons of other kabals, presiding over games in the colosseum, saw it as part of their prestige to surround their thrones with serried ranks of kabalite warriors, silent incubi and impossibly beautiful wych champions. But Ilu Limnu was not as other archons. He sat alone upon the Thorn Throne that all might see him and despair.

He looked around the colosseum. Its high, banked rows of seating were packed tight with the denizens of the pits and the slums, and the residents of the tenements and the dens. From the highest banks of seating, the smell of poor-grade bouquets and stimms and lies wafted down to the Thorn Throne despite the perfume censers that stood at the corners of the plinth. Then came the circle of the slaves, those who were not confined to the pens to be used in this and other arenas; even slaves were given a better place than the stimmheads and stimm shooters. They were, Ilu Limnu reflected, of considerably more use. The artisans and the runners and gangers, the prostitutes and the poets and the artists filled the next circle: not the lowest dregs of society but still low enough down that the spectacles from the arena would remain as a memory high to help tide them through months of drudge and desperation.

Below the circle of the artisans was that of the minor houses and less powerful kabals, the circle divided into competing house and kabal colours that expanded and contracted as the power and influence of the parent houses and kabals varied too.

Then came the final and lowest circle, that closest to the action in the arena, the circle of the great kabals. This circle was divided into great boxes, compartments into which the archons and their attendants, bodyguards and associates paraded amid much fanfare, to the applause of their allied kabals and the jeers and derision of the lesser kabals allied to their enemies. The great kabals themselves maintained silence at the entrance and exits of their rivals; the lesser kabals acted as their voices in the arena.

For the covens of the haemonculi, the entertainments of the arena were all too frivolous; they attended merely to collect the remains, living and nearly dead, processing onto the arena floor at the end in columns of stretcher bearers and coffin carriers.

As for the wych cults, for them the arena was death and life, the great theatre of their apotheosis as incarnations of beauty and death, death and beauty. They were not spectators, they were actors. The wych cults waited in the great unseen of the arena, in the labyrinth of tunnels, pens, prisons and pits that dug deep into Commorragh beneath the arena floor.

Archon Ilu Limnu, alone upon the Thorn Throne, the magnet to every eye in the arena so long as the floor of the colosseum remained empty, looked around the circle of the great kabals. It was too much to hope that Asdrubael Vect would attend a games that he himself was not hosting, but there were many senior representatives of the Kabal of the Black Heart in the oversized box reserved for it. As for the rest of the kabals, Ilu Limnu saw that there were many archons present in person – or at least, in apparent person: he was not so naïve as to think that that which looked, spoke and moved like an archon necessarily was that archon. Those that had not come had sent dracons in their stead to see the show and to rate the spectacle staged by the Kabal of the Pierced Rose against their own efforts and those of rival and allied kabals.

Ilu Limnu trusted that he would not disappoint them.

The archon, conscious of all eyes upon him, rose from the Thorn Throne. Born up by gravitic repulsors, he floated, serene and calm, above the arena.

‘Let the drama begin.’

His words, quietly spoken, were carried from his lips to the ears of everyone present through the natural amplification of the colosseum’s perfect acoustic, which served to magnify sound such that it reached to the highest row of seats and penetrated the consciousness of even the most tranced stimmhead. The acoustic was emotional as well as aural; the fear and terror of the arena, the excitement and the bloodlust came whole and entire to all the audience.

As Archon Ilu Limnu spoke, he raised his arms, then spread them wide, in a gesture of opening. And as he did so, he opened a great image above the arena floor, a scene of warriors of the Pierced Rose making their way through tunnels and caves, wary and alert but excited.

‘They are searching for the lair of a traitor, the Dracon Utakk, deep in the mountain’s heart. They are searching for the mon-keigh he has brought into our Dark City, grey giants of death and destruction, predators from the ocean of stars.’

The holographic images, real as life, were nevertheless vast, large enough so that everyone in the arena could see what was happening.

‘This is happening… now,’ said Ilu Limnu, in a whisper that carried to every ear in the colosseum.

The holographic images closed into the face of the leader of the warriors, Dracon Samnir Lekryr.

‘Here is the dracon’s lair.’ The words were spoken by Dracon Samnir Lekryr. He pointed his squads of kabalite warriors into position. The watching crowds in the arena waited, silent and expectant but quizzical. This was not what they had expected to see.

Still less did they expect to see the person next to Dracon Samnir, the one directing him on the way: the face was marked with pain and deprivation, the eyes and the cheeks hollowed out by the all too obvious signs of the bouquet.

The perspective pulled back, splitting to show the different attack squads, tense, waiting, poised.

Then Dracon Samnir gave the signal.

The kabalite warriors surged forward in smooth waves, pushing past the automatic defences of the lair, and into its heart.

But there was no rain of fire in return, no last stand of the grey giants. Only an empty, abandoned space.

And then death came.

In the arena, the crowds, the banked rows of watchers, gasped and moaned, spasmed and shook, as the shock and pain and agony of the kabalite warriors’ dying was distilled and transmitted into the colosseum.

The aftermath of their dying filled the arena, the images flitting from one broken body to another, the psychic wave of simultaneous death breaking upon the audience like a tsunami.

Archon Ilu Limnu looked around.

The crowd was silent. Staring.

The kabals, the archons and the dracons, brought to panting, replete silence by the ecstatic shock of so much death, stared up at him, floating serene and modest above the arena.

‘This sacrifice I give to you all.’

The archon’s words were quiet, intimate, a whisper into every listening ear. But for the watching kabals, the quiet words produced a frisson of fear. They had just seen an archon consign fully half his warriors to death merely to introduce his games. What was Ilu Limnu going to do after that?

Turning upon his gravitic repulsors, Ilu Limnu looked all around the arena.

‘This is just the start.’

And the colosseum, all the thousands and thousands and thousands of spectators ranked up to heights almost beyond seeing, gave voice.

‘Ilu Limnu! Ilu Limnu! Ilu Limnu!’ they chanted.

The archon saw even some of the warriors of rival kabals take up the chant, so overwhelmed were they by the tsunami of death and pain that Ilu Limnu had sent over them. In the enclosure of the Kabal of the Black Heart, anxious faces among those who had managed to maintain some measure of self-control were caught between quietening those of their own warriors who were joining in the chant and sending message back to their masters, to Asdrubael Vect himself.

It would be a delicious irony if Vect, stirred from self-satisfaction by the news of what had transpired, came to see the show that Ilu Limnu was putting on. It would be even more ironic as Archon Ilu Limnu knew that, for once, he was acting entirely without irony: what they were about to see came entirely from his heart.

The archon modestly held up one hand for quiet. The chanting of his name died slowly away – somewhat less slowly than the delicious languor left behind by the sudden, unexpected wave of death.

‘You may ask who is responsible for the slaughter of so many of the brave warriors of the Pierced Rose. This is who.’

And the images changed to grey, armour-clad giants with eyes of darkness making their way slowly and cautiously along a tunnel.

‘They call themselves Carcharodons. They hunt in the dark spaces beyond the stars. But now they have come here to take something that is mine.’

The scene changed again, jumping to Tangata Manu taking the Void Glass from its plinth in the treasury.

‘They are dangerous beyond measure, worthy foes to put before our very best.’

Scenes of the Carcharodons cutting down the guards to the treasury, others of them breaking through the ambushes upon the broadway. The sight of the Chaplain breaking the shoulder and then the skull of a warrior was received with a particular trembling sigh of anticipation that revealed the assembled crowd knew well what was coming next.

‘They think they have escaped.’

The display shimmered and dissolved to a new location: the Carcharodons standing before a portal.

‘But they have not.’

The air in the centre of the arena, upon the great lawn in front of the lake, fizzled, the scent of ozone strong in the air. Then, through the opening portal, the Carcharodons emerged: Brother Hehu, Brother Folau, Brother Ihu and Brother Matu, a single drukhari, Utakk, and Tangata Manu. As soon as they were through, the portal shimmered to clear, closing.

Their arrival was greeted with a wave of cheers and ululations, the sounds trembling up through the normal range of hearing to far into the ultrasonic and then down, down, down to the subsonic, where it was felt in the bones and the lungs rather than heard with the ears.

But Archon Ilu Limnu, watching the Carcharodons arrive in the arena, was gratified that they behaved as he had expected. So many of those who appeared in the colosseum, once they found themselves there, dissolved into panic or began running, as if there was any escape for them. But the Carcharodons immediately took up a defensive circular formation. There was no railing against their gods. Or god. The mon-keigh had a single deity. These hunters in the dark even had the temerity to call Him Void Father, but Ilu Limnu knew well that the void was fathered by no god.

‘Allow me to introduce to you, in the flesh, our guests for today’s entertainment. Adeptus Astartes in their high tongue, or Space Marines in their vulgate. And standing with them, the turncoat and traitor, Utakk, once dracon of the Pierced Rose, and quite possibly the most derivative poet it has ever been my misfortune to hear confine the flowing song of the iambic within a metronomic four-beat structure.’

The crowd in the arena was silent, intent, its regard unified and focused, as if it were a single predator stalking its prey.

Ilu Limnu rose higher on his gravitic repulsors, drifting gently closer towards where the Carcharodons waited, still in their defensive formation. But then, without apparent motion from the Carcharodons, a volley of bolter shells exploded around the archon.

The archon made mock obeisance to the Carcharodons.

‘Nothing less than I expected from you. But it will take more than bolter shells to pierce the shields I have around me. Still, in recognition of your indomitability, I give you this pledge with all the witnesses you see about you – prevail in the coming contest and I will give you your freedom. You may even keep the trinket you came here to steal from me, as it means so much to you.’ The archon rose up, and up, arms spread wide.

‘Do you take this pledge too?’

The Carcharodons made no reply. They remained in their defensive posture, but the archon realised that they had subtly rotated round, so that all had had a chance to see the entire arena floor.

From others who had found themselves in the arena there would have been imprecations and oaths, but the Carcharodons made not a sound.

The archon was, indeed, impressed.

‘One final point, dear Carcharodons, before the games begin. As proof of my word and to ensure you are not unnecessarily burdened in your struggles, I have placed a plinth near you – you see it? Place that which you have come to take upon it and it will remain there as prize and guarantee.’

The Carcharodons made no move to do as the archon asked.

‘I should add that not doing so shall lead to my promise being held void. Even victory shall end in death. But none of us want the Void Glass damaged in what is to come.’

The Carcharodons still did not move, but there was a tension to their stillness that told of a decision being made. Then the grey giant in the oldest, most battered armour removed the Void Glass from his belt pouch and going to the plinth, placed it there.

‘Such a small thing for so much fuss. A glass. A mirror. Look in it and you will see only black – the void. But I understand it is precious to you.’

The Carcharodons resumed their defensive posture, bolters slowly tracking across the approaches.

‘I shall now hand you over to the Master of Ceremony,’ said the archon. ‘I hope you will enjoy the show. And Carcharodons, remember, if you prevail, you will win not only your freedom but the Void Glass.’ The archon paused. ‘That promise does not extend to the betrayer.’ Then, riding upon air as it seemed, Archon Ilu Limnu drifted back to the Thorn Throne and took his seat to watch the show.

From the wings appeared the Master of Ceremony, riding into the arena atop a palanquin borne up by a column of slaves, to applause from the circles of the kabals, major and minor, mingled with ribald calls and jokes from the artisans and slaves. He was a creature of the arena, sculpted by skilled haemonculi to create a voice that could be heard up in the gods, a voice that could reach over the screams of the dying and the shouts of the crowd, a voice combining power with intimacy, articulation with timbre. It was the voice of the colosseum itself and, as such, as close to the voice of the Dark City as it was possible to get.

‘Are you ready?’

He turned to take in the whole assemblage as he made his way to the raised podium at the side of the arena that was his pulpit for the proceedings.

‘Are you ready?’ he asked again.

Of course, the greater kabals were too dignified to give answer to such a question, but the top tiers, housing the denizens of Low Commorragh, had no such restraints; they howled and screamed and wailed their readiness.

‘That was but a palate cleanser. Here, true anguish is forged – dragged out.’

The sound grew louder, an atonal cacophony that scraped over the ears of all listening and reached a crescendo as the Master of Ceremony reached the pulpit and his slaves lifted the palanquin so that he could step directly from one to the other.

Standing now at the midpoint of the arena, the Master of Ceremony spread wide his arms, taking in the vast crowd. For the duration of the games, for those hours or days, the Master of Ceremony seemed the most powerful man in all Commorragh, with mobs and disciplined troops alike hanging on his every word. For the Master of Ceremony was the channel of the crowd to the arena floor. He gave voice to its occasional acts of mercy; more often he demanded, as the representative of the crowd, the death of the defeated, telling the executioner how long to draw the killing out. In this, the Master of Ceremony had developed an exquisite sense for the mood of the masses; he listened to it, he played to it, he flattered and abused it.

He knew exactly what they wanted.

The Master of Ceremony waved extravagantly.

‘What could we possibly offer to follow that?’

The crowd, excited, hovered on the cusp of anticipation. Shouts broke out, individual calls, and the Master of Ceremony cupped his ear as if to hear.

‘Get on with it?’ he asked. ‘Is that what you’re saying?’

The roar answered him, as he had wanted.

‘Are you sure?’

The roar grew louder. The sound was a vortex now, sucking all other noise into it, and the Master of Ceremony rode it as a Reaver rode gravity.

Then, he put his finger to his lips in the immemorial gesture for silence.

In the quiet, the Master of Ceremony whispered, ‘Then we shall begin.’ His voice began to grow louder, more intense. ‘As appetiser for this banquet being served to you today by Archon Ilu Limnu, let there be blood!’

And as he spoke, the doors to the arena opened and through them slithered sslyth, ur-ghuls, loxatls and a pack of carnodons. The carnodons, driven to frenzy by their prolonged starvation in the holding pens and the sudden flood of stimuli, struggled against their teams of sweating, terrified handlers, who pushed them on into the arena with electric prods.

The crowd, tensed and expectant, waited, breath held in a unison that settled a strange stillness upon them, as if boiling water were to suddenly stop with frothing bubbles caught in the very act of popping.

The wave of xenos advanced on the Carcharodons from all sides and the Carcharodons waited and waited and waited, until the xenos were but a single leap away from them.

Then they opened fire, unleashing a hail of shredding bolter fire that eviscerated the front ranks of the xenos, leaving mangled body parts twitching on the immaculate lawn, and they followed that up by closing ranks and advancing, alternating controlled bursts of point-blank fire with the savage work of mace and knife and power sword.

The xenos, the hunting horde sent into the arena, broke and fled, ur-ghuls attempting to scramble up the sides of the arena to where the kabals had their enclosures, loxatls beating at the pen doors and sslyth trying to slither down the blood drains.

Only the carnodons made no move to escape, instead settling down to slake their hunger and their hunting instinct on the many creatures running witlessly around the arena.

The Carcharodons, seeing the enemy broken, withdrew to where the Void Glass sat, inert and dark, upon its pillar: such a small thing over which to fight.

The banderilleros, the arena attendants whose task it was to stop escapes and finish off those not interesting enough for a stage death, ensured that none of the xenos attempting to flee did so, rendering death through neurotoxins that ensured a least some interest and release for the pain-hungry crowd.

While the slaves came out to clear the corpses from the arena, and the now replete carnodons were carefully prodded back to their pens, the Master of Ceremony rose from his divan, where he had been reclining, watching the spectacle. But as he watched, he looked too to where Archon Ilu Limnu sat upon the Thorn Throne in the place of honour; as Master of Ceremony, it was part of his duty to ensure that the archon was satisfied with the spectacle.

As the clear-up continued, the Master of Ceremony signalled more entertainment to begin: selected executions, chanted selections from the Threnody of the Fall, cantata harmonised to the screams of the tortured, jugglers who experimented with seeing just how many bits of a slowly dismembered captive they could keep in the air at one time, and all the thousand and one other diversions designed to keep the impatient crowd from visiting its bloodlust upon itself in an orgy of self-destruction.

The Carcharodons meanwhile waited, still and watchful. The Master of Ceremony kept an uneasy eye upon them. He could not recall seeing any other unwitting contestants in the arena wait with such apparent equanimity for what was to come. Still, he comforted himself with the thought that they would not maintain it in the face of what was yet to appear.

With the bodies cleared and those of the xenos who had tried to make a stand in the far corners of the arena having been disposed of, it was time for the next act.

The Master of Ceremony rose to his feet.

Chapter 2

WE BRING DEATH

Tangata Manu signed to the Hunt while maintaining watch on the approach lines across the arena.

Ammunition status.

The Hunt signed back.

None of them had more than three more magazines of bolter shells. Tangata Manu himself had exhausted one. He had another two. Then it would be handheld weapons.

The Chaplain tap-signed a temporary secession of the Vow to Silence. They had beaten the first wave. Now it was time to prepare their souls for the struggle ahead, to call upon the Void Father to aid them, and to find the Void within that they might win the battle without. While maintaining watch, Tangata Manu led the Hunt in a recitation of the Litany of the Void Father. It was the first sound they had made since entering the arena and, as such, it drew the curiosity and attention of the listening crowd.

‘Void Father, strengthen us.

Father of Silence, fortify us.

Source of All, justify us.

Forgotten One, remember us.

Wandering Ancients, find us…’

The names of the ancestors rolled from their tongues, echoing through the suddenly quiet arena and riding the perfect acoustic up past the enclosures of the great kabals, past the circles of the artisans and the artists and the prostitutes, past the circle of the slaves, up to the circle of the stimmheads and the bouquet freaks. And as the names rolled upwards, a litany of the heroes and saints of the Imperium and of the Chapter, the catcalls began, and then the jeers, and then the shouts, attempting to drown them out. But the acoustic of the colosseum had been designed so that everyone, even up to the topmost rows, might hear as if next to them the crack of bone and the scream of pain on the arena floor. The cries and the foul chants could not block the names of the saints from those who would not hear them.

The Litany complete, Tangata Manu signed the Hunt to stand ready. Still there was no sign of where and from whom the next attack would come. So the Chaplain made his way to each brother of the Hunt, touching them on forehead and breast with the sign of the Void Father and the Shade Lord’s sigil. As he did so, Tangata Manu looked each Void Brother in the face and the eye.

‘We stand together. We fight together. We die together or we prevail together. In the name of the Void Father.’

And receiving this blessing, each brother signed themselves on forehead, lips and heart, sealing themselves with the Void Father’s holiness for the battle to come.

As Tangata Manu blessed the final brother of the Hunt, Brother Hehu, he saw the brother’s eyes narrow as he looked past the Chaplain.

‘These are not slaves they send against us,’ said Brother Hehu.

‘They are wyches,’ said Tangata Manu.

The great gates to the colosseum floor had swung open. In the opening were five women adopting poses of exaggerated repose. Indeed, one of them was reclining on a couch, artfully stifling a yawn.

‘Understood,’ said Brother Hehu. This artifice was immediately assessed and seen through. They were enemies of the highest calibre, judging by the ease with which they handled their weapons, the balance and rhythm of their movement and the way that they appraised the watching Space Marines; both were apex predators, utterly different in nature and method, seeing each other for the first time.

From his podium beside the arena floor, the Master of Ceremony announced the wyches to the chanting audiences of the upper rows; naturally the lowest tier, the circle of the great kabals, maintained a more dignified silence.

‘My lords, my ladies, archons, hierarchs, dracons and sybarites. Here, to maim at your whim, the pride of the Cult of the Beckoning Thorn.’

The watching crowd shouted their applause. The Cult of the Beckoning Thorn had allied itself to the Kabal of the Pierced Rose and, together, they had provided some of the most memorable spectacles to be seen in the many arenas of the Dark City.

‘Here, to draw blood for you – the Death Unspoken, Vestele.’

The first of the wyches entered the arena, strutting through the great gates and then stopping to receive the applause of her fans. One after the other, the rest did the same, until finally only the last, the one reclining on the couch remained.

‘And, finally, the Beckoning Thorn herself, Cerbris Strang.’

The wych raised her hand in languid acknowledgement of the cheers. Then, moving with a grace that told of a strength and suppleness far beyond the human, she rose from the couch and advanced, cross-stepping, into the arena. The crowd, mesmerised by her beauty and her poise, cheered her entrance.

Tangata Manu let the names wash past him; they were of no interest. Instead, he watched how these wyches moved, analysing each of them as they stepped into the arena.

There were five wyches as there were five of the Hunt. From what he knew of them, they were likely to attack individually so as to gain the acclaim of the crowd, despite the tactical advantages of moving together. But it was certainly possible that one wych would seek to take advantage of an opening created by another.

As the wyches basked in the applause of the crowd, a tactic occurred to Tangata Manu: these creatures were the stars of the arena, acclaimed and adored. They expected to set the pace and the rhythm of the battle, to conduct it under their own terms.

That was not something he was going to allow them to do.

Tangata Manu signed, Attack, formation arrow.

The Carcharodons began to run, not full pace but not far off, bolters raised, with Brother Hehu as the arrow point and the Chaplain as the body, and the other brothers of the Hunt flanking them.

The wyches, still parading before the crowds, did not appear to register their advance, although Tangata Manu knew well that when they did, they would act with sudden, devastating violence.

So he must open fire before they knew they were in a battle. The distance down to less than a hundred yards, the voice of the crowd beginning to change, Tangata Manu ordered the Hunt to target the leader of the cult, Cerbris Strang.

Five bolters fired simultaneously, the cough of their discharge cutting through the chant of the crowd and abruptly silencing it.

Cerbris Strang, sensing the attack, launched into an impossibly graceful cartwheel, arching behind one of the other wyches, who was slightly less quick in responding. Two of the shells caught the slower wych, tearing off an arm holding a razorflail and sending it tumbling after Cerbris. However, the hekatrix danced out of the range of the lethal monomolecular razors, caught the handle and, with a flick of her wrist while executing a perfectly pitched somersault, sent it spinning back towards the Carcharodons.

It wrapped itself around the helmet and chest of Brother Hehu, slicing through the ceramite armour as if it were flesh and rending the muscle and bone and brain beneath into neat slices. Brother Hehu, headless now, collapsed onto the floor of the arena, the first of the Carcharodons to fall.

Cerbris Strang, still cartwheeling, appeared in stroboscopic flashes behind the remaining three pirouetting wyches.

The hail of bolter shells pierced the spaces where they had been, but they had gone, moving faster than thought and sight could join. Tangata Manu, seeing their shells miss, gave the order, ‘Target their movement: fire.’

The four remaining bolters laid out a net of explosive rounds, threading the area into which the wyches were moving, making of their fire a trap even the drukhari’s preternatural speed could not escape.

Three of them fell, spinning, to the shells, explosive rounds taking out legs and stomachs and chests. One of the wyches thrummed on her back, heels beating a tattoo of death on the grass; another sat, surprised, clutching the entrails that spilled from her midriff. The third, her left leg gone from the hip, lost the other one as she attempted to throw her klaive at the Carcharodons. Then a bolter shell removed her mouth and jaw.

Only Cerbris was left.

The hekatrix had used the other wyches to cover her. Now she moved, low and fast, beating an irregular path across the arena floor.

Tangata Manu spread his arms wide.

‘Come on!’ he yelled, and the shock of his speaking silenced the great arena. His challenge reached to the heights, silencing even those synchronising their own pleasures with the dying on the arena floor.

‘Come on!’ he yelled again, throwing down his bolter to the floor in challenge. Now all he held was his mace.

Cerbris Strang pirouetted, looking him up and down. And she laughed.

‘You, alone? I will take your armour apart and learn what manner of creature hides inside.’

A tumult of shots bombarded where she stood. She moved, avoiding the first, but the volume and varied angles of attack overwhelmed her. Brother Folau, Brother Ihu and Brother Matu had spread out to form a semicircle of fire, and their concentrated burst blew her apart.

‘Not alone,’ said Tangata Manu.

He stood there, looking up at the banks of spectators, and he raised his arms and yelled, ‘Come down. We bring death!’

The crowd, which before had been screaming and cheering its delight at the bloody spectacle taking place before it, fell silent. A watching, hungry silence.

The Carcharodons had killed one of its favourites.

Now the crowd wanted to see the Carcharodons die.

Chapter 3

DEATH OF A POET

This was not going as Utakk had planned. Admittedly, he had not planned any of this, but finding himself in the colosseum, with a gratifyingly large crowd in attendance, he might, as reigning laureate of the Poetic Olympiad, have expected to be the centre of attraction. But now he stood, alone and forgotten, by the piece of dull glass that had brought all this to pass, while the crowd paid its attention to the Carcharodons and the wyches, those underdressed narcissists of the arena.

As far as Utakk was concerned, there was only room for one star in the colosseum.

So how to get the attention that was his due, achieve the adulation of the crowd and win his way back into the good offices of the archon so that he did not end up as food for the animals in the pens? That latter task was, he suspected, the hardest but, staring at the unresponsive sheet of black glass, Utakk began to think. This was the object that the archon had taken from him after their raid on the sea world, ignoring all the other treasures they had found there. It was, it seemed to Utakk, no more than a lump of black glass, strangely melted, as if once it had flowed and then set into shape while still in the process of flowing. But it had been put in a place of honour in the treasury of the Pierced Rose: no simple piece of melted glass would be given such prominence.

It was no weapon, clearly.

What was it then?

Then, in a fit of inspiration, the drukhari realised that, being made of glass, it was a window.

A window to what?

Sidling over towards the glass, Utakk bent down to look, but all he could see was cloud black. Nothing there.

But then inspiration struck again. Windows were often set in doors. Some doors were even constructed solely of glass.

Utakk reached an uncertain hand to it, laying fingers upon the cool, hard glass. Touching it, he felt something he could not see… shift. He pushed harder at it but, after that initial opening, the door would not move any further.

‘That is not for you to open.’

The voice was close, speaking intimately to him, as if by someone standing close enough to touch, but when Utakk looked round, there was no one there. Yet the voice was familiar, all too familiar.

He looked up to the archon’s dais. Ilu Limnu was staring down at him, while all the rest of the arena were looking at the Carcharodons facing off against the wyches.

‘I am the opener of doors,’ said Utakk. ‘I will open this one.’

‘I think not,’ said Archon Ilu Limnu, and as he spoke, there arose before Utakk, riding on his grav-board, a masked beastmaster, naked from the waist up save for his mask and the long whip he held.

Utakk looked round. He could not see any beast.

Then the beastmaster cracked his whip.

Utakk heard them first. The rough, coughing caws. The rattle of bone feathers. Not wanting to, he looked up.

They were circling, gathering above him.

Razorwings.

A flay of razorwings.

For the armoured Carcharodons they would be little more than an inconvenience, but for him, they would live up to their collective noun. A skilled beastmaster could have his trained birds strip the skin from their victim either in a single flock frenzy or strip by strip, dragging out the dying for as long as blood loss and shock would allow it.

‘No!’ Utakk, once dracon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose and still reigning laureate, turned to face the archon, sitting impassive on his Thorn Throne. ‘I will not die like this!’

‘Then redeem yourself. Die by your own hand, in my name.’ The archon gestured to the beastmaster, who tossed a blade to Utakk. It landed, point down, in the ground, its handle quivering. It was sharp enough to cut into the adamantine floor of the arena. Utakk stared at it, simultaneously horrified and entranced.

Then he heard the gasp, and the growing, menacing silence as Tangata Manu and his Carcharodons killed the last of the wyches.

Utakk realised that no one, no one in the whole arena was paying him attention. Even the archon and the beastmaster were looking over to where Tangata Manu stood, arms wide, the focus for tens of thousands.

It was insupportable.

Utakk bent down and picked up the knife.

With the voice that had won him the laureate, he began to declaim. In his poetic frenzy, Utakk chose the most noble of dramatic metres, the pentameter.

‘Death does not come once, it takes man many times,

And this, today, will be but one of mine.’

As he spoke, Utakk raised the dagger but, pausing, struck a pose of calculated pathos.

To his ear alone came the voice of the archon. ‘Conclude this quickly, or the birds will strip your tongue out before you have chance to finish your monologue.’

Utakk looked around and saw that the entire arena now waited upon him, breathless, unbelieving. Never before had they seen sight of one of their own, a dracon of a major kabal, courting death in this way. With such an audience, Utakk could not disappoint.

Raising his knife, he struck a pose of heroic defiance.

‘Death, I defy thee…’

Utakk would have continued his defiance for some considerable time more if the archon, growing impatient, had not, by the merest sign, told the beastmaster it was time to bring the dracon’s part in the show to a close.

The razorwings descended in a clattering, killing frenzy of knife-edged pinions and flesh-piercing beaks and, like all their kin, they went for the eyes first.

Blinded, blood trailing from the ruins of his eye sockets, Utakk flailed wildly with the blade but made contact with nothing but air.

The razorwings, their harsh voices battering the air about him, slashed and tore and cut at the stumbling dracon.

Utakk, left only with his voice, fell to his knees. But he would not go silent into the dark. He would give the crowd a couplet to remember his dying by. What to choose?

That sound he was hearing, dimly now, was it the sound of the great host in the arena, growing in anticipation of his last words? He thought it was.

But as Utakk fell forwards onto his face, the words failing on his tongue, the last realisation of his dimming, dying mind was that what he was hearing was not applause, it was laughter.

Chapter 4

THE HORDE

What next? signed Brother Folau.

The remaining Carcharodons were in defensive formation about the Void Glass. Utakk’s dead body lay on the grass, his face staring up at the dark sky. The drukhari’s eyes were open, empty ruins. From the glance that Tangata Manu paid him, it seemed that his dying sight had been one of horror. The Chaplain hoped that the horror continued for him after death.

He checked the ammunition readings: they were all running low, with Brother Matu almost exhausted.

The Chaplain signalled extreme fire discipline: kill shots only. He glanced up at the dais upon which the archon sat, looking down from the Thorn Throne. Power and authority hung over him like wings: Tangata Manu gauged the distance across the arena for a direct assault.

‘That would be unwise.’

The words were spoken as if by someone standing beside him. Tangata Manu scoped his vision. He saw the archon staring straight at him.

‘I neglected to add the customary suffix we use when speaking with your people.’

The Chaplain saw the archon’s lips move to match the words. It was indeed him speaking.

‘Mon-keigh.’

Tangata Manu raised his bolter, levelled it to the space between Archon Ilu Limnu’s eyes.

‘Do you know why we call you mon-keigh?’

The Chaplain’s finger tightened.

‘Because you are beasts, mindless in your rage and desires.’

Tightened further. The bolter jerked as the round spat from the muzzle, the exploding shell, the instrument of the Void Father’s judgement and His mercy, traversing the space between weapon and target in a fraction of the space between the Carcharodon’s twin heartbeats.

It splashed upon the shields surrounding the archon, coruscating in a shower of shrapnel and fire.

‘I should not waste your ammunition again if I were you. You will need it.’ The archon smiled, his tongue wetting his red lips. ‘But I think you will prevail. In fact, I am wagering my life on it. Do not disappoint me, Tangata Manu.’

Even as the archon finished speaking, the Master of Ceremony took the stage again, drawing the attention of the arena’s crowd with the execution of a mid-ranking dracon who had made the mistake of making a life-or-death wager and who had then compounded the error by losing it. For the dwellers in Low Commorragh, there was a rare delight in seeing such an exalted creature tied to the torture tree – the delight grew greater as the Master of Ceremony signalled for the tree to start growing.

‘Is this enough?’

The crowd yelled its answer, the answer drowning out the screams of the dracon as the tension on his arms and legs increased: he was being pulled apart. But though they could not hear the dracon’s cries, they could feel them as increased vitality flooded into their own bodies, pushing She Who Thirsts further away.

‘Have they suffered enough?’

The crowd shouted that they had not. The dracon’s screams grew higher, more sustained.

‘Is this pain enough?’

The cries of the crowd reached a climax. The dracon’s screams went higher.

‘Drink deep.’

The cracks, almost simultaneous but separated enough for the connoisseurs of the torture tree to distinguish between shoulders separating from arms and hips from thighs, silenced the crowd’s cheers. It settled into a quiet, susurrating moan of contentment.

The Master of Ceremony surveyed the arena, the broadest of smiles upon his face.

‘Are you sated?’

The answers came back almost entirely from the topmost tiers. The circle of the kabals maintained a stony silence: this entertainment was verging perilously close to bad taste.

But the Master of Ceremony’s smile grew wider and whiter. He pointed to the silent, lowest circle, his finger sweeping around the arena.

‘They don’t like this,’ he said. ‘They think it’s common. They think it’s an offence against their dignity to pull apart a dracon in view of the hoi polloi. That’s why they’re sitting there with faces like smacked grox.’ The laughter that echoed around the highest circles of the arena was loud but surprised: no one spoke publicly of the powerful like this. ‘But Archon Ilu Limnu has nothing but the highest regard for the people of Low Commorragh. He has asked me to tell you this today, that you may know his appreciation for you.’ The applause that came then was quizzical, uncertain, made with a careful eye towards where the representatives of the other kabals sat grim-faced.

‘And as token of his regard, he has mandated a special, a unique pleasure for you today.’

The applause quietened to a listening silence.

‘Come down! Come down from your seats, from your seats so high above you can barely see the blood. Come down to the arena floor, come down and take part. Be part of the show. Taste the mon-keigh’s blood with your own tongues. Tear them apart as this dracon was just torn apart. Come down, come down, come down and be stars!’

The Master of Ceremony turned to the watching, silent Carcharodons. He turned and stared pointedly at Tangata Manu.

‘You said you wanted them to come down. You said you wanted to kill them all. Now is your chance.’

And even as the Master of Ceremony spoke, from the highest reaches of the arena, one of the stimmed-up and the inebriated, hearing the call, stepped out into space and… he did not fall. Instead, he floated downwards, gentle as a feather, waving to the roars of the crowd. And as he started, so others followed, stepping off into space and then riding the grav-chutes down into the arena, more and more and more, until all but the most incapacitated had crowded onto the floor, forming a heaving, circling cordon around the Carcharodons.

The Carcharodons pulled back towards the Void Glass, standing all but back to back. As yet, the mob was swirling some fifty yards off, but it was massing all the time. Tangata Manu saw the blood madness in their eyes; he could feel it in his own blood. Even some among the circle of the kabals had succumbed to its lure, with kabalite warriors leaping from their enclosures and jumping with extraordinary balance and grace over the packed crowd, using heads and shoulders as their stepping stones to reach the front.

If the crowd advanced as one, the Carcharodons’ ammunition would be exhausted on the first wave. Then it was going to be hand to hand.

‘Brother Tangata Manu.’

They were so close now that the Chaplain could not tell if Brother Folau was speaking by vox or voice.

‘The Void Glass – surely it must be a weapon, given to our keeping until some great need.’ Brother Folau gestured at the packed, pressing crowd. ‘This is great need.’

‘None know the purpose of the Glass and even if we did, I do not know how to activate it.’

‘Very well. If we cannot activate the Void Glass, I ask permission to attack.’

‘Denied. We stand together.’

‘The Glass? What happens to it should we fall?’

‘We shall not fall. Let them die until we are done with killing.’

Brother Folau turned to the Chaplain and, in the depths of the arena, a smile lifted his lips.

‘That will be long, then.’ The two Carcharodons looked back to the seething mass of the mob, its eyes and teeth and nails making of it something amorphous but jagged and indescribably powerful.

It would be long indeed.

The Master of Ceremony raised his arms high.

‘The Archon Ilu Limnu gives these mon-keigh to you as gift. Take them!’

With a low, feral roar, the crowd of blood-maddened drukhari closed in on the Carcharodons.

Chapter 5

UNDEAD

Marek Krayt was dead.

At least, he thought he was. He was looking down upon his body – that he could see it at all, when it was buried beneath half a mountain, told him more than he wished to know – and seeing it, twisted, with his skull half crushed and a foot reduced to bloody pulp.

But there had been times in the den when he had floated above his body, looking down upon himself, secure in the golden glow of the bouquet. Perhaps this was a similar dream, a final wringing out of all the chemicals with which he had steeped his body.

Around him, Marek saw the crushed remains of the kabalite warriors, and of the dracon himself, Samnir Lekryr, and from their crushed bodies he saw their souls rise, shrivelled, leathery things of great endurance but ugly beyond reckoning. But then Marek Krayt realised that the souls were not rising, they were being pulled out of their bodies. Sucked out and up and down and away. Sucked through the thin veils of irreality that hid the Dark City from the thirst of She Who Waited for their souls. But death had stripped the veils away. She could see them now, she could feel them, she could call them and bring them to her.

Then Marek Krayt felt the same pull, drawing him away from his body. He tried to grab hold of his own fingers, but the soul fingers with which he grasped were insubstantial; they could no more seize flesh than could the wind. He looked round and saw other souls, leathery things that seemed more like dried-out husks than essences, attempting to hold on to their lost bodies with tooth and finger, all to no avail. They were being drawn away, pulled out, lengthened and then snapped together. Although they had no tongues, nor yet lungs, still they screamed, their wailing the sound of the dawning knowledge of damnation. The Dark City itself was disappearing, fading away, a nightmare forgotten on waking. But the waking was to something – to someone – infinitely worse than the Dark City itself.

Although he had no eyes to see, Marek saw, and more clearly than he had ever seen before. She Who Thirsts was swallowing them, swallowing the souls of the damned, and he was sliding down towards the hungry abyss and, despite the psychic scream that he sent up, there was nothing and no one to slow his descent.

Marek Krayt fell into her maw and it closed around him, shutting out the last light he would see. He was screaming, screaming, screaming but there was no sound. He felt the touch of She Who Thirsts sampling this new, fresh soul that had come to her and he knew that this was the start of torment and he screamed all the louder inside his soul, until his soul was nothing but screaming…

And then he was gone. He was spat forth, too vile even for Her.

And Marek Krayt, disincarnate soul, spun through the irrealities between worlds, spinning onwards, spinning, spinning and laughing, laughing, laughing all the time.

And as the wild, tumultuous ride slowed and he felt again the call of his flesh, he saw through the shields and veils that hid the Dark City from She Who Thirsts: he saw the Supreme Overlord, Asdrubael Vect himself, pace the floor of his great viewing platform, looking out over the jagged towers of the Dark City; he saw through the darkness that shrouded the deeps of the mandrakes to the skull halls of Kheradruakh, the Decapitator, brooding over his heads; he saw the colosseum, filled to its highest level, and the grey giants standing at bay on the arena floor, the grey giants and Dracon Utakk, who had sent him to his fate and his escape.

Marek Krayt fell back into his body and woke, coughing and choking, his mouth filled with dust and his eyes closed by dirt and his lungs clogged with debris. He woke, flailing, fighting, falling.

He fell face first into the dust and rolled down a slope that had not been there before, rolling over and over and over, banging head and elbow, foot and shoulder against objects sharp and dull as he tumbled, and each one he blessed – in so much as a drukhari could bless anything – for confirming to him by the pain it caused him that he was alive and not food for She Who Thirsts.

The rolling slowed, slowed and stopped, and Marek Krayt lay on his back, eyes closed, chest heaving, breathing.

Breathing.

‘Breathing!’

Marek Krayt opened his eyes. Although his vision was still blurred, he could see. An unconscious part of his mind considered whether the vision he had seen had been real. Whether that had actually happened, or whether it had been some fevered dream prompted by the bouquet purging through his system. It was drowned out, almost immediately, by his conscious mind screaming his joy and immortality.

‘I’m alive!’

‘Do not move if you want to remain that way.’

Standing over him was a shape that brought back memories, bad memories. A grey, armour-clad giant, pointing a very large weapon at his middle. Judging by the size of its barrel, Marek surmised that if the grey giant fired it there would be very little left of his middle.

‘Not moving. Not moving at all.’

The grey giant looked down at him with Void eyes.

‘I know you.’

‘Yes, yes, you do. You sent me to the archon. I did what you asked, truly I did, told him to meet you all in the Valley of Hinnom, never mentioned you at all…’

‘I very much doubt that.’

The grey giant silenced Marek by putting the barrel of the bolter on his lips. That would be his head gone if he fired, Marek realised, and he did not fancy his chances of being vomited out by Slaanesh twice in a row. Must have been the bouquet blush a separate, self-contained part of his mind concluded: no one escaped She Who Thirsts. No one.

‘Where did he come from?’ the grey giant asked.

Taking care to move nothing but his eyes, Marek looked to where the grey giant was speaking and saw, to his surprise, a mon-keigh woman holding the hand of a younger, distressed, mon-keigh male.

The woman shook her head. ‘I did not see,’ she said.

The grey giant pointed to the boy. ‘He has stopped rocking.’

The boy was staring at Marek with eyes that were clear and without disgust. Marek found it very disturbing.

‘Door,’ the boy – Marek saw he was a young man but there was about him the air of childhood unsullied – said, pointing at Marek.

The grey giant looked back to Marek. ‘Where are our brothers?’

Marek stared over the top of the bolter into the black eyes. He knew that if he answered wrong, his skull would explode and his brains spatter over the ground and Slaanesh would drink his soul for all eternity.

‘They are in the arena,’ he said. ‘I saw them when I was dead.’

The grey giant stared down at him with eyes of night. Then, abruptly, he raised the bolter and turned to the woman.

‘Can Jona find a portal?’

The woman pointed at Marek, still lying motionless. ‘I think Jona might need him.’

The grey giant nodded and, reaching down, picked Marek up and carried him over to the woman and the young man.

At Marek’s approach, the boy calmed further. He looked at the stimmhead. Marek tried to look back into the young man’s eyes, eyes of a clarity that he had never seen beneath the dark skies of the Dark City, but without knowing why, he had to look away. The young man began to laugh. Such a light, untroubled laugh Marek had never heard, not once in all his years. He stared down at the dull grey dust of Commorragh as Jona spoke with delighted laughter.

But behind him, Marek felt a breeze where before there had been only stillness. A door was opening…

Chapter 6

WYCH QUEEN

Hack bone, slash flesh, pierce armour, crush heads. Punch, smash, kick, throw.

Combat reduced to its most basic, visceral, physical level.

Tangata Manu could not remember when he had fired his last bolt-shell. It felt like it was an age ago, when the enemy was still screaming towards them and he and the rest of the Hunt, back to back, cut swathes of blood through them with their bolters, only for the channels to be filled by new faces and new figures, transfigured by the bloodlust that had settled over the crowd like a miasma of close-hugging death.

This was not how the drukhari fought. In some small corner of his mind, as he swung his mace, pulverising the skull of a wrack, he knew that this was not what they did, this mass, frontal assault, utterly unmindful of losses. This was the drukhari fighting like orks or the Imperial Guard commanded by a particularly mulish general. Some madness had infected them, some blood rage that had rendered them insensible to their normal battle doctrines of speed and feint. Such was the blood rage that the very numbers of drukhari crowding around them reduced their effectiveness, their own massed bodies serving to shield the Carcharodons from those further from the fray. In fleeting, captured glimpses through the throng, Tangata Manu saw the battle madness play out in attacks by drukhari on those around them, and others, less maddened, taking the opportunity to settle a long-nursed grudge against a rival. Although the majority of the mob hurling themselves at him were the scum of Commorragh, among them were kabalite warriors, most of them equally unconcerned with anything other than killing whatever came before them so that they might reach, and kill, the Carcharodons.

But to do that, they had to get past his crozius. Tangata Manu swung the heavy headed weapon in great sweeping arcs, knocking back the mob as it rushed him, breaking arms and backs and legs and heads, and leaving a growing circle of the broken and the screaming. But the onrushing mob simply climbed up the bank of the wounded and the dead and launched themselves off the top at him, flying forward like a swarm of mosquitoes that the Chaplain swatted from the air, sending explosions of blood and bone and gristle over the red circle that surrounded him.

Yet all the while the circle closed tighter.

Tangata Manu saw the mob close around Brother Ihu and Brother Matu, the two Carcharodons standing back to back, their bolters long exhausted, their knives jammed between attackers’ ribs and wrenched away. Drukhari, the lost and the scum, came jumping over the heads and shoulders of those massing around the Space Marines, throwing their bodies upon them, pulling them down, grabbing their flailing arms and by sheer weight of numbers forcing them to the ground so that others might push blades into the gaps between armour. Even as the Chaplain tried to force himself to them, he saw Brother Ihu and Brother Matu disappear beneath the writhing pile of bodies.

From out of the mass, a hand raised, holding aloft in triumph a helm.

Then another.

The life signs that told their status to the Chaplain ran down to single lines.

Tangata Manu turned away.

Brother Folau was still on his feet, fighting. Tangata Manu glimpsed him on the far side of the plinth. The Chaplain himself had taken his stand beside where the Void Glass stood, inert and black and unresponsive. The Void Father had charged the Forgotten One with taking the Glass beyond the reaches of the Imperium and keeping it safe in the Void.

He had failed to keep it safe.

He would die in its defence.

Then, beside the plinth, the air opened, a slit in reality formed, and through it stepped Te Kahurangi, his force staff flaring green fire. Lightning flashed, cracking from the Librarian’s staff, leaping from mouth to eyes to ears, burning out the brains and bodies of all the mob close-crushed around Tangata Manu and Brother Folau.

Tangata Manu, only conscious now of how heavily he was breathing, looked to the Librarian. He had no need to say anything. The Librarian pointed to the portal: Jona was there, with Iraia, standing in the portal and, by their presence, holding it open, while some strange twisted creature lay behind them in the shimmering portal entrance. Tangata Manu realised it was Marek Krayt.

A portal.

A way out.

‘I think not.’

The words were clear to Chaplain and Librarian. Tangata Manu looked up, over the seething crowd, to where Archon Ilu Limnu looked at them with deliberate intent, raised his hand and activated one of the devices he had left implanted in the stimmhead.

Marek Krayt, on his knees, pushed Jona forwards. Not expecting the shove, Iraia, still holding Jona’s hand, stumbled and, catching her foot, fell.

Jona tripped over his mother and landed, heavily. He made no sound. The door, the portal, fizzled, shifted, then shut.

‘Jona!’ Iraia scrabbled towards where Jona lay, silent and unmoving, a livid weal already forming on his forehead. She cradled Jona in her arms, sobbing his name.

Marek, squatting back on his haunches, was looking at his hands as if he could not believe what they had just done. He pointed up at the archon.

‘He made me do it.’

Tangata Manu raised his crozius to bring it down and crush the stimmhead’s skull.

‘No doubt he deserves to die but he was not responsible for that little push.’ Archon Ilu Limnu, lounging upon his Thorn Throne, looked down with impersonal eyes upon the scene in the arena. What remained of the mob had broken, fleeing back from the circle of death in the centre of the colosseum. But already they were beginning to regain their thirst for entertainment: this was turning out to be the most unpredictable and exciting arena display that any of the spectators could remember. Absent murder and accident, they were immortal. Now, in the arena, the excitement of not knowing what would happen next sent the thrill of the unexpected coursing through the crowd.

Iraia rocked backwards and forwards on her haunches, calling out Jona’s name. Finally, Jona gave a gasp. Iraia, the tears still streaming down her face, muttered thanks to Saint Miriam. Jona, his head hurting and with no words to express his pain, opened his mouth and his lungs and let forth.

His wail soared across the arena. It was as if a bucket of blood had been thrown into a tank full of ocean predators. Iraia could feel the attention, fixed and feral, falling upon them both. Trying to protect Jona, she pulled him over to the plinth holding the Void Glass. At least that protected their backs. Jona’s initial cry trailed into incoherent mumblings. Pushing free from his mother’s embrace, he began to rock, backwards and forwards on his haunches, hands held up over his head.

‘Not the most effective armour.’ Ilu Limnu settled back onto his Thorn Throne.

But as he did so, Te Kahurangi raised his force staff. Green fire began running up and down its length and over the Librarian’s fingers and up his arm. The temperature in the colosseum plunged, the growing vortex sucking energy from the surroundings to the force staff channelling Te Kahurangi’s psychic power as he pushed through the veils that hid the Dark City from the energies seething in the immaterium.

‘So you would raise daemons, would you, mon-keigh?’

And Te Kahurangi, his staff raised high as the power built within it and him, answered, ‘I would raise hell itself to wipe this cancer, this abomination of desolation that passes itself off as a city, from the universe.’

‘I trust that won’t be necessary.’ The archon looked across the arena to the Master of Ceremony. ‘Please announce my penultimate surprise for the audience.’

The Master of Ceremony, although conscious of the building power in the arena, nonetheless could not help but give this final act of the arena show the build-up it deserved.

‘Lords and ladies, archons and hierarchs and dracons… we have a rare treat. One stolen away, one returned on personal favour. I present the crown, the summit, the apotheosis of death! I give you beauty and slaughter and grace! I announce the queen of the wyches, Lelith Hesperax!’

The great doors at the end of the arena slid open and there she was: Lelith Hesperax herself.

Even to the Carcharodons, modified in mind and body to be immune from the normal human passions, her beauty came as almost a physical blow, a burning of the image of perfection upon their memories and their hearts. But it was not solely her form, framed by auburn hair tumbling down to her feet, but also the grace with which she stepped through the doors of the arena into the colosseum that imprinted her memory upon them. Lelith Hesperax was music made movement. She was death made perfect flesh.

Seeing her, the crowd, excited before, sent up a great sigh of anticipation. Those who remained alive on the arena floor, their blood rage suddenly turned to cold fear by the presence of death herself, hung back and chanted her name while the kabals, dracons and archons, old in evil, settled back to enjoy the show, although not a few of them, turning to their entourages, whispered to their spies to find how the archon of the Kabal of the Pierced Rose had persuaded Lelith Hesperax to appear, here and now. And not least among those asking this question were the representatives of the Kabal of the Black Heart, who were sending frantic messages to convey the news to the Supreme Overlord himself.

Meanwhile, Lelith Hesperax stalked forward, moving with the grace and control of a great feline, her halo of red hair glinting with its braided-in barbs, her only weapon a single knife that she held in her right hand. But the knife was stropped to so keen an edge that light itself split and refracted from it.

This was beauty unblemished by countless battles with the deadliest foes in the galaxy.

Standing before them, the Carcharodons realised, was the predator supreme in all her inviolate perfection.

Tangata Manu glanced at Te Kahurangi. The green fire was writhing about his force staff, flaring brighter with each passing moment, but still the Librarian had not unleashed its power. He signed Te Kahurangi to hurry.

The Librarian spoke back, mind to mind.

+Give me time.+

Which was when Lelith Hesperax began to sprint. Her running was motion made liquid light. Tangata Manu signed Brother Folau to him and the two Carcharodons moved to put themselves in between the wych queen and Te Kahurangi.

‘Here.’

Te Kahurangi tossed his bolter, the only one still loaded, forwards; Tangata Manu caught it in one smooth motion and brought it to bear on the approaching wych.

He fired, squeezing the trigger while setting the bolter on full-auto and unleashing a hail of shells in a staggered pattern calculated to shred any approaching enemy.

Lelith Hesperax twisted, swerved, somersaulted and vaulted through the net of bolt-shells, coming closer and closer and closer as Tangata Manu tried to track her motion.

Magazine exhausted, Tangata Manu dropped the bolter and swung his crozius. At the same moment, Brother Folau sliced with his power sword.

Lelith Hesperax leapt over them, somersaulting as she went so that her trailing hair barbs cut gouges through their ceramite armour, down to the scalp, leaving bleeding tattoos across their heads in the design of her personal sigil and the sigil of the Wych Cult of Strife.

Her leap, lengthening as she spun through the air so that it seemed gravity had no more hold of her, took her past Te Kahurangi and, moving faster than even the enhanced eyes of the Carcharodons could follow, she flicked out her knife as she went.

The knife, sharpened to a light-slicing edge, severed the Librarian’s wrist, cutting through ceramite armour, flesh and bone as if they were dry grass and the knife a reaping scythe.

The force staff, with Te Kahurangi’s hand still clutching its haft, fell to the floor, releasing its pent-up energy in an explosive discharge of green fire that sent the three Carcharodons tumbling and falling. Lelith rode the explosion as if it were nothing but a wave of water, landing, perfectly poised, in front of where Te Kahurangi was struggling to get to his feet while he slapped coagulants on the stump of his right arm.

Lelith Hesperax grinned but there was no joy in her smile, only the bloodlust of the perfect predator in the midst of the hunt, balanced upon the point of its own concentration.

Te Kahurangi went to pick up the force staff with his remaining hand but Lelith hooked her toe under the weapon and flipped it, in an arc that trailed green fire, over the boundary of the arena with the Librarian’s hand still hanging determinedly to the haft.

In response, the Librarian, although deprived of his force staff, sent a bolt of psychic fire at her, but Lelith cartwheeled away, dropping to her feet in front of the plinth.

Iraia scrambled forwards, putting herself between Hesperax and Jona.

Lelith looked down at her.

‘A mother protecting her son,’ she said.

‘Yes,’ said Iraia.

‘I despise breeders.’

Iraia looked up at the most beautiful female she had ever seen.

‘I’m sorry,’ she said.

A frown creased Hesperax’s perfect face.

‘Why are you sorry for me?’

‘Because you will never know what it is to love another more than yourself.’

The wych shook her head, lightly, and a hair barb sliced through Iraia’s cheek.

‘You are pretty, for a mon-keigh. You will not be, after I finish with you.’ Lelith stepped aside as Tangata Manu’s mace came down in the space where she had been, its head splintering the floor of the arena.

‘And your son will be a thing of horror.’

Lelith spun away, the blades lining the boot on her trailing leg slicing through the Chaplain’s greave, down to the bone. Tangata Manu stumbled but, recovering, lurched after the spinning, weaving, dancing wych. As he did so he yelled to Te Kahurangi and Brother Folau, ‘Converge.’

Each taking a trident of the circle, a hundred and twenty degrees apart, they manoeuvred to try to keep the wych at its centre, closing the circumference on her. For her part, Lelith stood still, poised and posed, slowly rotating on the spot so that she could see them all as they approached.

She smiled.

‘You are outmatched. I have perfected the art of murder. Before me you are nothing.’

Tangata Manu, Te Kahurangi and Brother Folau were Carcharodons, enhanced super warriors that between them had spent millennia training and fighting. They had fought and killed foes from tyranid hive tyrants through ork warbosses to daemons manifested in realspace. Now an unarmoured xenos stood between them, holding only a dagger. Although their bolters were empty, they were armed with mace and power sword and, although deprived of force staff, psychic fire.

So practised were they in fighting with each other that there was no command required for their combined attack. Brother Folau cut a diagonal with his power sword, cutting off any escape Lelith might make to her right. Tangata Manu swung his mace in a rising arc, stopping any escape to the left. And Te Kahurangi sent green fire in an arch at head and above height so that any leap would see Lelith burn.

But she did not burn. Nor was she crushed by the mace nor sliced by the power sword. Moving, swaying, she seemed hardly to move at all and yet the blows missed her while the balefire passed over her head. Then, stepping forward even as he brought the power sword back to guard, she whispered into Brother Folau’s ear.

‘A more elegant death than you deserve.’

Brother Folau turned his head.

The knife entered the gap between his gorget and his helmet, thrusting upwards through the palate, skewering his tongue to the top of his mouth and then continuing upwards, through the ethmoid sinus and the basal ganglia before exiting the brain through the primary motor cortex and emerging, for a flicker-brief moment, sharp as the tongue of a chameleon, out through the top of his helmet before being withdrawn.

Brother Folau stood dumbly staring at her, all power of movement suddenly withdrawn from him by the precision of her strike. Then she drew her finger down over his helmet before, lightly, pressing. The Carcharodon, only now realising he was dead, toppled like a felled tree.

The watching crowd moaned in an ecstasy of pleasure. To watch the great Lelith Hesperax make a kill was a delight most present thought never to see.

For Marek Krayt, curled in the ditch made by the dead, the kill was all too close: alone among the spectators, he had absolutely no wish to see Lelith make her next kill at such close range. So, attempting to get away, he started to crawl, through the mounds of dead, only for a bare foot to appear in front of his head. It stepped there with not a sound and it was but chance that, looking up from his fear-filled crawl, he saw it before he bumped into it.

He looked up.

‘What is this?’ asked Lelith.

Marek knew he was dead. The knowledge brought a surprising peace: there was nothing else he could do to live. Suddenly free from the scrabbling impulse to survival, he spoke the first words that came to his mind as he looked up at Lelith standing over him.

‘Great view.’

Lelith Hesperax looked down with disgust.

‘A stimmhead.’

She turned away. Clearly such a creature as Marek was too despicable for her attention. Besides, the remaining two Carcharodons were closing on her. They were, Marek could tell, experienced warriors who had killed many foes. He knew she would give them the respect of killing them slowly, by degrees. A cut here, a cut there, slowly stripping the armour from their bodies before then moulding and shaping the exposed flesh into a work of bloody art: she had a mind to reveal the musculature of rib and thigh to the crowd.

Realising that, again, he was still alive, Marek tried to turn and crawl away but, doing so without looking where he was going, he knocked into a body, setting a pile of corpses tumbling down onto him.

Marek, nerves thoroughly shredded, shrieked his alarm.

Lelith looked back at the stimmhead.

She was angry now. That such a creature had been allowed into the arena to sully her art called forth the blood anger, the pain hunger, all the rage that drove her never-ending frenzy to find an opponent worthy of her genius. She had been promised a challenge – it had been the bait on the hook Ilu Limnu had set to persuade her to return here, however temporarily. What art could there be with such lowness crowding her canvas?

She would clear the arena of its trash before she finished her work.

Turning, avoiding with apparently effortless ease Tangata Manu’s crozius strike, Lelith Hesperax jagged left.

The breeder and her spawn were closer. She would finish them first before cleaning up the stimmhead and then returning to her art.

Reaching down, she pulled Jona to his feet.

As Iraia jumped up, and Tangata Manu began running to stop her, and while Te Kahurangi summoned green fire with his remaining hand, Lelith Hesperax pushed Jona against the plinth in front of the lump of fused black glass.

But held by the most lethal warrior in the galaxy, Jona did not even look at the wych raising her knife to gut him. Although the Carcharodons were rushing towards her, Lelith knew without looking exactly how long she had before they came within range. Never before had she seen a victim, about to die, look away from her as if he had seen something more interesting.

‘What are you looking at?’ Lelith asked Jona.

‘Door,’ said Jona. And he reached past the wych and placed his hand on the Glass.

On his dais, Archon Ilu Limnu, despite himself, rose from the Thorn Throne. This was it. This was the moment all his machinations had worked towards.

Iraia hurled herself at the wych.

Tangata Manu threw his crozius.

Te Kahurangi released the green balefire from his hand and eyes.

And the void at the dark heart of the Void Glass opened.

Only in its opening did Tangata Manu begin to understand the nature of the relic that he had lost, and then pursued, from one end of the galaxy to the other.

The Void Glass was more than a window. It was a door, and a mirror.

The Void Glass opened the Void to everyone who could see it, all the thousands upon thousands ranged in circles around the arena, stretching up to the gods. It opened the Void and it presented the Void to them as a midnight pool, perfectly reflective, a mirror showing each and every person looking into it the image of their true selves, their soul self, stripped of all pretence, of every lie and self-deception, of every vanity and arrogance: it mirrored back the soul in the dark light of the Void and revealed it clear.

Lelith Hesperax saw a wind, chasing forever after something that remained always out of its reach: the worthy challenge that she would never find.

The Master of Ceremony saw himself as a debauched and broken roué, clinging desperately to past glories.

Te Kahurangi saw a predator, a sea creature like to the monster that had taken his mother and the rest of his family, something that lived only to kill, a wolf, set among sheep as their shepherd but one bitter and biting through resentment.

It was a machine that Tangata Manu saw, a machine of wheels and spikes and knives, made for dealing out death, with only its eyes, its still-human eyes blinking the fear that it had become something entirely inhuman.

Iraia saw a fire.

Marek Krayt saw himself as he saw himself every day when looking in a mirror.

And Archon Ilu Limnu saw the death, the true death that he craved, open before him.

Around the arena, spectators fled from the awful vision of their souls, running, screaming, clawing, fighting to get away. The circle of the kabals was pandemonium with the highest archons being crushed underfoot by their own sslyth bodyguards as they attempted to flee, the stampede killing more even than the fighting.

Dropping her knife, Lelith Hesperax fell to her knees. She began crawling away, muttering, ‘No, no, no,’ under her breath and squeezing her eyes shut against the sight of her soul fate.

Archon Ilu Limnu stumbled forward. He half stepped, half fell into the arena, then staggered on, towards the plinth on which the Void Glass stood. The Void opened out in abyss behind the Glass. He staggered towards it, arms held forward like a man recently blinded, feeling for the wall he knows to be somewhere close yet cannot find.

Jona, who had opened the door, could not pull his hand from the ice touch of the Void. It had frozen his fingers to itself. Iraia was trying to free him, but pulling only threatened to tear the flesh from his bones. She looked round desperately for something to help and seeing Lelith’s knife, picked it up, thinking to prise Jona’s hand and foot from the Glass.

As she did so, a shadow fell over her. Iraia looked round and saw Archon Ilu Limnu looming over her. Without thinking, she drove the knife into his chest.

Archon Ilu Limnu looked down at Lelith Hesperax’s knife, sticking from the centre of his body. He looked to the woman staring at him, her eyes wide with shock at what she had just done.

‘Thank you,’ he said, and fell into the Void.

The Void shut.

Jona, freed from its ice adhesion, was pulled into his mother’s arms. Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi stood, swaying, unsure what to do.

The crowds, freed from the immediate vision of their black souls, fell into the desperate hedonism of those assured of death. The murderous intent with which they had attacked the Carcharodons burned into unfocused desperation as they tore each other apart, or streamed from the arena searching in bouquet and stimm, in torture gardens and realspace raids, in anything that would help them forget. Anything that would bring relief.

‘Take… take that thing away.’

Lelith Hesperax had crawled away and pulled herself to her feet. Trembling, she pointed at the Void Glass, once more just a lump of fused glass sitting on a plinth in the middle of a rapidly emptying arena.

‘Take it away and never bring it back.’

The Wych Queen of the Cult of Strife turned to leave. After a few shaky steps, she stopped and sketched something in the air, murmured some half-formed words. Beside her, another portal fractalled open. She ignored the door she’d opened, and staggered brokenly out of the arena. She did not look back.

Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi looked at each other. Then they turned and looked at Jona.

Iraia nodded.

‘Door,’ she whispered. ‘Can you still walk, Jona? If you can–’

And Jona turned his face to her. He looked at his mother. He responded to her voice.

‘Door?’

He laid his hand on the Void Glass, and gathered it up in his arms. Nothing happened. It was cold.

Tangata Manu and Te Kahurangi, cradling his injured arm, stepped forward.

Through the portal, they could see elsewhere. What mattered now was that where it took them was not here. They could find and break a fresh guide.

The door shimmered. It would not stay open for long.

Marek Krayt, trying to slide back from notice, only drew the attention of the Chaplain to him.

Tangata Manu’s gaze locked on the stimmhead.

‘Are you going to kill me?’ Marek asked them.

‘I have seen my soul,’ said the Chaplain. Tangata Manu turned away from Marek Krayt, dismissing him from thought. Iraia, looking past the Carcharodon, nodded her thanks to the xenos. He had brought them to this place and, through its horrors, to a door out of Commorragh.

The Carcharodons went to where Jona and Iraia waited by the door. Together, without looking back, they stepped through, and the door closed behind them.

The plinth, where the Void Glass had been, was empty.

Marek Krayt stood alone in the centre of the arena. He turned slowly, looking up at the great banks of seating. He turned and he turned and he turned, spinning in place, the last living thing in the arena, turning and turning, and his laughter rose up through the empty space, a sound unheard there in all its ages of pain.

Epilogue

Tangata Manu sat and sought the Great Silence but he could not find it.

Around him, the familiar low-level sounds of the Mako carried on in the background as it navigated the impersonally hostile wastes of realspace and the actively dangerous expanses of the immaterium.

The Chaplain moved, switching to squatting on his haunches from the cross-legged position that he had adopted when first he entered his cell. There were many empty cells on the Mako now. Brother Folau, whose cell had been to his right, had been left behind, as had Brother Hehu and Brother Ihu and Brother Matu. All lost.

Four brethren. It was a high price to pay. He felt their absence in the silence. For it was in the silence between the stars, in the silence of the Void, that he felt his brethren’s presence most purely and most completely. Now they were gone.

Only his blood brother remained, his twin Te Kahurangi, and the sense of his presence contributed to Tangata Manu’s inability to find the Void within.

Squatting there, he let each thought and sensation, each memory and regret pass by and on into the Void without holding them. But the peace of the Void, its Great Silence, remained out of his reach.

Tangata Manu opened his eyes.

The bare walls of his cell were unaltered. His armour and weapons hung upon the wall. All was the same – except for the lump of fused black glass that sat on the floor, inert and unthreatening, as silent as a rock.

Tangata Manu stared at it. The darkness of the Void Glass was such that it was all but impossible for his eyes to find purchase upon it. It was like trying to climb ice: all his attempts to actually see it simply slipped off.

He realised now that there was no more dangerous object in the galaxy.

Along the ambulatory, steps. Steps approaching. Quiet and contained, but heavy and firm.

He knew the tread.

They stopped outside his cell.

In the silence, Tangata Manu could hear the breathing.

A knock.

Tangata Manu stood from his crouch and went to the door, opening it.

Outside stood Te Kahurangi. The Librarian looked past the Chaplain, searching for the Void Glass. Tangata Manu stood aside so that Te Kahurangi could see that it was still there.

The brothers looked at each other.

Tangata Manu signed his permission.

Te Kahurangi entered the cell and the Chaplain closed the door behind him.

Standing beside each other, they looked at the Void Glass.

It remained, still, black, inscrutable under their gaze, telling them nothing, answering none of their questions.

‘Where is the boy?’ asked Te Kahurangi.

‘Jona is with his mother in the serfs’ quarters.’

‘Without him, the Void Glass is… glass. However he made it work in the arena, it does nothing now. If it was even his touch that activated it.’

Tangata Manu turned to look at his brother.

‘After what the Void Glass did, there will be many who would want to see it used again. Even the drukhari who saw it that day, as time passes and their memories fade, may wonder what they could accomplish with it.’

‘The Red Wake may wish it experimented on, to be used again in the name of the Chapter.’

Tangata Manu shook his head. ‘I know the truth now. The Void Father gave the Glass into the keeping of the Forgotten One to take into the Void and keep it there. It was given to us to be lost, not used.’

The Librarian stared at the Void Glass but he said no words.

‘It can’t go back,’ said Tangata Manu. ‘Now that we know what it is, it is too dangerous for us to keep. It is too dangerous for any to keep. It can’t go back.’ The Chaplain looked to his brother. ‘I saw my soul. I saw what I have become.’

Te Kahurangi nodded.

‘As did I. The memory is bitter.’

‘How many of the Chapter do you think could withstand that?’ Tangata Manu’s gaze turned within. ‘I am the monster that once I feared. I have become that which I sought to destroy.’ He looked to his brother. ‘What if the Void Father Himself had looked into the glass?’

‘He sent it away. He gave it to the Forgotten One, to be forgotten.’

‘Should it be remembered, then all would be lost. With such knowledge, none of the Void Father’s children could do what must be done.’

‘It could be held, its purpose unknown, in the Void, as we were charged.’

‘But we know what it does, brother. As do Iraia and Jona. Such knowledge must be lost.’

The Chaplain stared into the face of his brother, each a mirror to the other. ‘The Chapter must believe that I failed in the quest.’

Te Kahurangi’s gaze did not leave the Glass. ‘You know what that will mean?’

‘I know.’

‘And the boy and his mother? It is safer that they die.’

Tangata Manu shook his head. ‘I saw my soul before me. I would not have that be its final truth. But they will not question you.’ The Chaplain turned his gaze to the Void in the Glass. ‘There is a world, a world like to our own of long ages ago. I raised the waters and cleansed it of all filth and corruption. None come there now, save by chance.’ He turned to his brother. ‘Before I return to the Chapter we will consign the Glass to its depths. Let it be lost there, until the stars fall…’

‘…and there is no sound but the silence of the Void.’ His brother finished the formula for him.

And there was silence between the brothers, the silent peace of the Void.

Tangata Manu stood before the brethren, assembled in consistory aboard the Nicor. He stood without armour or weapons, clad only in a simple robe.

Tyberos, the Red Wake, lifted Slake.

Let sentence be executed.

Tangata Manu bowed his head.

Te Kahurangi stood up before the consistory.

‘I ask leave of the brethren and the Chapter. I ask that I may carry out the sentence on Tangata Manu…’ His voice caught. The Pale Nomad swallowed, then continued, ‘…once Chaplain of the Carcharodon Astra. My brother.’

The Red Wake stared at the Librarian. His eyes were black-dark. The dark of the Void.

Tyberos signed his assent.

The brethren rose from their seats in the Chapter house. Te Kahurangi took his place beside Tangata Manu. The brethren stood in silence.

Te Kahurangi raised his bolter. Its muzzle was cold.

The brethren filed in silence from the Chapter house and waited without, a long line of pallid faces and grey armour.

The sound of the bolter, when it came from within, was muffled in the manner characteristic of the weapon when fired at very short range.

The brethren watched while the Chapter-serfs dragged the body away.

Te Kahurangi stood in the silence of the great dome, beneath the Void. It was long before he could find its silence again.

The ocean held the body in its dark, cold depths. The dead man floated, carried by invisible currents far from the reach of the light. For long the body remained there, suspended, in the cold ocean void. But then, slowly, it rose. Arms spread, legs trailing, eyes wide and blind, the body rose upwards.

The waves caught it and sent it over the deep until it reached the shallow sea. There the body washed back and forth, back and forth, flotsam, until it reached the surf line of a low island. The waves carried the body through the surf, pushing it up onto the beach and then dragging it back to the sea with the wash. But the tide was rising, and each wave sent the body a little further up the beach until, finally, the backwash could not carry it back.

The body lay there on the beach, blind eyes staring up at the sky. It lay there for a long time.

The ocean had given it back to the sky.

He coughed.

He coughed and, rolling over, retched the seawater from his lungs in heaving, gasping breaths.

Rolling onto his back, Tangaroa stared up at the sky. The ocean, withdrawing now as the tide turned, washed over his legs but each successive wave fell further down the beach.

Tangaroa blinked. There was a shadow across his eyes.

He wiped the water away and saw a woman looking down at him, holding a young man by the hand.

‘Hello,’ she said.

About the Author

Edoardo Albert is a writer and historian specialising in the Dark Ages. He finds that the wars and cultures of the early Medieval period map very well onto the events of the 40th and 41st millenniums. Silent Hunters is his first novel for Black Library. For Warhammer 40,000, he has also written the short stories ‘Green and Grey’, ‘Last Flight’, ‘Born of the Storm’, and the novella Lords of the Storm.

An extract from Dawn of Fire: Avenging Son.

‘I was there at the Siege of Terra,’ Vitrian Messinius would say in his later years.

‘I was there…’ he would add to himself, his words never meant for ears but his own. ‘I was there the day the Imperium died.’

But that was yet to come.

‘To the walls! To the walls! The enemy is coming!’ Captain Messinius, as he was then, led his Space Marines across the Penitent’s Square high up on the Lion’s Gate. ‘Another attack! Repel them! Send them back to the warp!’

Thousands of red-skinned monsters born of fear and sin scaled the outer ramparts, fury and murder incarnate. The mortals they faced quailed. It took the heart of a Space Marine to stand against them without fear, and the Angels of Death were in short supply.

‘Another attack, move, move! To the walls!’

They came in the days after the Avenging Son returned, emerging from nothing, eight legions strong, bringing the bulk of their numbers to bear against the chief entrance to the Imperial Palace. A decapitation strike like no other, and it came perilously close to success.

Messinius’ Space Marines ran to the parapet edging the Penitent’s Square. On many worlds, the square would have been a plaza fit to adorn the centre of any great city. Not on Terra. On the immensity of the Lion’s Gate, it was nothing, one of hundreds of similarly huge spaces. The word ‘gate’ did not suit the scale of the cityscape. The Lion’s Gate’s bulk marched up into the sky, step by titanic step, until it rose far higher than the mountains it had supplanted. The gate had been built by the Emperor Himself, they said. Myths detailed the improbable supernatural feats required to raise it. They were lies, all of them, and belittled the true effort needed to build such an edifice. Though the Lion’s Gate was made to His design and by His command, the soaring monument had been constructed by mortals, with mortal hands and mortal tools. Messinius wished that had been remembered. For men to build this was far more impressive than any godly act of creation. If men could remember that, he believed, then perhaps they would remember their own strength.

The uncanny may not have built the gate, but it threatened to bring it down. Messinius looked over the rampart lip, down to the lower levels thousands of feet below and the spread of the Anterior Barbican.

Upon the stepped fortifications of the Lion’s Gate was armour of every colour and the blood of every loyal primarch. Dozens of regiments stood alongside them. Aircraft filled the sky. Guns boomed from every quarter. In the churning redness on the great roads, processional ways so huge they were akin to prairies cast in rockcrete, were flashes of gold where the Emperor’s Custodian Guard battled. The might of the Imperium was gathered there, in the palace where He dwelt.

There seemed moments on that day when it might not be enough.

The outer ramparts were carpeted in red bodies that writhed and heaved, obscuring the great statues adorning the defences and covering over the guns, an invasive cancer consuming reality. The enemy were legion. There were too many foes to defeat by plan and ruse. Only guns, and will, would see the day won, but the defenders were so pitifully few.

Messinius called a wordless halt, clenched fist raised, seeking the best place to deploy his mixed company, veterans all of the Terran Crusade. Gunships and fighters sped overhead, unleashing deadly light and streams of bombs into the packed daemonic masses. There were innumerable cannons crammed onto the gate, and they all fired, rippling the structure with false earthquakes. Soon the many ships and orbital defences of Terra would add their guns, targeting the very world they were meant to guard, but the attack had come so suddenly; as yet they had had no time to react.

The noise was horrendous. Messinius’ audio dampers were at maximum and still the roar of ordnance stung his ears. Those humans that survived today would be rendered deaf. But he would have welcomed more guns, and louder still, for all the defensive fury of the assailed palace could not drown out the hideous noise of the daemons – their sighing hisses, a billion serpents strong, and chittering, screaming wails. It was not only heard but sensed within the soul, the realms of spirit and of matter were so intertwined. Messinius’ being would be forever stained by it.

Tactical information scrolled down his helmplate, near environs only. He had little strategic overview of the situation. The vox-channels were choked with a hellish screaming that made communication impossible. The noosphere was disrupted by etheric backwash spilling from the immaterial rifts the daemons poured through. Messinius was used to operating on his own. Small-scale, surgical actions were the way of the Adeptus Astartes, but in a battle of this scale, a lack of central coordination would lead inevitably to defeat. This was not like the first Siege, where his kind had fought in Legions.

He called up a company-wide vox-cast and spoke to his warriors. They were not his Chapter-kin, but they would listen. The primarch himself had commanded that they do so.

‘Reinforce the mortals,’ he said. ‘Their morale is wavering. Position yourselves every fifty yards. Cover the whole of the south-facing front. Let them see you.’ He directed his warriors by chopping at the air with his left hand. His right, bearing an inactive power fist, hung heavily at his side. ‘Assault Squad Antiocles, back forty yards, single firing line. Prepare to engage enemy breakthroughs only on my mark. Devastators, split to demi-squads and take up high ground, sergeant and sub-squad prime’s discretion as to positioning and target. Remember our objective, heavy infliction of casualties. We kill as many as we can, we retreat, then hold at the Penitent’s Arch until further notice. Command squad, with me.’

Command squad was too grand a title for the mismatched crew Messinius had gathered around himself. His own officers were light years away, if they still lived.

‘Doveskamor, Tidominus,’ he said to the two Aurora Marines with him. ‘Take the left.’

‘Yes, captain,’ they voxed, and jogged away, their green armour glinting orange in the hell-light of the invasion.

The rest of his scratch squad was comprised of a communications specialist from the Death Spectres, an Omega Marine with a penchant for plasma weaponry, and a Raptor holding an ancient standard he’d taken from a dusty display.

‘Why did you take that, Brother Kryvesh?’ Messinius asked, as they moved forward.

‘The palace is full of such relics,’ said the Raptor. ‘It seems only right to put them to use. No one else wanted it.’

Messinius stared at him.

‘What? If the gate falls, we’ll have more to worry about than my minor indiscretion. It’ll be good for morale.’

The squads were splitting to join the standard humans. Such was the noise many of the men on the wall had not noticed their arrival, and a ripple of surprise went along the line as they appeared at their sides. Messinius was glad to see they seemed more firm when they turned their eyes back outwards.

‘Anzigus,’ he said to the Death Spectre. ‘Hold back, facilitate communication within the company. Maximum signal gain. This interference will only get worse. See if you can get us patched in to wider theatre command. I’ll take a hardline if you can find one.’

‘Yes, captain,’ said Anzigus. He bowed a helm that was bulbous with additional equipment. He already had the access flap of the bulky vox-unit on his arm open. He withdrew, the aerials on his power plant extending. He headed towards a systems nexus on the far wall of the plaza, where soaring buttresses pushed back against the immense weight bearing down upon them.

Messinius watched him go. He knew next to nothing about Anzigus. He spoke little, and when he did, his voice was funereal. His Chapter was mysterious, but the same lack of familiarity held true for many of these warriors, thrown together by miraculous events. Over their years lost wandering in the warp, Messinius had come to see some as friends as well as comrades, others he hardly knew, and none he knew so well as his own Chapter brothers. But they would stand together. They were Space Marines. They had fought by the returned primarch’s side, and in that they shared a bond. They would not stint in their duty now.

Messinius chose a spot on the wall, directing his other veterans to left and right. Kryvesh he sent to the mortal officer’s side. He looked down again, out past the enemy and over the outer palace. Spires stretched away in every direction. Smoke rose from all over the landscape. Some of it was new, the work of the daemon horde, but Terra had been burning for weeks. The Astronomican had failed. The galaxy was split in two. Behind them in the sky turned the great palace gyre, its deep eye marking out the throne room of the Emperor Himself.

‘Sir!’ A member of the Palatine Guard shouted over the din. He pointed downwards, to the left. Messinius followed his wavering finger. Three hundred feet below, daemons were climbing. They came upwards in a triangle tipped by a brute with a double rack of horns. It clambered hand over hand, far faster than should be possible, flying upwards, as if it touched the side of the towering gate only as a concession to reality. A Space Marine with claw locks could not have climbed that fast.

‘Soldiers of the Imperium! The enemy is upon us!’

He looked to the mortals. Their faces were blanched with fear. Their weapons shook. Their bravery was commendable nonetheless. Not one of them attempted to run, though a wave of terror preceded the unnatural things clambering up towards them.

‘We shall not turn away from our duty, no matter how fearful the foe, or how dire our fates may be,’ he said. ‘Behind us is the Sanctum of the Emperor Himself. As He has watched over you, now it is your turn to stand in guardianship over Him.’

The creatures were drawing closer. Through a sliding, magnified window on his display, Messinius looked into the yellow and cunning eyes of their leader. A long tongue lolled permanently from the thing’s mouth, licking at the wall, tasting the terror of the beings it protected.

Boltgun actions clicked. His men leaned over the parapet, towering over the mortals as the Lion’s Gate towered over the Ultimate Wall. A wealth of targeting data was exchanged, warrior to warrior, as each chose a unique mark. No bolt would be wasted in the opening fusillade. They could hear the creatures’ individual shrieks and growls, all wordless, but their meaning was clear: blood, blood, blood. Blood and skulls.

Messinius sneered at them. He ignited his power fist with a swift jerk. He always preferred the visceral thrill of manual activation. Motors came to full life. Lightning crackled around it. He aimed downwards with his bolt pistol. A reticule danced over diabolical faces, each a copy of all the others. These things were not real. They were not alive. They were projections of a false god. The Librarian Atramo had named them maladies. A spiritual sickness wearing ersatz flesh.

He reminded himself to be wary. Contempt was as thick as any armour, but these things were deadly, for all their unreality.

He knew. He had fought the Neverborn many times before.

‘While He lives,’ Messinius shouted, boosting his voxmitter gain to maximal, ‘we stand!’

‘For He of Terra!’ the humans shouted, their battle cry loud enough to be heard over the booming of guns.

‘For He of Terra,’ said Messinius. ‘Fire!’ he shouted.

The Space Marines fired first. Boltguns spoke, spitting spikes of rocket flare into the foe. Bolts slammed into daemon bodies, bursting them apart. Black viscera exploded away. Black ichor showered those coming after. The daemons’ false souls screamed back whence they came, though their bones and offal tumbled down like those of any truly living foe.

Las-beams speared next, and the space between the wall top and the scaling party filled with violence. The daemons were unnaturally resilient, protected from death by the energies of the warp, and though many were felled, others weathered the fire, and clambered up still, unharmed and uncaring of their dead. Messinius no longer needed his helm’s magnification to see into the daemon champion’s eyes. It stared at him, its smile a promise of death. The terror that preceded them was replaced by the urge to violence, and that gripped them all, foe and friend. The baseline humans began to lose their discipline. A man turned and shot his comrade, and was shot down in turn. Kryvesh banged the foot of his borrowed banner and called them back into line. Elsewhere, his warriors sang; not their Chapter warsongs, but battle hymns known to all. Wavering human voices joined them. The feelings of violence abated, just enough.

Then the things were over the parapet and on them. Messinius saw Tidominus carried down by a group of daemons, his unit signum replaced by a mortis rune in his helm. The enemy champion was racing at him. Messinius emptied his bolt pistol into its face, blowing half of it away into a fine mist of daemonic ichor. Still it leapt, hurling itself twenty feet over the parapet. Messinius fell back, keeping the creature in sight, targeting skating over his helmplate as the machine-spirit tried to maintain a target lock. Threat indicators trilled, shifting up their priority spectrum.

The daemon held up its enormous gnarled hands. Smoke whirled in the space between, coalescing into a two-handed sword almost as tall as Messinius. By the time its hoofed feet cracked the paving slabs of the square, the creature’s weapon was solid. Vapour streaming from its ruined face, it pointed the broadsword at Messinius and hissed a wordless challenge.

‘Accepted,’ said Messinius, and moved in to attack.

The creature was fast, and punishingly strong. Messinius parried its first strike with an outward push of his palm, fingers spread. Energy crackled. The boom generated by the meeting of human technology and the sorceries of the warp was loud enough to out-compete the guns, but though the impact sent pain lancing up Messinius’ arm, the daemon was not staggered, and pressed in a follow-up attack, swinging the massive sword around its head as if it weighed nothing.

Messinius countered more aggressively this time, punching in to the strike. Another thunderous detonation. Disruption fields shattered matter, but the daemon was not wholly real, and the effect upon it was lesser than it would be upon a natural foe. Nevertheless, this time it was thrown backwards by the blow. Smoke poured from the edge of its blade. It licked black blood from its arm and snarled. Messinius was ready when it leapt: opening his fist, ignoring the sword as it clashed against his pauldron and sheared off a peeling of ceramite, he grabbed the beast about its middle.

The Bloodletters of Khorne were rangy things, all bone and ropey muscle, no space within them for organs. The false god of war had no need for them to eat or breathe, or to give the semblance of being able to do so. They were made only to kill, and to strike fear in the hearts of those they faced. Their waists were solid, and slender, and easily encompassed by Messinius’ power fist. It squirmed in his grip, throwing Messinius’ arm about. Servo motors in his joints locked, supplementary muscle fibres strained, but the White Consul stood firm.

‘Tell your master he is not welcome on Terra,’ he said. His words were calm, a deliberate defiance of the waves of rage pulsing off the daemon.

He closed his hand.

The daemon’s midriff exploded. The top half fell down, still hissing and thrashing. Its sword clanged off the paving and broke into shards, brittle now it was separated from its wielder. They were pieces of the same thing, sword and beast. Apart, the weapon could not survive long.

Messinius cast down the lower portion of the daemon. There were dozens of the things atop the wall, battling with his warriors and the human soldiery. In the second he paused he saw Doveskamor hacked down as he stood over the body of his brother, pieces of armour bouncing across the ground. He saw a group of Palatine Sentinels corner a daemon with their bayonets. He saw a dozen humans cut down by eldritch swords.

Where the humans kept their distance, their ranged weapons took a toll upon the Neverborn. Where the daemons got among them, they triumphed more often than not, even against his Space Marines. Support fire rained down sporadically from above, its usefulness restricted by the difficulty of picking targets from the swirling melee. At the western edge of the line, the heavy weapons were more telling, knocking daemons off the wall before they crested the parapet and preventing them from circling around the back of the Imperial forces. Only his equipment allowed Messinius to see this. Without the helm feeds of his warriors and the limited access he had to the Lion Gate’s auspectoria, he would have been blind, lost in the immediate clash of arms and sprays of blood. He would have remained where he was, fighting. He would not have seen that there were more groups of daemons pouring upwards. He would not have given his order, and then he would have died.

‘Squad Antiocles, engage,’ he said. He smashed a charging daemon into fragments, yanked another back the instant before it gutted a mortal soldier, and stamped its skull flat, while switching again to his company vox-net. ‘All units, fall back to the Penitent’s Arch. Take the mortals with you.’

His assault squad fell from the sky on burning jets, kicking daemons down and shooting them with their plasma and bolt pistols. A roar of promethium from a flamer blasted three bloodletters to ash.

‘Fall back! Fall back!’ Messinius commanded, his words beating time with his blows. ‘Assault Squad Antiocles to cover. Devastators maintain overhead fire.’

Squad Antiocles drove the enemy back. Tactical Space Marines were retreating from the parapet, dragging human soldiers with them. An Ultramarine walked backwards past him, firing his bolter one-handed, a wounded member of the Palatine Guard draped over his right shoulder.

‘Fall back! Fall back!’ Messinius roared. He grabbed a human by the arm and yanked him hard away from the monster trying to slay him, almost throwing him across the square. He pivoted and punched, slamming the man’s opponent in the face with a crackling bang that catapulted its broken corpse over the wall edge. ‘Fall back!’

Mortal soldiers broke and ran while Squad Antiocles held off the foe. Telling to begin with, in moments the assault squad’s momentum was broken, and again more bloodletters were leaping over the edge of the rampart. The Space Marines fired in retreat, covering each other in pairs as they crossed the square diagonally to the Penitent’s Arch. The mortals were getting the idea, running between the Adeptus Astartes and mostly staying out of their fire corridor. With the fight now concentrated around Squad Antiocles, the Devastators were more effective, blasting down the daemons before they could bring their weight of numbers to bear upon Antiocles. Sporadic bursts of fire from the retreating Tactical Marines added to the effect, and for a short period the number of daemons entering the square did not increase.

Messinius tarried a moment, rounding up more of the humans who were either too embattled or deaf to his orders to get out. He reached three still firing over the parapet’s edge and pulled them away. A daemon reared over the parapet and he crushed its skull, but a second leapt up and cleaved hard into his fist, and power fled the weapon. Messinius pumped three bolts into its neck, decapitating it. He moved back.

His power fist was ruined. The daemon’s cut had sliced right through the ceramite, breaking the power field generator and most of the weapon’s strength-boosting apparatus, making it a dead weight. He said a quick thanks to the machine’s departed spirit and smashed the top of his bolt pistol against the quick seal release, at the same time disengaging the power feeds by way of neural link. The clamps holding the power fist to his upper arm came loose and it slid to the floor with a clang, leaving his right arm clad in his standard ceramite gauntlet. A century together. A fine weapon. He had no time to mourn it.

‘Fall back!’ he shouted. ‘Fall back to the Penitent’s Arch!’

He slammed a fresh clip into his bolt pistol. Squad Antiocles were being pushed back. The Devastators walked their fire closer in to the combat. A heavy bolter blasted half a dozen daemons into stinking meat. A missile blew, lifting more into the air. Messinius fell back himself now, leaving it to the last moment before ordering the Assault Marines to leap from the fray. Their jets ignited, driving back the daemons with washes of flame, and they lifted up over his head, leaving four of their brothers dead on the ground. Devastator fire hammered down from above. Anti-personnel weapons set into casemates and swivel turrets on the walls joined in, but the daemons mounted higher and higher in a wave of red that flooded over the parapet.

‘Run!’ he shouted at the straggling human soldiery. ‘Run and survive! Your service is not yet done!’

The Penitent’s Arch led from the square onto a wall walk that curved around to another layer of defences. His Space Marines were already making a firing line across the entrance. A gate could be extended across the arch, sealing the walk from the square, but Messinius refrained from requesting it be closed, as the humans were still streaming past the Adeptus Astartes. Kryvesh waved the banner, whirling it through the air to attract the terrified mortals. The Space Marines fired constantly into the mass of daemons sprinting after them, exhausting their ammunition supplies. Shattered false bodies tumbled down, shot from the front and above, yet still they came, overtaking and dismembering the last warriors fleeing away from the parapet.

Squad Antiocles roared through the arch, landing behind their brethren. Messinius passed between them. For a moment he surveyed the tide of coming fury. Endless red-skinned monsters filling the square like a lake of spilled blood, washing over a score of brightly armoured Space Marine corpses left behind in the retreat. Several hundred humans lay alongside them.

He opened a vox-channel to Gate Command.

‘Wall batteries three-seven-three through three-seven-six, target sector nine five eighty-three, Penitent’s Square, western edge. Five-minute bombardment.’

‘On whose order?’

‘Captain Vitrian Messinius, White Consuls Chapter, Tenth Company. I have the primarch’s authority.’ As he dealt with gunnery control, he was also datapulsing a request for resupply, and checking through layered data screeds.

‘Voice print and signum ident match. Transponder codes valid. We obey.’

The far side of the square erupted in a wall of flame. Heavy cannon shells detonated in a string along the rampart. High-energy beams sliced into the square, turning stone and metal instantly to superheated gas. The approaching daemons were annihilated. A few bolt-rounds cracked off as the last daemons nearing the Space Marine line were put down.

‘Company, cease fire. Conserve ammunition.’ Nobody heard him. Nobody could. He re-sent the order via vox-script. The boltguns cut out.

Penitent’s Square was a cauldron of fire so intense he could feel the heat through his battleplate’s ceramite. The ground shook under his feet and he considered the possibility that the wall would give way. The noise was so all-consuming the idea of speech lost relevance. For five minutes the Lion’s Gate tore madly at its own hide, ripping out chunks of itself in a bid to scrape free the parasites infesting its fabric, then, as suddenly as it had begun, the bombardment ceased.

Where the Penitent’s Square had been, a twisted mass of black metal and shattered stone remained. So formidable were the defences of the Lion’s Gate that the structure beneath had not been penetrated, but it was like this, in small bursts of destruction, that they could lose this war.

Messinius accessed the gate’s noosphere. No daemons had as yet rounded the projecting Penitent’s Spur to come up against their new position. When the attack came again, which it would, it would come from the front.

An ammunition train raced down the walkway from the fortress interior and came to a squealing stop fifty yards away. Medicae personnel jumped down. A Space Marine Apothecary came with them. Human peons rushed about with heavy sack bags full of bolter magazines, passing them out to the transhumans. Spent magazines clattered to the floor. New ones were slammed home. Messinius contacted his squad leaders, taking a quick census of his surviving men, not trusting the digits that read ‘Company Casualties 23%’ blinking in the upper right of his visual field.

Through the smoke given off by burning metal on the far side of the ruined square, he saw movement. Auspex returns tripped his armour’s machine-spirit, and it blinked warnings in his helm.

<threat detected.>

‘They’re coming again,’ he said.

‘My lord?’ A soft voice, one that did not belong in that moment. He ignored it.

‘Engage at fifty-yard range. Make every shot count.’

The ammunition train was hurriedly relieved of their allotted supplies, and sped off, bearing the worst-wounded, to aid whichever beleaguered unit needed it next.

‘Stand ready.’

‘My lord?’ The voice became more insistent.

The voidships in orbit were beginning to fire. Their targeting systems were perturbed by the boiling warp energy and the vortex in constant motion over the Imperial Palace, and many shots went wide, crashing down into the Anterior Barbican, a few falling as far out as Magnifican.

Red monsters bounded towards them, as numerous as before, as if their efforts to thin them had been for naught.

‘Fire,’ he said coldly.

‘My lord, your duty rotation begins in half an hour. You told me to wake you.’

This time he heard. Bolters boomed. Messinius froze them with a thought, and with another he shut down the hypnomat entirely.

Vitrian Messinius awoke groggily.

‘My lord,’ his servant said. Selwin, he was called. ‘You are returned from your recollections?’

‘I am awake, Selwin, yes,’ Messinius said irritably. His mouth was dry. He wanted to be left alone.

‘Shall I?’ Selwin gestured to the hypnomat.

Messinius nodded and rubbed his face. It felt numb. Selwin flicked a number of toggles on the hypnomat and it powered down, the steady glow of its innards fading to nothing and winking out, taking the immediacy of Messinius’ memories with it.

‘The wall again?’ Selwin asked.

The hypnomat’s primary use was to instil knowledge without active learning on the subject’s part, but it could reawaken memories to be lived again. Full immersion in the hypnomat required cooperation from Messinius’ catalepsean node, and coming out of the half-sleep was never as easy as true waking. Reliving past events dulled his wits. Messinius reminded himself to be guarded. He forgot sometimes that he was not on Sabatine any more. The local saying ‘This is Terra’ encompassed a multitude of sins. Spying was among them.

‘Yes,’ he said. ‘Personal debriefing.’ He shook his head and unplugged the hypnomat’s input cables from the neural ports set into his arms and neck. ‘Nothing new learned.’

Selwin nodded, then hesitantly said, ‘If I may be so bold as to ask, why do it, my lord, if you expect to learn nothing?’

‘Because I can always be wrong,’ Messinius said. He pointed at the hypnomat. It was a bulky machine set on a trolley, but not too big for an unaltered man to move. ‘Take that away. Inform my armourer I will be with him in a few minutes.’

Selwin bowed. ‘Already done, my lord.’

Click here to buy Dawn of Fire: Avenging Son.

A Black Library Publication

First published in Great Britain in 2021.
This eBook edition published in 2021 by Black Library, Games Workshop Ltd, Willow Road, Nottingham, NG7 2WS, UK.

Produced by Games Workshop in Nottingham.
Cover illustration by Vladimir Krisetskiy.

Silent Hunters © Copyright Games Workshop Limited 2021. Silent Hunters, GW, Games Workshop, Black Library, The Horus Heresy, The Horus Heresy Eye logo, Space Marine, 40K, Warhammer, Warhammer 40,000, the ‘Aquila’ Double-headed Eagle logo, and all associated logos, illustrations, images, names, creatures, races, vehicles, locations, weapons, characters, and the distinctive likenesses thereof, are either ® or TM, and/or © Games Workshop Limited, variably registered around the world.
All Rights Reserved.

A CIP record for this book is available from the British Library.

ISBN: 978-1-80026-513-4

This is a work of fiction. All the characters and events portrayed in this book are fictional, and any resemblance to real people or incidents is purely coincidental.

See Black Library on the internet at
blacklibrary.com

Find out more about Games Workshop’s world of Warhammer and the Warhammer 40,000 universe at
games-workshop.com

To my squad of noisy hunters, Theo, Matthew and Isaac.

eBook license

This license is made between:

Games Workshop Limited t/a Black Library, Willow Road, Lenton, Nottingham, NG7 2WS, United Kingdom (“Black Library”); and

the purchaser of a Black Library e-book product (“You/you/Your/your”)

(jointly, “the parties”)

These are the terms and conditions that apply when you purchase a Black Library e-book (“e-book”). The parties agree that in consideration of the fee paid by you, Black Library grants you a license to use the e-book on the following terms:

* 1. Black Library grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free license to use the e-book in the following ways:

o 1.1 to store the e-book on any number of electronic devices and/or storage media (including, by way of example only, personal computers, e-book readers, mobile phones, portable hard drives, USB flash drives, CDs or DVDs) which are personally owned by you;

o 1.2 to access the e-book using an appropriate electronic device and/or through any appropriate storage media.

* 2. For the avoidance of doubt, you are ONLY licensed to use the e-book as described in paragraph 1 above. You may NOT use or store the e-book in any other way. If you do, Black Library shall be entitled to terminate this license.

* 3. Further to the general restriction at paragraph 2, Black Library shall be entitled to terminate this license in the event that you use or store the e-book (or any part of it) in any way not expressly licensed. This includes (but is by no means limited to) the following circumstances:

o 3.1 you provide the e-book to any company, individual or other legal person who does not possess a license to use or store it;

o 3.2 you make the e-book available on bit-torrent sites, or are otherwise complicit in ‘seeding’ or sharing the e-book with any company, individual or other legal person who does not possess a license to use or store it;

o 3.3 you print and distribute hard copies of the e-book to any company, individual or other legal person who does not possess a license to use or store it;

o 3.4 you attempt to reverse engineer, bypass, alter, amend, remove or otherwise make any change to any copy protection technology which may be applied to the e-book.

* 4. By purchasing an e-book, you agree for the purposes of the Consumer Protection (Distance Selling) Regulations 2000 that Black Library may commence the service (of provision of the e-book to you) prior to your ordinary cancellation period coming to an end, and that by purchasing an e-book, your cancellation rights shall end immediately upon receipt of the e-book.

* 5. You acknowledge that all copyright, trademark and other intellectual property rights in the e-book are, shall remain, the sole property of Black Library.

* 6. On termination of this license, howsoever effected, you shall immediately and permanently delete all copies of the e-book from your computers and storage media, and shall destroy all hard copies of the e-book which you have derived from the e-book.

* 7. Black Library shall be entitled to amend these terms and conditions from time to time by written notice to you.

* 8. These terms and conditions shall be governed by English law, and shall be subject only to the jurisdiction of the Courts in England and Wales.

* 9. If any part of this license is illegal, or becomes illegal as a result of any change in the law, then that part shall be deleted, and replaced with wording that is as close to the original meaning as possible without being illegal.

* 10. Any failure by Black Library to exercise its rights under this license for whatever reason shall not be in any way deemed to be a waiver of its rights, and in particular, Black Library reserves the right at all times to terminate this license in the event that you breach clause 2 or clause 3.